Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
Volume VII
Unit Control Panel
INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL
This Operating and Maintenance Manual is and contains confidential and proprietary information of
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l, as properly indicated which shall not be used or disclosed to others, except with the
written permission of Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
Within this Manual, subsections of sub supplier documentation are present as originally received.
Here is briefly described the organization of the company, based on its experience as a
manufacturer and on a continuos effort to meet customers needs.
Being aware of the importance of maintenance in all operational activities, Nuovo Pignone deals
with its various aspects from the design stage, through:
In late years Nuovo Pignone after-sales service has also been brought up-to-date to guarantee the
best support to its customers. In more details:
- worldwide,
where Nuovo Pignone has been operating for tens of years, the structure consists of a service
network which is the natural expansion of the "Customer Service Division" in Florence.
There are localized Service Units and authorized Service Shops at strategic points of the world, to
cover areas where plants with Nuovo Pignone machinery are located.
- in Florence, ( Headquarters)
specialized depts. which are active from the receipt of the enquiry, to the issue of the offer and, in
case of an order, to the management of all activities connected with the job, up to its completion.
This organization, available for all customers, ensures a qualified interface to refer to for any
requirements in connection with operation/maintenance of machinery.
The names and address for localized Service Units and authorized Service Shops are available at
GE POWER SYSTEM WEB SITE (URL: http://www.gepower.com) selecting from its home
page the following choices: Business sites/GE Nuovo Pignone/Sales Organization (complete URL:
http://www.gepower.com/geoilandgas/oil_gasbrands/nuovo_pignone/sales_org.html).
In the section “Service” of this page are available the names and addresses of localized Service
Units divided into geographical areas.
In the above indicated web site, in the section “New Units” are available the names and addresses
of the Branch Offices Abroad divided into geographical areas.
Nuovo Pignone has been managing for many years special after sales "Support Packages". These
packages typically include:
Product engineering departments are staffed with experts in analysing machinery operating data,
who provide users with technical consulting services aimed at optimizing use of equipment. The
entire service organization guarantees users get the most suitable maintenance to restore original
design conditions and the total information relevant to all technological innovations introduced in
Nuovo Pignone's products as applicable to the installed machinery.
Full flexibility allows us to adapt each maintenance contract upon User's needs.Service Agreements
in force today, range from "On call" basis to "Global Service"
VOLUMES INDEX
The complete instructions of the compressor unit are subdivided into ten Volumes as
follows:
- INSTRUMENTATION Volume VI
Each Volume is subdivided into Sections. Each Section can be subdivided into Paragraphs
and/or Parts.
MAIN INDEX
The included documentation proper of this instructions manual is subdivided into two
sections as follows:
NAME SECTION
DRAWINGS A
MANUALS B
DRAWINGS
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 2 of 63
11. GE O&G CONTROLLERS DESCRIPTION .................................................. 34
11.1 PROCESS CONTROL............................................................................................................34
11.1.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................34
11.1.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW....................................................................................................35
11.1.2.1 Process Controller.........................................................................................................36
11.1.2.2 Pressure Override Control ............................................................................................38
11.1.2.3 Coupling Control ...........................................................................................................38
Selection Logic.........................................................................................................................................................................38
Start/Stop sequence...................................................................................................................................................................41
Valve Repositioning .................................................................................................................................................................42
11.2 ANTISURGE CONTROL ..............................................................................................................44
11.2.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................44
11.2.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW....................................................................................................46
11.2.2.1 Antisurge Control Law ..................................................................................................49
11.3 STEAM TURBINE GOVERNOR ....................................................................................................53
11.3.1 Steam Turbine (Note 1).....................................................................................................53
11.3.1.1 Operation Mode.............................................................................................................53
Turbine Start.............................................................................................................................................................................54
Normal Stop..............................................................................................................................................................................57
Emergency Shutdown...............................................................................................................................................................59
11.3.1.2 Controllers.....................................................................................................................60
Speed Controll ..........................................................................................................................................................................60
Cascade Control........................................................................................................................................................................62
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 3 of 63
1. SCOPE
The present document outlines the Operating and Control Philosophy of a gas compressor
Set, driven by a Steam Turbine SNC1 3 model.
1. PLC Triconex TMR for all logic sequences, Antisurge and Performance Controllers,
Steam Turbine Speed Controller.
3. Bently Nevada (3500 series) monitoring system for Radial Vibration, Axial
Displacement, Temperatures.
4. Turbine Overspeed System Bently Nevada 3500 Series.
5. Personal Computer System with monitor, keyboard and printer (REMOTE HMI).
Video pages are developed with Wonderware software.
NOTES:
The Bently Nevada System transmits data to PLC system in serial link and trip
signals to PLC in hardwired mode.
The auxiliary Equipment sequences (pumps, motors, etc.) commads are managed by
LOC.HMI and REM.HMI.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 4 of 63
The LCP Panel (installed off skid, near the compressor train) is provided with the
following instrumentation:
- Compressor Start/Stop (HS 3118, HS 3084) ESD (XHS 3120) and ESD reset Push Button
<3> (HS 3085).
- Compressor Running (XL 3314), Permissive OK (XL 3313), Common Alarm (XL 3312)
and Trip Indications (XL 3311).
- Suction valve open/close push button (XHSO 3030, XHSC 3030).
- Discharge valve open/close push button (XHSO 3031, XHSC 3031).
- Suction valve open/close indication (XZLO 3030, XZLC 3030).
- Discharge valve open/close indication (XZLO 3031, XZLC 3031).
- Suction/Discharge pressure indication (PI 3095B, PI 3096B).
- Suction flow indication (FI 3290B).
- Lube oil, control oil pressure indication (PI 3403E, PI 3471B).
- Seal gas diff. pressure indication (PDI 3461B).
- A/S valve position indication (UZI 3293B).
- Turbine speed indication (SI 3049E).
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 5 of 63
3. MACHINERY PREPARATION FOR START-UP
3.1 Auxiliaries start-up procedure
NOTE:
All auxiliaries are under PLC control.
The auxiliaries start-up sequence is relative to the first machine start-up; during following
start-ups, all auxiliaries start-up may not be needed because not strictly mandatory or already
running. TC 3740 must be put to Auto Mode with 122° F setpoint before auxiliary Start-up
sequence.
The lube oil tank heaters are managed by the ON/OFF hand selector installed on LCP
<3> (NCR 3741).HS 3200 LOC/REM must be in LOC position to operate from LCP or
<4> LOC.HMT. When “OFF” mode is selected the heaters are OFF. When “ON mode” is
selected, the heaters are controlled by TE 3744, TSHH 3745A, TSHH 3745B and LT 3404
as follows :
- TSL 3744 Lube Oil Reservoir Temperature Low causes the activation of the
heaters. (Temperature 77°F)
- TSH 3744 Lube Oil Reservoir Temperature High causes the deactivation of the
heaters.
(Temperature > 104°F)
<3> - TSHH 3745A/B Lube Oil Heater cut-out switch (Temperature>185°F)(MCC) for
207RM- 330A/B
- LSL 3404 Lube oil reservoir low level
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 6 of 63
3.3 Main & Stand-by Lube Oil Pumps
There are two lube oil pumps, KG 330A and KG 330B.
3 REVISED
KG WHERE
330B is<3an
> electric pump and KG 330A is a pump driven by a turbine.
Stand-by lube oil pump (KG 330B) can be manually started from LOC.HMI, REM.HMI
by relevant Start command (NCR 3201 on LOC/REM.HMI).
Stand-by oil pump can be manually stopped from LOC.HMI, REM.HMI, DCS by relevant
stop commands (NCS 3201B on LOC/REM.HMI, NCS 3201A on DCS).
Lube oil stand-by pump starts automatically when turbine speed is not zero (SSLL 3101) and
one of the following conditions occur:
- PSL 3411 Lube oil delivery pumps low pressure (press. < 116 Psig);
- PSL 3403 Lube oil header low pressure (press. < 23.21 Psig);
NOTE:
1. The stand-by pump keeps on running until an action is taken by the operator
2. The stand-by pump can only be stopped if both pressures are normal or the turbine is
stopped.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 7 of 63
3.4 Run Down / Cool Down Tank
The Run Down / Cool Down Tank is a system that guarantees a safe amount of oil to
the machine during its deceleration after the detection of lube oil system trip caused by
both pump failures.
Three phases must be described in order to define the behaviour of the Run Down
Tank:
o The filling-up phase: during which the tank is quickly filled up of oil through
valve XV 3302. In detail LT-3401 controls the XV 3302
valve according to following indications:
LSL 3401=0 Run Down Tank low level is detected, then XV-3302 is
opened
(solenoid energized).
LSL 3401=1 Run Down Tank low level is not detected, then XV 3302 is
closed (solenoid de-energized).
o The feeding phase: during which the tank is kept filled with a small stream of oil
through the orifice FO 3702. This is done to maintain the
tank oil temperature close to the lube oil system temperature.
<3> o The emptying phase: during which the tank is emptied to the machines. This event will
o occur only in case of an emergency shutdown for loss of
lube oil pressure.
The lube oil control temperature is performed by mixing two streams of oil at different
temperatures: the cold one from lube oil coolers and the warm one directly from lube
oil pumps delivery.
TC 3740 on PLC regulates the warm oil flow through TV 3740 in order to maintain
the resulting mixed lube at the desired set point (122 °F).
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 8 of 63
3.6 Electric Turning Gear
Turning Gear can be enabled manually by actuating the Turning gear auto/off (HS
3126) selector switch on LCP. ETG must be enabled (switched in AUTO HS 3126)
during machine operation in order for it to be ready to perform steam turbine
cooldown phase in case of a TRIP or a normal shutdown . Upon detection of
ZEROSPEED condition the ETG will be started from the PLC automatically.
A soft start-stop panel (supplied by GENP and installed in auxiliary electrical room)
will provide electric power to the turning gear increasing its speed gradually up to the
full speed. Electric Turning Gear is automatically stopped if at least one of the
following conditions occurs:
Once stopped, ETG disengages automatically due to the mechanical clutch operation when
steam turbine speed is higher than turning gear speed.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 9 of 63
4. SEAL GAS SYSTEM CONTROL
The dry gas seal system, is composed by 3 different parts: the 1st one has the scope to
inject filtered seal gas to the seals, the 2nd one is to monitor the gas leakage and the
proper working of seals, the 3rd one has the scope to inject a separation gas (N2) for a
safe and certain separation between the seals area and the lube oil area.
Seal gas is taken from compressor discharge. It is connected by piping to the panel where
it is filtered by a special compact design double filter. Filters condition is monitored by a
differential pressure transmitter (PDT 3465) with high differential pressure alarm set at
21.8 Psi and by a local differential pressure gauge (PDG 3464).
The control valve PDV 3461 controlled by a PDC (seals-suction diff. pressure and
balancing line diff. pressure) (PDC 3461), controls filtered buffer gas in order to have a
constant flow injection on both seals at each side of the compressor.
This assures that gas seals work with filtered gas only. The controlled differential
pressure and the balancing drum pressure are monitored by Differential Pressure
Transmitter (PDT 3461) with high differential pressure alarm set at 65.3 Psi
(PDAH 3461).
The leakages passing through the primary seals are connected by piping to the seal gas
panel, where an orifice (FO 3772 and FO 3773) on each side is tuned to maintain a
differential pressure of 4.35 Psi with normal leakage and under normal operating
condition. This differential pressure across the orifices is needed in order to have a certain
flow passing through the secondary seals in order to properly cool the secondary seal
ring. Across each orifice there are pressure differential transmitters with relevant PDAL
and PDAH alarms. If primary seal leakage increases, an alarm shall be activated by PDT
3453 and PDT 3454). In case of first seal face damage, a shutdown signal is activated by
a high high pressure trip detected by (PT 3455A,B,C and PT 3460A,B,C) (2oo3system)
set at 72.52 Psig. A shutdown with compressor depressurization will occur (see
Depressurization Sequence - Chapter 11).
The monitoring of the secondary seal’s condition is carried out with the transmitters on
the primary vent lines. A low PDAL alarm shall be generated using the pressure
differential transmitter signals. This alarm indicates that secondary seal leakage has
increased.
The secondary vent lines are simply connected to an atmospheric vent on safe location,
directly from the compressor connections.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 10 of 63
4.3 Nitrogen injection (separation gas)
Purpose of nitrogen injection is to keep the lube oil separated from process gas on tertiary
seal ring. The nitrogen flow is controlled by a pressure regulator (PCV 3448) and injected
on both sides of compressor.
Nitrogen to be injected as separation gas is taken from the plant network.
Separation gas for tertiary seal always needs filtration. For this purpose a double filter,
with two transfer valves (3 ways) inlet and outlet, is installed inside the panel. Filter
condition is monitored by a differential pressure transmitter (PDT 3447) .
The injection is carried out adjusting the pressure with a regulating valve PCV 3448 on
the N2 inlet header.
The correct injection on each side is guaranteed by (FO 3768 and FO 3769).
With low signal of the pressure transmitter (PT 3449) Lube Oil Pump is prohibited to
start-up (press. < 65 Psig).
Pressure transmitter PT 3451 is installed on the separation gas header. On detection of
<3> low low pressure on separation gas header (press. < 44 Psig) an alarm is activated and a
shutdown of compressor is activated.
Purpose of the intermediate nitrogen injection is to avoid the process gas passing through
the secondary ring from the primary one, reaching the secondary vent and, consequently,
the atmosphere.
The seal gas conditioning system is designed to remove liquids in a gas stream and then
heat the gas stream above the dew point. The intent is to remove liquids that may be
present at discharge temperature and pressure, and raise the temperature high enough to
avoid any additional liquid from condensing in the dry gas seal control panel, the dry gas
seal, or anywhere in-between. A provision is also included to boost seal gas flow during
times when the compressor discharge pressure is not enough to supply sufficient flow to
the seals, such as during startup, shutdown, and recycle.
Hydrogen is taken from compressor discharge at discharge pressure and temperature and
enters the seal gas conditioning package at connection TP 160 (see SOS8628460 sh. 1).
Hydrogen enters the Cleanpac seal gas liquid separator (KV 302). Stage one of liquid
separation is accomplished by passing the gas through a vane type separator where bulk
liquid will be removed from the gas stream and fall to the bottom of the lower liquid
holding chamber. Stage two of separation is through a coalescing filter element that will
remove fine aerosol mists, and particulate down to 3 micron. Coalesced liquid will gather
in the upper liquid holding chamber.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 11 of 63
Liquid levels are monitored using level transmitters (LT 3490A and LT 3490B).
Differential pressure across the Cleanpac is measured using PDT 3442. An alarm set at
10 Psi will signal maintenance is required. Gas exits the top of the vessel, free of liquids
and particulate larger than 3 microns.
If the compressor is generating less than 72.5 Psid of differential pressure (using PT 3096
and PT 3095), the Ampliflow seal gas intensifier (K 301) will be activated by the control
system opening the XY 3303 solenoid valve which will open an air actuated block valve
(XV 3303). Drive gas from connection TP 165 will then be regulated (PCV 3440), and
enter the Ampliflow seal gas intensifier drive piston.
The Ampliflow will then cycle. Seal gas from the outlet of the Cleanpac will enter the
driven or process side of the Ampliflow where the reciprocating action will boost seal gas
flow through the system. If the compressor is generating more than 72.5 Psi of differential
pressure, the Hydrogen will bypass the Ampliflow through a check valve.
After exiting, or bypassing, the Ampliflow the seal gas enters an electric seal gas heater
(207RM 334). Here, the seal gas temperature will be increased above the dew point of the
gas. The heater outlet temperature is controlled using a SCR type temperature controller
mounted in a separate heater control panel (installed in auxiliary electrical room). The
heater control panel receives seal gas temperature from TT 3765. This signal is used for
control of the heater. TT 3763 is mounted to the heater element and the signal TSHH
3763 is used by the heater control panel to shut down the heater in the event of a heater
element over temperature condition (901°F). TT 3764 is mounted to the heater vessel and
is used to shut down the heater in the event of a heater shell over temperature condition
<4> (TSHH 3764 set at 380°F). All 3 temperature transmitters (TT 3765,TT 3763,TT 3764)
are wired directly to the heater control panel and then 4-20mA signals are repeated to the
PLC. Alarms and permissive to start interlock for low seal gas temperature TSL 3765
will be provided inside the PLC and shown in LOCAL HMI, REMOTE HMI and DCS. A
remote setpoint from PLC to heater control panel is sent as a 4-20mA signal. The seal gas
temperature setpoint can be adjusted from LOCAL/REMOTE HMI, only in ENG mode.
Dry, pre-filtered, and heated Hydrogen seal gas then exits the dry gas seal conditioning
system and enters the dry gas seal control panel.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 12 of 63
5. STEAM TURBINE OPERATING PROCEDURE
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 13 of 63
B) Check that all Permissive to start conditions are active;
If all above permissives are met, permissives OK signals lamp on LCP (XL
3313) goes ON and HMI shows “Permissive to Start”.
C) Press. “ESD Reset” pushbutton on LCP (HS 3085), LOC/REM HMI or SIS (XS
3046) to generate the following actions:
C1) Set Clear Command to speed governor (PLC)
C2) Inhibit “trip has occurred” from PALL 3471 (Control Oil Pressure);
D) Press “Trip valve open” command on LCP (XHSO 3315), LOC/REM HMI to
generate the following actions:
D1) Activate XY 3052 (Steam Turbine Preloading Solenoid valve);
D2) after 30 seconds activate XY 3306, XY 3307 (Steam Turbine Trip Sol.
Valves CLOSED);
E) On receiving Steam Inlet Trip Valve Open (XZSO 3052, XSZO 3305) the
following actions shall be taken:
E1) “Ready to Start” indication on Speed Control graphic page goes on;
E2) Operator selects to perform the Turbine start-up in an automatic (see
5.2.3), or semiautomatic (see 5.2.1) mode by means of relevant selector
on LCP (HS 3117);
E3) Press “Unit Start” (HS 3118) on LCP;
E4) Run Command to speed governor (PLC) is set;
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 14 of 63
PERMISSIVE TO START ACTIVE
AUTO OPERATION
RESET S/D
MANUAL OPERATION
DISPLAY
DELAY 30"
CONNECTOR
ENERGIZE TRIP SOLENOID VALVE
RESET EXTERNAL TRIP SIGNAL
DE-ENERGIZE PRELOAD
DISABLE OVERRIDE TRIP
SOLENOID VALVE
READY TO
TRIP VALVE OPEN
START
START-UP SEQUENCE
SELECTOR
(AUTO/SEMIAUTO)
TURBINE START
HS 3117
(ON LCP) 1 2
AUTO SEMIAUTO
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 15 of 63
5.2 Test before start-up
The objective of this test is to verify the capability of TRIP oil system (with only one branch)
to reach a correct depressurization that permit the closure of TRIP Valves XV 3052 and XV
3305.
Relevant limit switch (XZSO 3306 not active) to show NOT-OPEN position
16. Sequence continues if all previous steps are satisfied otherwise start-up abort
occurs and alarm XA 3214 is generated (see Note 1)
17. As per step 2 the solenoid valve XY 3052 is still energized
<4> 18. Sequence continues by deenergizing the preload solenoid XY 3052 which opens
the TRIP valves XV 3052 and XV 3305
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 16 of 63
General Note
The limit switches installed on solenoid valves XY 3306 and XY 3307 are used in
following criteria:
Energized solenoid:
XZSO not active (NOT-OPEN)
Denergized solenoid
XZSO active (OPEN)
Note 1: Problem must be resolved and then start procedure must commence again at Section 5.1
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 17 of 63
5.3 Start-up Procedure
The Steam Turbine start-up is performed from 0 rpm to minimum control speed (7100
rpm) from LCP. Then the control is performed from LCP or from LOC/REM HMI.
On LCP, the “semiautomatic-automatic” selector (HS 3117) allows the operator to choose
either automatic or semiautomatic startup procedures.
The two startup procedures are configured inside the speed controller (Triconex PLC) and
guarantee the correct operation of the steam turbine against operator’s possible mistakes.
Once turbine speed exceeds 300 rpm, XL 3314 on LCP (Compressor Running) will be lit.
All ramp rates and hold times are programmable for both hot and cold start-up conditions.
For commissioning only the control differentiates between hot and cold starts by using an
hours-since-trip timer.
This timer starts when a shutdown has occurred and turbine speed has decreased below the
idle speed setting (1500 rpm).
If the time elapsed from the latest shutdown is longer than the time before which the
turbine is hot and shorter than the time after which the turbine is considered cold, an
interpolation between the two reference values is carried out.
The “speed control LOC/REM” selector (SHS 3116) enables the “speed raise” and “speed
lower” pushbuttons softswitches or the Performance Controller set-point to be cascaded to
the Speed Controller respectively.
Electric Turning Gear must be enabled from selector switch on LCP (HS 3126 switched in
AUTO) in order to be ready for cooldown phase in case of a trip on normal shutdown.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 18 of 63
5.3.1 Semiautomatic Start-up procedure
When the semi-automatic mode is selected, the start-up sequence is completed in
semiautomatic mode and consists of the following steps:
1. The turbine speed set point is increased in an automatic way to reach the 1st warm
up speed value (1500 rpm). (The ramp slope according to which the set point
changes is set by means of parameter Rate to 1st warm up hot/cold). At the same
time the operator must manually increase the VALVE LIMITER SETPOINT
value from the local HMI (using “valve limiter setpoint raise” HS 3655 and
“valve limiter setpoint lower” HS 3656 soft pushbuttons). Operator must increase
valve limiter set-point in less then 30 seconds after pressing START button, or
machine will trip on zero-speed as it excepts to see some speed after 30 seconds.
This time cannot be changed. By increasing the valve limiter the speed of the
turbine increases up to the 1st warm speed of 1500 rpm. The operator may now
set the valve limiter setpoint to 100%.
2. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops. After the
warmup time the sequence may be resumed only upon a manual action of the
operator through “Continue” command on LCP (HS 3114), LOC/REM HMI (HS
3222) or DCS (HS 3224) (provided the necessary warm up time had elapsed).
3. The speed set point (the slope of its ramp) increases according to the slope set on
Rate to target hot/cold in the turbine controller parameters.
During this phase the operator will be able to stop the turbine acceleration by the
pressing the “Auostart sequence Halt” pushbutton HS 3113 on LCP or from the
equivalent soft pushbutton on the LOC/REM.HMI (HS 3225), or DCS (HS 3227). If
<3> the turbine speed is in critical band and a halt signal is detected, it will be stored by
the system until the speed is no longer in the critical band, then becomes operative.
To restore the automatic sequence of the turbine speed governor, it is necessary to
actuate the “Continue” command on LCP (HS 3114), LOC/REM.HMI (HS 3222) or
DCS (HS 3224).
During start-up one critical speed band range (6650÷7050 rpm) is provided and the
ramp slope is increased automatically.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
3 REVISED WHERE <3> ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 19 of 63
2
VALVE LIMITER
SETPOINT
INCREASE AUTO OPERATION
DECISION
NO IDLE SPEED
REACHED?
CONNECTO
R
CONTINUE COMMAND
HS-3114
NO SPEED
SPEED SET-POINT CRITICAL
RAMP TO MIN. OPER. RANGE?
SPEED
YES
NO CONTINUE COMMAND
HS 3114
NO MIN. OPER.
SPEED
REACHED?
YES MIN.
CONTROL
SPEED
REACHED
(7100 rpm)
ANTISURGE &
PERFORMANCE CONTROL
ENABLE
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 20 of 63
5.3.2 Automatic Start-up
1. The turbine speed set point is increased in an automatic way to reach the 1st warm
up speed value. (The ramp slope according to which the set point changes is set by
means of parameter Rate to 1st warm up hot/cold).
If during this phase, the turbine speed should increase over the pre-established
set-point ramp slope, the automatic sequence must be immediately aborted with
operator intervention and the turbine consequently stopped.
2. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops; when the 1st
warm up time is elapsed (900 sec. on cold-start) the speed set point starts to increase
automatically to reach the target set-point (minimum operating speed) (7100 rpm).
The warm-up time will be automatically calculated, considering the length of time
the unit was shut-down according to the Start-up diagram.
3. During this phase the operator will be able to stop the turbine acceleration by the
“Halt” command on LCP(HS 3113), LOC/REM HMI (HS 3225), DCS (HS 3227).
In case the turbine is in critical speed range, stop command is held by the system and
becomes effective automatically only when the turbine comes out of critical speed
range.
To restore the automatic sequence of the turbine speed governor, it is required to
actuate the “Continue” command on LCP (HS 3114), LOC/REM HMI (HS 3222),
DCS (HS 3224).
While the turbine is going through critical speed band range, the ramp slope is
increased automatically for this time.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 21 of 63
1 AUTO OPERATION
DECISION
NO IDLE SPEED
REACHED?
DISPLAY
START WARM-UP
TIMER
CONNECTOR
SPEED SET-POINT
RAMP TO MIN. OPER.
SPEED
NO SPEED
CRITICAL
RANGE?
YES
HALT COMMAND? YES
HS 3113
CONTINUE COMMAND
HS 3114
NO MIN.
MIN. OPER.
OPER.
SPEED
SPEED
REACHED?
YES MIN.
CONTROL.
SPEED
Fig.03
REACHED
(7100 rpm)
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 22 of 63
5.3.3 Sequence after Start-up
As soon as the turbine reaches the minimum operating speed, the Antisurge and
Performance controller could be enabled either manually and automatically by relevant
selector on LCP.
The operator can increase or decrease the speed by manual operation through the speed
set point Raise / Lower command on LCP (SHS 3111, SHS 3112), LOC/REM HMI (HS
3218, HS 3219) and DCS (SHS 3113, SHS 3114).
Train speed can be automatically increased by the coupled action of performance and
antisurge controllers until the operating point is reached. To enable this feature the
selector SPEED CONTROL LOCAL/REMOTES HS 3116 must be switched to “remote”
position and the antisurge controller activated from the LCP. Once the MIN.GOV
SPEED / LOAD HS 3115 selector is switched to the “load” position, the compressor
working point will be brought up to reach the desired discharge pressure by the combined
action of the antisurge valve closing and turbine speed increase.
The operator may decide to stop the turbo compressor through the Stop command on
LCP (HS 3084), LOC/REM HMI (HS 3228), DCS (HS 3230).
The steam turbine is gradually brought back to the min. operating speed (7100 rpm);
Antisurge controller opens the Antisurge valve until it is fully open. Then the turbine
speed will decrease gradually to the idle value according to the slope rate on start-up
diagram. Then the turbine will be stopped closing both the steam turbine trip valves (XY
3312, XY 3313, XY 3306, XY 3307).
The Controlled Stop sequence can be interrupted by the operator, actuating the
“Raise/lower” speed set point command on LCP (SHS 3111, SHS 3112),
LOC/REM.HMI (HS 3220, HS 3221); in this case, the governor will begin
controlling the turbine speed, interrupting the deceleration ramp (only if outside of the
critical speed band).
Operating the “Continue” command on LCP (HS 3114), LOC/REM.HMI (HS 3222),
DCS (HS 3224), the normal stop sequence will be re-enabled.
The controller STOP procedure can be paused with the “AUTOSTART SEQUENCE
HALT” pushbutton on LCP (SHS 3113) when speed is below minimum control speed
(7100 rpm).
In case of operator wants to cancel the stopping sequence after interrupting it with RAISE
pushbutton (SHS 3111), the speed set-point must be raised manually above the minimum
control speed (7100 rpm) by action of RAISE button.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 23 of 63
5.5 Over-speed Test
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 24 of 63
6. EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN
The steam turbine trip logic will be managed by the PLC system, which will control the
trip signals coming from the plant, as well as all trip signals coming from the N.P steam
turbine skid, except for the overspeed trip that will be managed directly by the B.N.3500
Overspeed System. The emergency shut-down pushbutton will be present on LCP (XHS
3120), UCP (XHS 3318), DCS (HS 3208). Automatic EXTERNAL EMERGENCY
SHUTDOWN can be initiated by plant SIS interlocks (XS 3047 A/B/C - triplicated NC
contacts).
In case of trip, (except for overspeed trip SSHH 3052 and H.H. Radial Vibration Trip
VSHH 3107B/C) the PLC logic deenergises the Trip solenoid valves XY 3306, XY 3307
causing immediate stop of the turbo-compressor due to closure of the trip steam inlet
valves, (XV 3052, XV 3305) and the immediate opening of the Antisurge valve UV 3293
by means of the solenoid valve UY 3293. At the same time the Emergency Antisurge
valve UV 3294 (quick opening type, installed in parallel to Antisurge valve) will be
opened by means of its solenoid valve UY 3294. Quick opening of the Emergency
antisurge valve will avoid surging phenomenon during machine coast down.
At the same time, PLC disables the antisurge, performance and speed controller
functions. This action will force the governor valve SV 3049 to move into closed
position.
In case of trip for overspeed or high high radial vibration, the relative system (Bently
Nevada 3500) sends a redundant signal to a safety relay installed in the compressor
control panel, in order to de-energize trip, antisurge and emergency antisurge solenoid
valves directly. An additional trip signal is still repeated in hardwired mode to PLC
(SAHH 3052 and VAHH 3107A).
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 25 of 63
6.2 Isolation and blowdown valves sequence during shutdown
Upon detection of zerospeed condition SLL 3101 the PLC will wait 1 minute before
initiating the automatic closure of compressor suction isolation valve XV 3030 and
compressor discharge isolation valve XV 3031. During this delay time the Operator can
manually close the isolation valves by pressing the relevant pushbuttons XHSC 3030 and
XHSC 3031 (on LCP).
In case of shutdown for primary seals rupture (high high primary vent pressure PSHH
3455 or PSHH 3460) it’s necessary to immediately depressurize the machinery. This
procedure will be performed automatically by the PLC system with the following steps:
The blowdown valve will be closed automatically upon pressure of BLOWDOWN circuit
reset softswitches (LOC/REM HMI) if the trip condition is resolved.
When the compressor is stopped and isolation valves are closed the blowdown valve XV
3027 can be manually opened for testing or maintenance thanks to a dedicated pushbutton
on the local HMI.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 26 of 63
6.3 Trip solenoid valves Automatic Test
The system consists of 4 solenoid valves divided in 2 branches. One branch is capable to
initiate the trip of the machine. Each solenoid has 1 limit switch (Fully open position)
The solenoids valves XY 3312 and XY 3313 (upstream respect to PT 3476 and PT 3477) are
normally open (normally de-energized), and act as test valves
The solenoids valves XY 3306 and XY 3307 (installed downstream respect to PT 3476 and
PT 3477) are normally closed (normally energized) and act as trip valves.
The online test is activated automatically from the local HMI and consists of the following
steps, applicable for each branch:
Initial condition
The test solenoid valves XY 3312 and XY 3313 (upstream respect to PT 3476 and PT 3477)
are normally open (normally de-energized).
The trip solenoid valves XY 3306 and XY 3307 (downstream respect to PT 3476 and PT
3477) are normally closed (normally energized).
Test Sequence
Energize test solenoid valve
Verify by limit switch the complete closure of test solenoid valve (XZSO not active)
De-energize the trip solenoid valve
Verify by limit switch the opening of trip solenoid valve after 5 sec (XZSO active)
Verify by pressure transmitter the depressurization of line (under 7.25 psig) within 3 sec.
Energize to close the trip solenoid valve
Verify by limit switch the complete closure of trip solenoid valve after 5 sec. (XZSO not
active)
De-Energize test solenoid
Verify by limit switch the opening of test solenoid after 5 sec (XZSO active)
Verify by pressure transmitter the pressurization of line (oil pressare between the two valves
higher than 90% oil trip pressure) within 3 sec.
If the result of test is not Ok the logic will lead the actions showed in following C&E
matrix. In case of trip during the test the logic will de-enerigize all 4 solenoids. During
normal operation in case of loss of limit switch the logic will lead the actions showed in
C&E matrix.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 27 of 63
6.3.2 C&E matrix
start
On Line test conditions
Failure Test during start-up X
Failure Test during running machine (1st branch Not Ok ) X X
Succesful test during running machine (Ok) X
Failure Test during running machine (2nd branch Not Ok with Ok 1st branch) X X
Failure Test during running machine (2nd branch Not Ok with Not Ok 1st branch) X X
Failure Test during running machine (2nd branch Ok with Not Ok 1st branch) X X
The failure of both tests on the two branches means that the machine cannot be normally
stopped by means of the automatic system. It is required that the operator shuts down the
machine by mean of the manual TRIP valve HV 3102 and proceed with the needed
maintenance to the TRIP solenoid valves and associated instrumentation or materials.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 28 of 63
7. OVERSPEED PROTECTION SYSTEM
Triple redundant “Overspeed protection system” will be realized in the B.N.3500 System.
In case a turbine overspeed should occur, the overspeed protection system must
immediately generate the compressor train shut-down.
The turbine solenoid trip valves XY 3306, XY 3307, directly connected to this system to
avoid delay in the loop response by means of the safety relay, shall be de-energized and
the Antisurge controller output shall be forced to the minimum signal.
The compressor steam turbine radial vibration, axial displacement and temperature probes
are connected by means of the Proximitors to the Bently Nevada monitor series 3500,
placed inside UCP cabinet.
To perform the Trip function on PLC, the B.N. monitor transmits triplicated common trip
digital signals.
The machine axial displacement trip is performed in 2oo2 voting logic in each B.N. axial
displacement card.
The machine radial vibration trip is performed in 1oo2 voting logic in each B.N. radial
vibration card.
The Keyphasor probe (VT 3101), provide a precise timing measurement.
<3> In case of any fault of B.N. system, the monitor sends “B.N. monitor failure” hardwired
signal to the logic to perform Alarm function.
Note:
<3> 1) In order to avoid false trip, B.N. monitor will automatically by-pass the fault channel. A
LED indication on bypassed B.N. card informs the operator about the fault channel.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 29 of 63
9. PROCESS GAS CIRCUIT VALVE SEQUENCE
For each compressor speed, it’s possible to determine, on the plane SUCTION FLOW –
COMPRESSION RATIO, a curve that describes all compressor operating points. Each
obtained curve meets its limits on the surge point, corresponding to the maximum
polytropic head. All surge points, defined for different speeds, represent the limit line, on
the left of this line (called SURGE LIMIT LINE “SLL”), the compressor operates in an
unstable area.
The purpose of the “ANTISURGE CONTROL SYSTEM” is to avoid that the operating
point “A” reaches the “SLL”. To achieve this objective, it’s defined, on the right of the
“SLL”, a protection line where (point “B”) the control system will operate opening the
Antisurge valve. This line is called “SURGE CONTROL LINE” (“SCL”). The opening
of the Antisurge valve increases the suction flow moving the operating point along the
speed characteristic curve, from the critical condition to the stable operating area (Fig.
04).
(Fig.04)
The Antisurge regulator avoids that the compressor working point moves to surge zone.
For this reason, inside the Antisurge regulator, the surge curve SLL is set. The
compressor shows instability phenomena on the left side of SLL.
<3> This SLL curve, moved rightward by the multiplication factor Kb (flow margin, normally
10%), represents the SCL protection curve. On this base, the Antisurge regulator set-point
is defined.
When the compressor working point moves at the left side of the SCL the regulator will
intervene by opening the Antisurge valve, increasing the flow at compressor suction.
At this point, the compressor work point will return in the safe zone (right side of SCL
curve).
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 30 of 63
During the start-up phase, the Antisurge solenoid valves are energized as a consequence
of pushing “trip valve open” button on LCP (XHSO 3315). Energizing the solenoid
valve, the 4-20mA signal to Valve Positioner is enabled and the ASV is kept fully open.
Antisurge and Performance Controllers are disabled, during this phase. They can be
enabled either manually or automatically when the minimum control speed is reached. If
enabled, the Antisurge Controller closes gradually the Antisurge Valve following a pre-
set ramp while the Performance Control increases the speed until the working point has
been reached.
In the event of a machine trip or deviation to left of the surge limit line for more than 10
seconds, both solenoid valves on the antisurge, UV 3293 and parallel A/S valve (quick
opening) UV 3294, are de-energized.
The performance controller function is to keep constant the compressor Discharge Pressure.
The TRICONEX PLC will receive as inputs the following signals:
The process controller will measure the discharge pressure PT 3096 and will send a speed
demand to the speed governor in order to meet a pressure setpoint.
During the startup sequence the performance controller will be activated to ramp the
compressor up to the desired discharge pressure. Once the minimum operating speed has
been reached the PIC demand signal will be diverted to the antisurge valve in order to close it
and have the operating point reach the process control line (PCL) in the pressure ratio/flow
diagram. Once the PCL has been reached, the demand will be switched to the turbine control
valve to increase the speed. The working point will follow the plant resistance and move
rightwards up to when the controller limit line (CLL) is reached.
When the LCP switch (SHS 3116) is in the REMOTE position, the PC 3096 output is
cascaded to the speed controller (SIC 3049) set point. This LCP switch is the cascade
enable/disable coupling between the pressure controller and speed controller.
When the LCP switch (SHS 3116) is in the LOCAL position, the turbine speed can be
<3> manually increased/decreased from the LCP, LOC/REM HMI or DCS (see 5.3.3).
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 31 of 63
From this point the switchover between antisurge valve closure and speed raise is repeated
until the pressure set point is reached and the working point moves to the operating point
(Fig. 05).
(Fig.05)
<3> SLL=Surge Limit Line
SCL=Surge Control Line
PCL=Performance Control Line
CLL=Control Limit Line
<3> Remarks: The pressure transmitters for PAHH are located near to the compressor, PAHH trip
set point is the MAWP. The pressure drop between the compressor and exchanger allow the
compressor to trip before the overpressure reaches the MAWP of E 306. The maximum
operating pressure are based on the NP compressor datasheet latest issue.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 32 of 63
10. COMPRESSOR SUCTION & DISCHARGE ISOLATION VALVES
The compressor suction/discharge valve XV 3030 & XV 3031 have the following instruments
and commands:
These valves, after a trip command or a controlled stop, close automatically upon reaching
zerospeed signal.
Operator can also close the valves with the closing manual command. The close manual
commands, however, are disabled during normal operation.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 33 of 63
11. GE O&G CONTROLLERS DESCRIPTION
The following sections explain general features at the GE O&G antisurge, process and
steam turbine governor controllers. The description is generic and not specifically related
to this implementation. It is included here for client and operator knowledge.
11.1.1 INTRODUCTION
Compressor control system is a framework containing different features. Some types of
control can be used separately such as Process Control and Load Sharing but others need to
be implemented to couple the above-mentioned devices to other flow internal control FIC
elements, such as Antisurge and Pressure Override control POC.
Fig. 1-1 shows the compressor control flow chart, where is depicted the framework in
which are inserted the dedicated digital controller, listed below.
PROCESS CONTROLLER
LOAD SHARING
COUPLING CONTROL
ANTISURGE
POC
A compressor train consisting of two or more unit working in parallel needs a load sharing
Controller to distribute equally among the compressors, not necessary be identical
machines.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 34 of 63
11.1.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW
Axial and centrifugal compressors require a control loops to manipulate the speed,inlet
valve, or guide vanes to match compressor performance to process demand. Moreover, the
Process Controller system is designed to drive the compressor out of the surge area in the
start up phase. If surge phenomenon is encountered, the Antisurge controller will override
the Process Controller.
Fig. 2-1 shows a control schematic where the Process Controller is highlighted and the
recycling valve open/close command coming from Process Controller is processed by the
interconnected FIC control.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 35 of 63
11.1.2.1 Process Controller
Compressor suction and discharge pressure are the main process variables to be controlled.
This purpose is brought by the Process Controller, which input is the either the suction than
the discharge pressure transmitter signals coming from the field.
Process Controller PIC generates demand signal acting on either the compressor anti-surge
valve position than the engine speed in order to modify the compressor load to match the
set point and the measured values. Process Control features are all based on PID,
Proportional-Integrative-Derivative controller, that is a type of feedback controller whose
output, a control variable (CV),
is generally based on the error (e) between some user-defined set point (SP) and some
measured process variable (PV). The PID controller computations are addressed in cutting
the error down and anticipating the system response. The PID implemented grant bumpless
control mode transfer, avoiding unwanted disturbance in the control loop.
The PID controller is provided of tracking Anti-Windup, in order to avoid any limit
cycling or even instability, that integrator windup may cause. The Process Controller is
automatically enabled after a settable delay since the compressor has reached the minimum
operating speed.
Process Control maintains the pressure conditions also when any change of flow is
required by the plant or caused by a disturbance. In Fig. 2-3 the flow change occurs
keeping the speed constant and than the Process Control takes over, reducing the speed in
order to keep the pressure constant.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 36 of 63
If the flow reduction request continues, the Process Control lowers compressor speed until
the Process Control Line (PCL) is met. From this point the flow control switches from
process to antisurge control. The latter controller increases flow, increasing the compressor
speed, in order to avoid any surge occurrence. Both control are independent one from the
other and the coupling control, see chapter 2.3, avoids any disturbance that may be caused
by the concurrent action of both antisurge and process control. Refer to section 2.3.1:
SELECTION LOGIC of page 9 for the switching logic from antisurge to process control
and the other way round. In case that the compressor train consists of two or more
compressors working in parallel, as shown in Fig. 2-4, the Process Control is unique for all
the process, while an Anti-surge and Load Sharing device control each single compressor.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 37 of 63
11.1.2.2 Pressure Override Control
Compressor working in series shares the same gas line so that the discharge for a
compressor is the inlet for the next one. It is extremely important to control the pressure in
between two attached stages. In order not to exceed the compressor maximum suction
pressure a Pressure Override Controller POC compare the signalled pressure to a set-point;
whenever happens a pressure surplus the POC acts, through process control and anti-surge,
opening the recycle valve so to decrease the discharge pressure and restore the operating
conditions. This type of control is shown in fig. 2-5.
The POC can be used any time a safety protection on a discharge line is needed with the
compressor provided of an anti-surge valve.
Selection Logic
The Selection Logic block switches the control from antisurge action to flow demand
controller, that can act on the throttling valve or the speed controller or the IGV and vice
versa and compressor operating point contingent conditions determine the control choice.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 38 of 63
Two curves are added to SLL and SCL, in the operating plane, as shown in Fig. 2-6 and
according to the position of compressor operating point in the Pressure Ratio- Flow plane
is activate the selection logic.
PCL = Process Control Line, evaluated as a 3% distance in flow to the right of SCL.
CLL = Compressor Control Line, 5% in flow distance to the right of SCL.
The movement of compressor operating point in the Pressure Ratio- Flow plane, as
detected by the antisurge controller, is notified to the Process Controller by the logic signal
OPCAL, operating point crossing antisurge valves. The signal is processed according to
the following rules also illustrated in Fig. 2-7:
If compressor operating point crosses the PCL line leftward, the OPCAL signal is
set to TRUE (red).
If compressor operating point crosses the CCL line from left to right, the OPCAL
signal is reset to FALSE (blue).
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 39 of 63
The Process Controller demand is switched on antisurge valve if, at least, one of the
following conditions is verified:
Close antisurge valve if the Process Controller increases demand (UP) and
operating point on the CLL right side.
Open antisurge valve if the Process Controller decreases demand (DOWN) and
operating point on the PCL left side or flow demand controller on minimum
operating position.
The demand is switched to the flow demand controller if at least one of the following
conditions is verified:
Open flow demand controller if the Process Controller increases demand (UP)
and operating point on the PCL left side or antisurge valve closed.
Table 2-1 summarises the selection logic. A final remark on signal to be done is that the
flow demand controller position remains frozen, when the antisurge valve acts to open the
antisurge valve while, acting to open the flow demand controller the antisurge valve is kept
frozen.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 40 of 63
Start/Stop sequence
The Start/Stop sequence regards the operations applied after reaching the compressors
minimum operative speed MOS. At speed lower than MOS, during the start-up and normal
stop phases, the antisurge controller is disabled so that the recycling valve is completely
opened.
There is no difference between Start and Stop sequence, apart their initial conditions.
Before the Start sequence acts, the compression train is stopped; therefore the antisurge
control valves are forced to be open by de-energising the antisurge solenoid valves. During
the gas compression process start up phase, the antisurge solenoid valves are energised.
This action enables the antisurge controller signal output, but the antisurge controller is
still disabled, forcing the recycling to open until the minimum operating speed is reached.
The Start sequence truly begins
when the antisurge regulator is enabled after MOS is achieved and its output reaches
100%, recycling valve closed position, with a pre-set time. At the same time, the Process
Control regulator output is activated and slowly increase its value with a pre-set ramp. The
antisurge and PIC outputs constitute the control variables for the start sequence.
The Stop sequence begins with the operating point already placed in the design point, with
antisurge control activated and in fact covers backward the path done by the Start sequence
until the MOS is encountered.
The start sequence is illustrated in Fig. 2-8 and begins at point 1, where MOS is reached.
From this point on, the gradual antisurge valve closing action causes the compression ratio
to increase and therefore a decrease in the demand signal.
The operating point moves leftward until reaches the Process Control Line PCL, point 2 of
the figure. From now on, the Process Control regulator freezes the output towards the
valves and starts to increase compressor speed.
The operating point starts moving rightwards following the plant resistant curve,
represented by the antisurge valve characteristic until the CLL is reached, point 3 of Fig. 2-
8. Again, the output signal is diverted towards the antisurge valves and the operating point
moves toward the PCL.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 41 of 63
The sequence continues as just described until the Process Control set-point is reached;
therefore the compressor gets on line, by reaching the design operating point required by
the plant. From this point on the master controllers take compressors performances under
control. Fig. 2-9 reports the flow chart for Start sequence.
Fig. 2-10 illustrates the Stop sequence flow chart, that basically covers the Start Up
procedure backward. Starting from the operating point placed in the design configuration,
with the antisurge valve completely close, the Stop sequence goes along again towards the
PCL, with the Process Controller reducing speed, point 8of figure 2-8.
Fig. 2-8. The antisurge controller open the valve increasing the flow at speed constant until
the CCL is encountered, point 7. This procedure continues until MOS is reached and only
than the Normal Stop sequence shuts down the compressor.
Valve Repositioning
The repositioning logic is used to set the compressor working at the appropriate operating
point if any disturbance occurs. New steady states can be possible after the any disturbing
event, possibly leaving the compressor under avoidable and even dangerous conditions.
Repositioning valve logic operates with slow actions, in order to avoid instability in the
process and once activated and terminates after the proper conditions are recovered.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 42 of 63
The unwanted disturbance can dangerously leave the operating point in the surge area,
between SLL and SCL with the recycling valve closed, point A in Fig. 11. In this case the
repositioning logic will slowly open the antisurge valve to obtain the proper safety
conditions. Another undesirable condition leaves the operating point in the safety area,
after the SCL, but with the recycling valve open, see point B. This occurrence lowers
compressor efficiency and is recovered slowly closing the antisurge valve.
If this condition persists longer than a fixed time, typically 60 seconds, and the start
sequence is terminated, the repositioning logic is enabled.
Repositioning valve logic terminates after the antisurge valve has reached the correct
opening position, with the working point placed in the surge zone, otherwise if the recycle
valve closes completely if the operating point is in the safe area.
The actions taken by the repositioning valve logic, while activated, are the following:
Close Antisurge valve if compressor operative point is far from surge line, to the
CLL right, and Engine speed set-point is not at the minimum. If the speed setpoint
is at its minimum value, the repositioning logic is not active. As a consequence, the
compressor discharge pressure increases and the Process Controller reacts
decreasing the action on speed.
Open Antisurge valve if compressor operative point is close to surge line, to the
PCL left. This time, the compressor discharge pressure decreases and the Process
Controller reacts increasing the speed set point.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 43 of 63
11.2 Antisurge Control
11.2.1 INTRODUCTION
A simple description of the surge phenomenon can be given, having a look at the flow -
differential pressure plane, as shown in Fig. 1-2 Centrifugal-compressor performance
curve, where is illustrated a compressor curve for a constant speed.
Suppose there is a steady state at point A and there comes a sudden decrease in gas
demand, experienced by the compressor as a differential pressure increase.
Since speed changes of heavy rotating mass as compressors, require a great lag time such
as several minutes. Therefore, on a shorter term, speed may be considered constant.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 44 of 63
At a constant speed the compressor cannot keep up as much flow against a higher pressure,
so flow goes down toward the SCL to point B, as reflected in the curve and called surge
point. The locus of the surge points for all compressor speeds, above and below the
characteristic curve, is then called surge limit line. The flow here has fallen to the least the
impeller can handle without losing grip on the gas. From the surge line on, any further
decrease in downstream demand no longer result in increased differential pressure. Instead,
the impeller suddenly loses its effectiveness as a motive element and immediately the gas
begins spinning around with the impeller. As the pipeline gas coasts to a stop, the
operating point falls to zero flow at point C.
Gas begins leaking backwards as a flow reversal and is shown in the picture Fig. 1-2 as a
continuation of the jump past point C to point D, lying on a theoretical extension of the
normal characteristic (point B) into negative flow. Then, within a short time the differential
pressure goes down to the minimum the impeller, decoupled by the gas, can maintain with
centrifugal force only, point E. There, the impeller suddenly gains grip on the gas and push
it forward to point F on the normal characteristic curve. If line flow is still restricted below
the surge point for
the given speed, the described cycle B-C-D-E-F repeats at regular intervals, typical on the
order of one second.
The consequences of surge are severe. Surge is a powerful process disturbance that can
disrupt or trip the process. It can also damage the compressor. Damage to seals and
bearings are common. Seal clearances will be increased as a result of surge, lowering
compressor output and efficiency. Even one cycle can have unwanted consequences in
terms of compromise operations, altering internal clearances and overstressing seals. The
costs alone of replacing the compressor seals are in order of €20K to €50K, thus applying a
suitable and effective control strategy must prevent surge. Catastrophic surge incidents can
result in complete destruction of the rotor.
In order to prevent such economic losses an effective antisurge control system is required,
for every turbo-compressor. Fig. 1-3 shows a piping and instruments schematic, where is
depicted the dedicated digital controller which is the heart of an advanced antisurge control
system.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 45 of 63
11.2.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW
The piping and instrument diagram shown in, represents a compressor provided of
antisurge valve. The energy produced by a turbine or an engine moves compressors shaft
and process gas sucked up in the inlet. Finally the line users shared out the gas, compressed
to the desired pressure ratio.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 46 of 63
The outlet gas is also feed-backed to the antisurge valve. If the recycle valve is not closed,
the process gas is allowed to get back to the compressor inlet, reducing the compression
ratio. In a system of this type, the dedicated digital controller, heart of an advanced surge-
control system, receives inputs:
Inlet pressure
Temperature
Flow
Head across the compressor
Compressor speed.
If gas composition is subject to appreciable change, an indication of that variable, such as
density, may be included. Characteristic curves for various temperatures and various inlet
pressures and compositions are available to the control algorithm as equations or look-up
tables, see chapter 2.
The advanced controller’s reaction time may be well under 50 milliseconds. The algorithm
attempts to duplicate the action of an experienced human operator having an eye on the
instruments, a hand on the manual valve control and a wish to minimize energy waste
resulting from prolonged recycling. This requires a combination of closed-loop (feedback)
and open-loop (prearranged) control. The system keeps the recycle valve closed as long as
the operating point is well away from the known surge line. As the operating point
approaches the surge line, the
control algorithm becomes more sensitive to its motion. Getting too close or moving too
suddenly toward the line causes the valve to open by an appropriate amount to halt
progress toward surge smoothly without triggering control oscillations. Should extraneous
circumstances continue to force the operating point toward the surge line, the recycle valve
opens all the way. If a load reduction persists, then after a relatively long time (perhaps a
few minutes), speed typically is reduced by the compressor control system.
Consequently, unless the reduced flow is beneath the capability of the compressor, the
operating point and the surge point move away from each other, and the surge controller
gradually shuts the recycle valve. The compressor has kept a firm grip on the gas.
The control features are all based on PID, Proportional-Integrative-Derivative controller,
that is a type of feedback controller whose output, a control variable (CV), is generally
based on the error (e) between some user-defined set point (SP) and some measured
process variable (PV). The PID controller computations are addressed in cutting the error
down and anticipating the system response.
The PID implemented grant bumpless control mode transfer, avoiding unwanted
disturbance in the control loop.
The characteristic of PID controller:
o Proportional control; reduces the rise time and reduces, but never eliminate, the
o steady-state error.
o Integral control; eliminates the steady-state error, worsening the transient
o response.
o Derivative control; increases the stability of the system, reducing the overshoot,
o and improving the transient response.
The PID controller is provided of tracking Anti-Windup, in order to avoid any limit
cycling or even instability, that integrator windup may cause.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 47 of 63
All compressors operating points are described on the suction flow – differential pressure
plane. There is a different curve for each speed, altogether forming the compressor’s wheel
map (Fig. 2-2). In each line is possible identifying the so-called “surge point”,
corresponding to the maximum differential pressure that limits the stable area of the speed
constant curves. The locus of surge point for all compressor speeds, above and below the
characteristic curve in question, is called surge limit line (SLL). The flow here has fallen to
the minimum impeller can handle,
without losing its grip on the gas and represents the limit after which corresponds to an
unstable behaviour of the compressor.
The antisurge control (ASCV) system main goal is to avoid the compressor operating point
(A) to reach SLL. This purpose is obtained defining a protection line on the right side of
SLL. This safety line is called surge control line (SCL).
The ASCV system will act opening the antisurge valve. This action increases the suction
flow therefore the operating point moves backwards along the speed characteristic curve,
from the critical condition to the stable operating area.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 48 of 63
11.2.2.1 Antisurge Control Law
Considering a mono-stage centrifugal compressor, it is possible to verify the followings
relations for each surge point, varying the compressor speed N, where Qs is the suction
volumetric flow and Hp the polytropic head:
Where
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 49 of 63
leads to Eq. 2-7
Introducing this equation into Eq. 2-5, Eq. 2-8 is obtained representing all the surge points
in function of the orifice differential pressure Δp. It is possible demonstrate how the surge
phenomenon is not influenced by the gas condition and composition.
Therefore, for small compression ratios and small n variations, the terms:
The Eq. 2-9 defines the SLL shape, on the plane of compression ratio (ρ) versus flow (Q)
and is represented by a parabola which has the minimum located in ρ = 1 and Q = 0, see
Fig. 2-3.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 50 of 63
Fig. 2-3 highlights a theoretical wheel map, characteristic for a single stage compressor
(one impeller only), while the Fig. 2-4 shows typical multistage compressor behaviour.
The multistage compressor surge limit line puts in evidence that the surge control line
cannot be realized using a parabola, since this approximation excluding a large part of
compressor operating area.
Fig. 2-5 shows the solution to this lost of operability. The SLL is evaluated by a tenbreak
lines function generator f(Pd-Ps/Ps) and consequently the relevant SCL, moving the SLL
right side of a pre-set percentage margin (K). The following section illustrates the
algorithm used to evaluate the surge control line.
The control algorithm developed from Eq. 2-9 and used inside the controller requires as
process variables, suction, discharge and design pressures and the differential pressure
evaluated at a calibrated orifice positioned at compressor suction
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 51 of 63
The controller set point is K2. It represents the deviation margin between “SLL” and
“SCL”. In the “Antisurge Control Line configuration sheet”, the margin is expressed in
percentage of flow.
The algorithm takes in account the ΔP measured across the flow element (indicated by
“hs”) that is proportional to square suction flow (hs = Q2).
The controller algorithm compensates continuously the hs signal according to the suction
pressure variation, taking in account the suction pressure measured and comparing it with
the design suction pressure.
NOTE: the same algorithm is applied for pipeline compressors where the flange to eye
characteristic instead of a traditional flow element is used.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 52 of 63
11.3 Steam Turbine Governor
ST Governor is an innovative and complete and easy to use product designed exclusively
to control steam turbine, offering all features expected by any type of control required:
SPEED
INLET PRESSURE
EXTRACTION
LOAD
CASCADE
The power of this system comes out from its integration capabilities, from dozens of
control loops and sequences in the same panel up to a whole co-generation plant.
The power of the control system is well managed by the ST Governor which can be
completed with HMI system, in order to perform plenty of diagnostic tasks, such as
plotting analog/ digital trends, storing events, logging the alarm history.
ST Governor is easy to use, just need to be integrated in the plant control and the
programming is reduced to a simple parameter configuration, according to the plant
specification. The choice between control types is among the parameters to be defined
within the configuration worksheets.
Note 1: this manual refers to the ST Governor steam turbine governor version 2.00. For
any other version please read the relevant documentation.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 53 of 63
Once the 1st warm up is reached, and the time necessary has elapsed (which can be
obtained from the start-up diagram of the turbine being considered) the speed set point
grows in automatic mode until the target value is reached according to a ramp with slope
equal to the value set in “Rate to target hot” or “Rate to target cold” according as to
whether a “hot” start-up or a “cold” start-up is carried out (even in this case if the time
elapsed from the latest shutdown is longer than the time before which the turbine is to be
considered hot and shorter than the time after which the turbine is to be considered cold, an
interpolation between the two reference values
is carried out). The HP valve limiter assumes a higher limit given by the value set in
parameter “Target Limit”.
Once target speed is reached, the end of the start-up sequence is signalled to the GCPP
(Generator Control Protection Panel) through signal "permissive to synchronize " (only in
case of generator drive).
The speed set point ramp slope assumes the value set in parameter “Synchro slope”, and
this slope is maintained until the generator breaker closure.
Obviously, in the case of a turbo-compressor, speed goes from the 1st warm up to MOS
(and not to target), but the speed set point ramp slope in this range always follows the one
set in “Rate to target”.
In many turbines, it is desirable to avoid certain speeds or speed ranges (or to go through
them as quickly as possible) due to excessive turbine vibrations or other factors. While
programming ST Governor turbine governor, two critical speed ranges can be selected.
These two ranges can be any speed range between 1st warm up speed and minimum
operating speed.
Turbine Start
There are three start-up modes available that can be set directly in section Operating
Parameters: manual, automatic, semi-automatic.
Once the start signal is sent to the turbine, the speed set point (the increase / decrease of its
value) and the HP valve limiter are controlled either manually by the operator or
automatically, according to the start-up mode selected.
1. A reset signal is sent to the turbine controller to reset all alarms and trips.
2. The turbine speed set point is increased gradually by the operator to reach the 1st warm
up speed value. (The rpm per second ramp slope according to which the speed set point
changes is set through the Manual Slope parameter.) At the same time, the HP valve
limiter opening and closing is changed manually by the operator. (The related ramp slope
according to which they change is set in section HP VALVE LIMITER CONTROL,
parameter Slope rates). During start-up the low pressure valve (LP) is kept in fully open
position.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 54 of 63
3. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops, to resume only upon a
manual action of the operator through command “raise speed” (provided the necessary
time has elapsed – warm up time).
4. The sequence is continued manually until the target, and the speed set point (the slope of
its ramp) increases, still according to the slope set on the manual slope parameter.
1. A reset signal is sent to the turbine controller to reset all alarms and trips.
2. The turbine speed set point is increased in an automatic way to reach the 1st warm up
speed value. (The ramp slope according to which the set point changes is set by means of
parameter “Rate to 1st warm up hot/cold” in section Operating Parameters). At the same
time, the operator changes the HP valve limiter opening and closing manually. (The ramp
slope according to
which the HP valve limiter changes is set in parameter “Slope rates” in section Operating
Parameters). During start-up the low pressure valve (LP) is maintained in fully open
position
.
3. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops, to resume only upon a
manual action of the operator through command CONTINUE (provided the necessary time
has elapsed – warm up time).
4. The HP valve limiter is controlled manually until target speed, and the speed set point
(the slope of its ramp) increases, now according to the slope set on Rate to target hot/cold.
Important: in section Operating Parameters, the “Synchrony slope” rpm/sec slope of the
speed set point ramp is enabled from the moment minimum governor speed is reached (i.e.
when the permissive to synchronize is given) until the generator breaker closes, that is
when maximum governor speed is reached.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 55 of 63
Automatic Start-up mode
When the automatic mode is selected, the start-up sequence is completed in automatic
mode and goes through the following steps:
1. A reset signal is sent to the turbine controller to reset all alarms and trips.
2. The turbine speed set point is increased in an automatic way to reach the 1st warm up
speed value. (The ramp slope according to which the set point changes is set by means of
parameter “Rate to 1st warm up hot/cold” in section Operating Parameters). At the same
time automatically the controller open the HP valve limiter to the corrispective limit. (The
ramp slope according
to which the HP valve limiter changes is set in parameter “Slope rates” in section
Operating Parameters). During start-up the low pressure valve (LP) is maintained in fully
open position.
3. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops, when the 1st warm up
time elapsed the speed set point start to increase automatically to reach the target set-
point). At the same time automatically the controller open the HP valve limiter to the
corrispective limit.
4. The HP valve limiter is controlled automatically until target speed, and the speed set
point (the slope of its ramp) increases, now according to the slope set on Rate to target
hot/cold.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 56 of 63
Normal Stop
In addition to the actual shutdown sequence, ST Governor is provided with a NORMAL
STOP command that, when enabled, carries out a controlled trip sequence (controlled
shutdown).
According to the current operating conditions as well as to the system configuration, it is
possible to distinguish different sequences, which are reported below.
1. if in inlet steam pressure control, the PID performing the control action on inlet steam
pressure is disabled, and power control (kW) is enabled.
2. if in control of the extraction line by means of the Extraction PID acting on the LP
valve, this control is disabled.
3. once the Power PID is enabled, power (kW) decreases until the Minimum Power value
is reached according to a ramp whose slope is set through parameter Set Point Slope Target
Stop in section kW Control.
4. once the Minimum Power value is reached, the Generator Control panel sends a
command to open the Generator Breaker contact.
5. once the Generator Breaker is open, speed control is enabled, and the speed set point
value is lowered according to a ramp whose slope is set in parameter Normal Stop in
section Start-up Parameters, until the 1st warm up is reached. The speed set point can be
frozen by pressing halt command (the continue command restarts the ramp).
6. it is necessary to wait for the necessary time in order to allow speed to actually reach the
1st warm up value, and only then the actual shutdown is performed.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 57 of 63
• No Syngas Condition
2. after disabling the Cascade controller, speed control is enabled, and the speed set point
value is lowered according to a ramp whose slope is set in parameter Normal Stop in
section Start-up Parameters, until the 1st warm up is reached. The speed set point can be
frozen by pressing halt
command (the continue command restarts the ramp).
3. it is necessary to wait for the necessary time in order to allow speed to actually reach the
1st warm up value, and only then the actual shutdown is performed.
• Syngas Condition
1. if in control of the extraction line by means of the Extraction PID acting on the LP valve,
this control is disabled.
2. the low pressure valve (LP valve) is opened completely by reaching 100 % of the LP
Valve Limiter value.
3. the speed set point value is lowered according to a ramp whose slope is set in parameter
Normal Stop in section Start-up Parameters, until the 1st warm up is reached. The speed
set point can be frozen by pressing halt command (the continue command restarts the
ramp).
4. it is necessary to wait for the necessary time in order to allow speed to actually reach the
1st warm up value, and only then the actual shutdown is performed
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 58 of 63
NOTE: If the normal stop sequence is being executed and is not over yet, by pressing the
Turbine Start command, the normal stop is disabled.
Emergency Shutdown
When a shutdown condition is detected, both output signals to the HP and LP valve
actuators are taken to the value of zero mA. Moreover, shutdown relays are deenergized (in
ST Governor system an external redundant hardware relay logic for the steam turbine trip
valves is always implemented, too) and the shutdown cause is displayed on the supervision
video page.
Within the ST Governor logic control sequences, there is a bit dedicated to the shutdown
condition; this bit can be associated to any input signal, or any internal bit, representing
any trip condition, produced by the system logic.
Obviously, since the entire logic is implemented according to a Fail Safe type of
philosophy, the shutdown condition is detected when the logic state is zero.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 59 of 63
11.3.1.2 Controllers
Speed Controll
Speed control receives a turbine speed signal from one or two magnetic pickups or
proximity probes. The Speed PID (PID = controller with Proportional, Integral and
Derivative action) amplifies and compares this signal with the speed set point in order to
generate a signal going to the valve decoupling input.
The speed governor, moreover, can receive a droop feedback signal (optional) to increase
the system stability, basing on the turbine-generator system load (expressed in kW).
The speed set point can be controlled either by means of the HMI Raise/Lower commands,
or through remote contacts, or via Modbus.
Turbine speed is “picked up” through one or two MPU’s (magnetic pick-up) or proximity
probes. In our ST Governor a fundamental parameter that is necessary to configure is the
“Number of pulses per round” in section Operating Parameters.
This parameter represents the number of pulses per turbine driving shaft revolution. This
value is needed to obtain the speed measurement in rpm (after performing the due
conversions).
The Speed PID (set with the control parameters relating to integration time, to the
derivative and the proportionality constant as well as to other additional parameters which
shall be dealt with in detail further on) compares this speed signal with a set point.
When programmed for application with a generator, the status of generator breaker (GB)
contacts and tie-breaker (TB) contacts determines the Speed PID operating mode.
More precisely, if the generator breaker is open, the parallel connection with the grid has
not been carried out yet, and therefore the Speed PID operates in full turbine speed control
mode according to the parameters set by the operator in section Speed Control Parameters.
• DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec): It represents the PID controller derivation time (Kd).
This constant refers to the formula representing the PID controller, expressed
as follows:
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 60 of 63
• ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm): It represents the dead band error. If the error calculated
as difference between speed and set point, normalized to speed full scale, is lower than the
value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, than it has no effect. All the speed control PID
parameters explained above can also be configured for the ISLAND mode (ISLAND
PARAMETERS): these parameters become effective when the GB is closed and the TB is
open, i.e. when the generator is in island mode.
NOTE:
In case of variable response times due to variations in the system conditions, it is possible
to set a parameter that allows the Speed PID to tune in order to get optimal responses.
In other words, this parameter is a constant called Dynamics Multiplier Const., the value of
which can be entered directly by the operator.
More specifically, in generator drive mode, in case of generator breaker opening, the speed
control PID parameters are temporary multiplied for the value entered in Dynamic
Multiplier Const. to make the controller action more "reactive".
In particular, the proportionality constant and the derivative action are multiplied for this
value, whereas the integral action is divided for this value.
Likewise, in case of a Mechanical Drive turbine, two sets of parameters exist:
Parameters referring to a speed below Minimum Operating Speed (M.O.S);
Parameters referring to a speed above M.O.S.
In case of critical ranges, the system checks that the steam turbine does not operate within
the critical region longer than a configurable time interval. This check is inhibited if the
actual speed is closer to the relevant set point less than 50 RPM.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 61 of 63
Cascade Control
The Cascade control is used inside ST Governor to act on turbine speed so as to control a
physical quantity linked to the steam turbine rotation speed.
A typical application is the configuration as mechanical drive acting on turbine speed so as
to control the discharge pressure of the compressor connected to the turbine.
In Cascade mode, two digital inputs external to the ST Governor (e.g. coming from DCS)
are made available to raise / lower the speed set point.
The set point increase/decrease ramp slope is defined in the section dealing with Cascade
Control at parameter Cascade ramp slope [rpm/sec].
Cascade control can be configured to control any system process, in relation to turbine
speed.
NOTE: It is to be reminded that this control and the related configuration video page can
be viewed only if MECHANICAL DRIVE is selected in section Operating Parameters, in
submenu General Turbine selection. Typically this controller is configured and used as
controller of a compressor discharge pressure.
The Cascade controller performs a comparison between a 4-20 mA process signal and a set
point, and its control variable directly represents the Speed PID speed set point.
When enabled, the Cascade PID can cause the speed set point to change according to a
ramp with slope set through parameter Cascade ramp slope, in section CASCADE
CONTROL.
Furthermore, it is possible to set all the Cascade controller control parameters in real time,
simply by changing their values in the Cascade controller configuration page (Cascade
Control).
However, the Cascade controller enabling occurs only after reaching Minimum Operating
Speed, and is automatically disabled in shutdown condition, to be automatically enabled
again after a subsequent system start-up.
In the ST Governor system the shift to the Cascade controller enabling is bumpless, and if
a Cascade type control permissive is lost, or the Cascade control is disabled, the set point
value ‘active’ in that moment is freezed.
In relation to the type of control action required, the Cascade controller input (the process
variable of this PID) can be inverted.
For example, if internal Cascade is selected and a decrease in the HP valve opening
percentage is requested in order to raise suction steam pressure (inlet steam pressure), the
Cascade controller process variable is to be inverted. The cascade control parameters to be
set are reported below:
• Cascade ramp slope [rpm/sec]: Regardless of the External Cascade Control mode
selection - through the corresponding check box on page Operating Parameters in menu
General Turbine selection - the SIC (the ST Governor speed governor) shall receive a set
point that is always pursued according to a ramp with a slope configurable in Cascade
ramp slope (in rpm per second).
• Cascade set point slope rate [rpm/sec]: It represents the ramp slope according to which
the Cascade PID controller pursues the set point, expressed in rpm per second.
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 62 of 63
External Cascade Control
If the corresponding check box is selected, the external CASCADE mode is enabled (valid
in the case of mechanical drive).
The Cascade is external in case the speed set point to ST Governor is supplied by an
external PID controller (a typical case is a PIC controller outside ST Governor located on
the compressor discharge, whose control variable is the speed governor set point).
It’s important to stress that this mode use must be selected even for any other controller
implemented in the same PLC such as an anti surge or performance controller whose
output drives the steam turbine speed: all those controllers must be classified as External
Cascade Control regardless their implementation. The value shall be converted from 4÷20
mA to normalized (0-1).
The external Cascade – unlike the internal one – is base on a PID controller that is
completely external; from governor control system acquires only its control variable (as a
0-100% input which can be acquired either via serial link – e.g. through Modbus protocol -
via hardwired line – or internal by performance controller); this control variable represents
the speed governor set point.
This set point grows according to a slope the ramp of which is the cascade ramp slope
already dealt with on the previous pages, and is then added to Minimum Operating Speed.
Span Selection
If the corresponding check box is selected, ST Governor speed governor performs its
control actions interpreting the signal coming from the external PID in the following way:
4 mA = 0 RPM; 20 mA = Maximum Continuous Speed. In any case, the governor does not
activate any set point lower than Minimum Operating Speed.
If the corresponding check box is not selected, ST Governor speed governor performs its
control action within the range comprised between Minimum Operating Speed (4 mA) and
Maximum Continuous Speed (20 mA).
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 63 of 63
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 2 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 3 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 4 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 5 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 6 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 7 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 8 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 9 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 10 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 11 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 12 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 13 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 14 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 15 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 16 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 17 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 18 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 19 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 20 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 21 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 22 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 23 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 24 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 25 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 26 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 27 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 28 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 29 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 30 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 31 of 32
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <7> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 32 of 32
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
TRIP TRESHOLD
600
500
PDI XXX (Psig)
400
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
PI 3432 (Psig)
GE NuovoPignone - Electronically Approved Drawing - Checked: Bernardi A.; Approved: Zipoli M. - Internal DT-'N'
5 SPARE
5 SPARE
5 XHS-3044
5
5 SPARE
5
SPARE <5>
SPARE
5 FINAL REVISION
XHS-3044
SPARE <5>
5 FINAL REVISION
SPARE
Bernardi A.
Zipoli M.
SERIAL LIST
Nuovo Pignone
COMM - JOB
FIRENZE 1102313 / 1900533
ITEM
TITOLO - TITLE 207K-300 / 207KT-300
DWG NUMBER
3 GENERAL REVISION SSE
Bernardi A. Visintin F.
09/06/2009 UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
2 GENERAL REVISION, SSE 27/01/2009 SERIAL LIST SOS 9971995/3
1 GENERAL REVISION, ADDED SH.20-37 SSE 18/11/2008 LINGUA - LANG. PAGINA - SHEET
Type
: ETHERNET TCP/IP
Protocol
: Modbus
DEVICE IP:
:192.168.1.1
Analog variable type
REAL <2>
<2>
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
7 Read Status
Nuovo Pignone
COMM
FIRENZE
ESSA -
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 2/3
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset Data
Reference Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Type Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> <2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Max Value Bit Within Register
Array Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMM
FIRENZE ESSA -
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 3/4
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset Data
Reference Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Type Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> <2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Max Value Bit Within Register
Array Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMM
FIRENZE ESSA -
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 4/5
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset Data
Reference Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Type Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> <2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 5/6
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset Data
Reference Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Type Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> <2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 6/7
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset Data
Reference Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Type Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> <2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
3 F READ
43257 <2>
3 F READ
43259 <2>
3 F READ
43261 <2>
3 F READ
43263 <2>
3 F READ
43265 <2>
3 F READ
43267 <2>
3 F READ TT 3747 rTI 3747 RUNDOWN TANK TEMPERATURE
SOS8628431/1 32 200 °F 43269 <2>
3 F READ
43271 <2>
3 F READ
43273 <2>
3 F READ
43275 <2>
3 F READ
43277 <2>
3 F READ - rTC_SP <2> TC - setpoint <2>
0 100 % 43279 <2>
3 F READ - rPDIK_SP PDI - setpoint
0 100 % 43281 <2>
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 7/8
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 8/9
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ ZSHH 3004 eZSHH 3004 BEARINGS AXIAL DISPLAC. COMMON TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40502 1
4 I READ XHS 3316 eXHS 3316 MAINT. BYPASS ENABLE
SOS8628437/1 40502 2
4 I READ XS 3210 eXS 3210 SEAL GAS HEATER RUNNING
40502 3
4 I READ XS 3234 eXS 3234 SEAL GAS HEATER CUMULATIVE ALARM
40502 4
4 I READ UZSO 3294 eUZSO 3294 EMERGENCY A/S VALVE OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628462/1 40502 5
4 I READ UZSC 3294 eUZSC 3294 EMERGENCY A/S VALVE CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628462/1 40502 6
4 I READ XZSO 3027 eXZSO_ 3027 BLOWDOWN VALVE OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628462/1 40502 7
4 I READ XZSC 3027 eXZSC_ 3027 BLOWDOWN VALVE CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628462/1 40502 8
4 I READ HS 3115 eHS 3115 MIN. GOVERNOR SPEED/LOAD
SOS8628437/1 40502 9
4 I READ HS 3117 eHS 3117_A STARTING SEQUENCE AUTO/SEMI
SOS8628437/1 40502 10
4 I READ
SOS8628437/1 40502 11
4 I READ HS 3116_L eHS 3116_L SPEED CONTROL LOCAL/REMOTE
SOS8628437/1 40502 12
4 I READ HS 3116_R eHS 3116_R Speed Controller Remote Mode Selector LCP
SOS8628437/1 40502 13
4 I READ XS 3047A eXS 3047A PLANT ESD
SOS8628437/1 40502 14
4 I READ XZSC 3052 eXZSC 3052 TRIP VALVE CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
40502 15
4 I READ XZSC 3305 eXZSC 3305 TRIP VALVE CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
40502 16
4 I READ SS 3049 eSS 3049 I/H Converter fault
40503 1
4 I READ VSH 3106 eVSH 3106 BEARINGS RADIAL VIBRATION COMMON ALARM
40503 2
4 I READ XHS 3085 eXHS 3085 eXHS 3085
40503 3
4 I READ XS 3046 eXS 3046 EXTERNAL SHUTDOWN RESET FROM SIS
40503 4
4 I READ XS 3048 eXS 3048 EXTERNAL TRIP TO COMPRESSOR
40503 5
4 I READ XS 3703 eXS 3703 Triconex power suply fault
40503 6
4 I READ XS 3704 eXS 3704 POWER FAULT
40503 7
4 I READ XS 3705 eXS 3705 BN RACK1 fault
40503 8
4 I READ XS 3706 eXS 3706 BN RACK 2 fault
40503 9
4 I READ XS 3707 eXS 3707 ETG RUNNING
40503 10
4 I READ XS 3708 eXS 3708 ETG FAULT
40503 11
4 I READ XS 3709 eXS 3709 ETG Enable/Disable
40503 12
4 I READ XS 3850 eXS 3850 Seal Gas Heater Ground Fault Detected
40503 13
4 I READ XZSO 3307 eXZSO 3307 TRIP VALVE 3307 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
40503 14
4 I READ XZSO 3312 eXZSO 3312 TRIP VALVE 3312 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
40503 15
4 I READ XZSO 3313 eXZSO 3313 TRIP VALVE 3313 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
40503 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 9 / 10
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-
(Bit 1 is LSB)
bit Registers)
4 I READ
ZSH 3003 eZSH 3003 BEARINGS AXIAL DISPLACEMENT COMMON ALARM 40504 1
4 I READ
HS 3118 eHS 3118 Start turbine command (LCP) 40504 2
4 I READ
HS 3084 eHS 3084 Shutdown command (LCP 40504 3
4 I READ
HS 3311_LampTST eHS 3311_LampTST Lamp Test (LCP) 40504 4
4 I READ
40504 5
4 I READ
40504 6
4 I READ
40504 7
4 I READ
40504 8
4 I READ
40504 9
4 I READ
40504 10
4 I READ
40504 11
4 I READ
40504 12
4 I READ
40504 13
4 I READ
40504 14
4 I READ
40504 15
4 I READ
40504 16
4 I READ
40505 1
4 I READ
40505 2
4 I READ
40505 3
4 I READ
40505 4
4 I READ
40505 5
4 I READ
40505 6
4 I READ
40505 7
4 I READ
40505 8
4 I READ
40505 9
4 I READ
40505 10
4 I READ
40505 11
4 I READ
40505 12
4 I READ
40505 13
4 I READ
40505 14
4 I READ
40505 15
4 I READ
40505 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 10 / 11
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40506 1
4 I READ
40506 2
4 I READ
40506 3
4 I READ
40506 4
4 I READ
40506 5
4 I READ
40506 6
4 I READ
40506 7
4 I READ
40506 8
4 I READ
40506 9
4 I READ
40506 10
4 I READ
40506 11
4 I READ
40506 12
4 I READ
40506 13
4 I READ
40506 14
4 I READ
40506 15
4 I READ
40506 16
4 I READ
40507 1
4 I READ
40507 2
4 I READ
40507 3
4 I READ
40507 4
4 I READ
40507 5
4 I READ
40507 6
4 I READ
40507 7
4 I READ
40507 8
4 I READ
40507 9
4 I READ
40507 10
4 I READ
40507 11
4 I READ
40507 12
4 I READ
40507 13
4 I READ
40507 14
4 I READ
40507 15
4 I READ
40507 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 11 / 12
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40508 1
4 I READ
40508 2
4 I READ
40508 3
4 I READ
40508 4
4 I READ
40508 5
4 I READ
40508 6
4 I READ
40508 7
4 I READ
40508 8
4 I READ
40508 9
4 I READ
40508 10
4 I READ
40508 11
4 I READ
40508 12
4 I READ
40508 13
4 I READ
40508 14
4 I READ
40508 15
4 I READ
40508 16
4 I READ
40509 1
4 I READ
40509 2
4 I READ
40509 3
4 I READ
40509 4
4 I READ
40509 5
4 I READ
40509 6
4 I READ
40509 7
4 I READ
40509 8
4 I READ
40509 9
4 I READ
40509 10
4 I READ
40509 11
4 I READ
40509 12
4 I READ
40509 13
4 I READ
40509 14
4 I READ
40509 15
4 I READ
40509 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 12 / 13
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 13 / 14
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40512 1
4 I READ
40512 2
4 I READ
40512 3
4 I READ
40512 4
4 I READ
40512 5
4 I READ
40512 6
4 I READ
40512 7
4 I READ
40512 8
4 I READ
40512 9
4 I READ
40512 10
4 I READ
40512 11
4 I READ
40512 12
4 I READ
40512 13
4 I READ
40512 14
4 I READ
40512 15
4 I READ
40512 16
4 I READ
40513 1
4 I READ
40513 2
4 I READ
40513 3
4 I READ
40513 4
4 I READ
40513 5
4 I READ
40513 6
4 I READ
40513 7
4 I READ
40513 8
4 I READ
40513 9
4 I READ
40513 10
4 I READ
40513 11
4 I READ
40513 12
4 I READ
40513 13
4 I READ
40513 14
4 I READ
40513 15
4 I READ
40513 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 14 / 15
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40514 1
4 I READ
40514 2
4 I READ
40514 3
4 I READ
40514 4
4 I READ
40514 5
4 I READ
40514 6
4 I READ
40514 7
4 I READ
40514 8
4 I READ
40514 9
4 I READ
40514 10
4 I READ
40514 11
4 I READ
40514 12
4 I READ
40514 13
4 I READ
40514 14
4 I READ
40514 15
4 I READ
40514 16
4 I READ PT 3455A_Fail mPI 3455A_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 1
4 I READ PT 3455B_Fail mPI 3455B_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 2
4 I READ PT 3455C_Fail mPI 3455C_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 3
4 I READ PT 3460A_Fail mPI 3460A_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 4
4 I READ PT 3460B_Fail mPI 3460B_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 5
4 I READ PT 3460C_Fail mPI 3460C_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 6
4 I READ PT 3097_Fail mPI 3097_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 7
4 I READ PT 3423_Fail mPI 3423_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 8
4 I READ PT 3403A_Fail mPI 3403A_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 9
4 I READ PT 3403B_Fail mPI 3403B_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 10
4 I READ PT 3403C_Fail mPI 3403C_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 11
4 I READ TT 3296A_Fail mTI 3296A_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 12
4 I READ TT 3296B_Fail mTI 3296B_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 13
4 I READ TT 3296C_Fail mTI 3296C_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 14
4 I READ PT 3430_Fail mPI 3430_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 15
4 I READ PT 3432_Fail mPI 3432_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 15 / 16
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 16 / 17
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 17 / 18
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ LAL 3401 mLAL 3401 RUN-DOWN TANK LEVEL LOW ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 1
4 I READ XA 3232 mXA 3232 L.O. AUX.PUMP NOT START.ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 2
4 I READ XA 3233 mXA 3233 L.O. AUX.PUMP NOT STOP.ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 3
4 I READ LAL 3404 mLAL 3404 LUBE OIL RESERVOIR LEVEL LOW ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 4
4 I READ PDAH 3094 mPDAH 3094 COMPRESSOR SUCTION DIFF. PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628462/1 40520 5
4 I READ PDAH 3408 mPDAH 3408 L.O. FILTERS DIFF. PRESSURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 6
4 I READ PDAH 3447 mPDAH 3447 NITROGEN FILTER DIFF. PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 7
4 I READ PDAH 3442 mPDAH 3442 SEAL GAS LIQUID SEP. DIFF. PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 8
4 I READ PDAH 3465 mPDAH 3465 SEAL GAS FILTER DIFF. PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 9
4 I READ PAL 3401 mPAL 3401 CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 10
4 I READ PAL 3411 mPAL 3411 L.O. HEADER PRESS. UP-STREAM COOLERS LOW ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 11
4 I READ PAL 3449 mPAL 3449 NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS LOW ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 12
4 I READ PAH 3449 mPAH 3449 NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 13
4 I READ PAH 3455A mPAH 3455A COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 14
4 I READ PAH 3455B mPAH 3455B COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 15
4 I READ PAH 3455C mPAH 3455C COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 16
4 I READ PSH 3460A mPAH 3460A COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40521 1
4 I READ PAH 3460B mPAH 3460B COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40521 2
4 I READ PAH 3460C mPAH 3460C COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40521 3
4 I READ TSH 3740 mTAH 3740 LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE CONTROL
SOS8628432/1 40521 4
4 I READ TAL 3744 mTAL 3744 LUBE OIL RESERVOIR TEMPERATURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40521 5
4 I READ TAH 3744 mTAH 3744 LUBE OIL RESERVOIR TEMPERATURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40521 6
4 I READ TAH 3763 mTAH 3763 SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - CUT OUT-HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40521 7
4 I READ PAH 3455 mPAH 3455 COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40521 8
4 I READ PAH 3460 mPAH 3460 COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40521 9
4 I READ TALL 3744 mTALL 3744 LUBE OIL RESERVOIR TEMPERATURE LOW LOW ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40521 10
4 I READ - mESDR_ACT ESD SAFETY RELAY ACTIVE
40521 11
4 I READ XA 3705 <2> mXA 3705 <2> BN Rack1 Fault
40521 12
4 I READ XA 3706 <2> mXA 3706 <2> BN Rack2 Fault
40521 13
4 I READ XA 3704 <2> mXA 3704 <2> Power Fault
40521 14
4 I READ XAF_3FAN mXAF_3FAN Fan Fault
40521 15
4 I READ XA 3192 mXA 3192 ETG FAULT
40521 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 18 / 19
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ PT 3455A_Disc mPI 3455A_Disc BCL 456/A COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
SOS8628460/1 40522 1
4 I READ PT 3455B_Disc mPI 3455B_Disc BCL 456/B COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
SOS8628460/1 40522 2
4 I READ PT 3455C_Disc mPI 3455C_Disc BCL 456/C COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
SOS8628460/1 40522 3
4 I READ PT 3460A_Disc mPI 3460A_Disc BCL 456/A COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
SOS8628460/1 40522 4
4 I READ PT 3460B_Disc mPI 3460B_Disc BCL 456/B COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
SOS8628460/1 40522 5
4 I READ PT 3460C_Disc mPI 3460C_Disc BCL 456/C COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
SOS8628460/1 40522 6
4 I READ PT 3403A_Disc mPI 3403A_Disc LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER - Di
SOS8628431/1 40522 7
4 I READ PT 3403B_Disc mPI 3403B_Disc LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER - Di
SOS8628431/1 40522 8
4 I READ PT 3403C_Disc mPI 3403C_Disc LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER - Di
SOS8628431/1 40522 9
4 I READ TT 3296A_Disc mTI 3296A_Disc COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITT
SOS8628462/1 40522 10
4 I READ TT 3296B_Disc mTI 3296B_Disc COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITT
SOS8628462/1 40522 11
4 I READ TT 3296C_Disc mTI 3296C_Disc COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITT
SOS8628462/1 40522 12
4 I READ PAL 3403 mPAL 3403 LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40522 13
4 I READ PAH 3432 mPAH 3432 EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628450/1 40522 14
4 I READ XA 3230 mXA 3230 L.O. Heater Not Started Alarm
SOS8628432/1 40522 15
4 I READ XA 3235 mXS 3235 VALVE XY 3030 SOLENOID VALVE DISCREPANCY ALARM
40522 16
4 I READ XA 3236 mXS 3236 VALVE XY 3031 SOLENOID VALVE DISCREPANCY ALARM
40523 1
4 I READ BRANCHB_FAIL mBRANCHB_FAIL Trip valve online test branch B failed
40523 2
4 I READ BRANCHA_FAIL mBRANCHA_FAIL Fail from trip valve start-up test
40523 3
4 I READ XA 3208 mXS 3208 Both branches failure special procedure
40523 4
4 I READ UAL 3101 mUSL 3101_P LOW STEAM QUALITY ALARM
40523 5
4 I READ PAL 3430 mPAL 3430 EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628450/1 40523 6
4 I READ PAH 3423 mPAH 3423 HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628450/1 40523 7
4 I READ PAH 3444 mPAH 3444 GAS AMPLIFIED HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40523 8
4 I READ TAH 3760 mTAH 3760 HP STEAM HEADER TEMPERATURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628450/1 40523 9
4 I READ PDSH 3472 <2> mPDSH 3472 <2> BALANCING LINE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER High
SOS8628460/1 40523 10
4 I READ PAH 3463 mPAH 3463 SEAL GAS BALANCING LINE PRESSURE TRANSMITT
SOS8628460/1 40523 11
4 I READ XS 3235 mXA 3235 VALVE XY1030 SOLENOID VALVE DISCREPANCY AL
40523 12
4 I READ XS 3236 mXA 3236 VALVE XY1031 SOLENOID VALVE DISCREPANCY AL
40523 13
4 I READ PSL 3471 mPAL 3471 CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER L
SOS8628437/1 40523 14
4 I READ XA 3231 mXA 3231 L.O. Heater Not Stoped Alarm
40523 15
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 19 / 20
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ TAH 3765 mTAH 3765 SEAL GAS TEMPERATURE - HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40524 1
4 I READ TAL 3765 mTAL 3765 SEAL GAS TEMPERATURE - LOW ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40524 2
4 I READ - mALARM COMMON ALARMS
40524 3
4 I READ PDAH 3461 mPDAH 3461 COMPR. PRIM. VENT/BAL. LINE DIFF. PRESS. -
SOS8628460/1 40524 4
4 I READ TAH 3296 mTAH 3296 BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE-HIGH ALARM
SOS8628462/1 40524 5
4 I READ TAH 3764 mTAH 3764 SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - TEMP. LIMITER-HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40524 6
4 I READ TAHH 3763 mTAHH 3763 SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - CUT OUT-HIGH HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40524 7
4 I READ XS 3306_Disc mXS 3306_Disc TRIP VALVE XY-3306 DISCREPANCY ALARM (0=Alm)
40524 8
4 I READ XS 3307_Disc mXS 3307_Disc TRIP VALVE XY-3307 DISCREPANCY ALARM (0=Alm)
40524 9
4 I READ XS 3312_Disc mXS 3312_Disc TRIP VALVE XY-3312 DISCREPANCY ALARM (0=Alm)
40524 10
4 I READ XS 3313_Disc mXS 3313_Disc TRIP VALVE XY-3313 DISCREPANCY ALARM (0=Alm)
40524 11
4 I READ UAL 3101 mUAL 3101 HP STEAM TEMPERATURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628450/1 40524 12
4 I READ PDAH 3426 mPDAH 3426 DIF.PRESS.WHEEL CHAMBER TO EXHAUST HIGH ALARM
SOS8628450/1 40524 13
4 I READ XA 3745 mXA 3745 L.O. Heater Not Started after command Alarm
SOS8628432/1 40524 14
4 I READ TAHH 3764 mTAHH 3764 SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - TEMP. LIMIT.-HIGH HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40524 15
4 I READ TAH 3746 mTAH 3746 LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40524 16
4 I READ TAH 3747 mTAH 3747 RUNDOWN TANK TEMPERATURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40525 1
4 I READ TAL 3746 mTAL 3746 LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40525 2
4 I READ TAL 3747 mTAL 3747 RUNDOWN TANK TEMPERATURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40525 3
4 I READ PAH 3215 mPAH 3215 COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
40525 4
4 I READ - mPA 3403 Transmitter discrepancy 1oo3
40525 5
4 I READ - mPA 3455 Transmitter discrepancy 1oo3
40525 6
4 I READ - mPA 3460 Transmitter discrepancy 1oo3
40525 7
4 I READ - mTA 3296 Transmitter discrepancy 1oo3
40525 8
4 I READ - mPA 3449 Transmitter Discrepancy 1oo2
40525 9
4 I READ
40525 10
4 I READ
40525 11
4 I READ
40525 12
4 I READ
40525 13
4 I READ
40525 14
4 I READ
40525 15
4 I READ
40525 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 20 / 21
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ TAH 3716 mTI 3716H STEAM TURBINE THRUST BEARING ACTIVE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 1
4 I READ TAH 3717 mTI 3717H STEAM TURBINE THRUST BEARING ACTIVE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 2
4 I READ TAH 3718 mTI 3718H STEAM TURB. THRUST BRG NON ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 3
4 I READ TAH 3719 mTI 3719H STEAM TURB. THRUST BRG NON ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 4
4 I READ TAH 3720 mTI 3720H STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 5
4 I READ TAH 3721 mTI 3721H STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING TEMP.HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 6
4 I READ TAH 3724 mTI 3724H STEAM TURBINE THRUST BEARING ACTIVE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 7
4 I READ TAH 3722 mTI 3722H STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 8
4 I READ TAH 3723 mTI 3723H STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 9
4 I READ TAH 3727 mTI 3727H COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 10
4 I READ TAH 3728 mTI 3728H COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 11
4 I READ TAH 3729 mTI 3729H COMPR.THRUST BRG.NON-ACT. SIDE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 12
4 I READ TAH 3730 mTI 3730H COMPR.THRUST BRG.NON-ACT. SIDE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 13
4 I READ TAH 3731 mTI 3731H COMPR.THRUST BRG.ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 14
4 I READ TAH 3732 mTI 3732H COMPR.THRUST BRG.ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 15
4 I READ TAH 3733 mTI 3733H COMPR.THRUST BRG.ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 16
4 I READ TAH 3725 mTI 3725H COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 1
4 I READ TAH 3726 mTI 3726H COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 2
4 I READ VAH 3103Y mVT 3103Y STEAM TURB. JOURNAL BRG NON DRIVE END Y RAD. HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 3
4 I READ ZAH 3001B mZAH 3001BH STEAM TURBINE SHAFT AXIAL HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 4
4 I READ ZAH 3001A mZAH 3001AH STEAM TURBINE SHAFT AXIAL HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 5
4 I READ VAH 3102Y mVT 3102YH STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG DRIVE END Y RAD. HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 6
4 I READ VAH 3105Y mVT 3105YH COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 7
4 I READ VAH 3102X mVT 3102XH STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG DRIVE END X RAD. HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 8
4 I READ ZAH 3002B mZAH 3002BH COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 9
4 I READ VAH 3103X mVT 3103XH STEAM TURB. JOURNAL BRG NON DRIVE END X RAD. HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 10
4 I READ ZAH 3002A mZAH 3002AH COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 11
4 I READ VAH 3105X mVT 3105XH COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 12
4 I READ VAH 3104X mVT 3104XH COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 13
4 I READ VAH 3104Y mVT 3104YH COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 14
4 I READ
40527 15
4 I READ
40527 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 21 / 22
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ - mCPU_Fail
Cpu Card Failure 40528 1
4 I READ - mIOCard_Fail
I/O Card Failure 40528 2
4 I READ
40528 3
4 I READ
40528 4
4 I READ
40528 5
4 I READ
40528 6
4 I READ
40528 7
4 I READ
40528 8
4 I READ
40528 9
4 I READ
40528 10
4 I READ
40528 11
4 I READ
40528 12
4 I READ
40528 13
4 I READ
40528 14
4 I READ
40528 15
4 I READ
40528 16
4 I READ
40529 1
4 I READ
40529 2
4 I READ
40529 3
4 I READ
40529 4
4 I READ
40529 5
4 I READ
40529 6
4 I READ
40529 7
4 I READ
40529 8
4 I READ
40529 9
4 I READ
40529 10
4 I READ
40529 11
4 I READ
40529 12
4 I READ
40529 13
4 I READ
40529 14
4 I READ
40529 15
4 I READ
40529 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 22 / 23
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40530 1
4 I READ
40530 2
4 I READ
40530 3
4 I READ
40530 4
4 I READ
40530 5
4 I READ
40530 6
4 I READ
40530 7
4 I READ
40530 8
4 I READ
40530 9
4 I READ
40530 10
4 I READ
40530 11
4 I READ
40530 12
4 I READ
40530 13
4 I READ
40530 14
4 I READ
40530 15
4 I READ
40530 16
4 I READ
40531 1
4 I READ
40531 2
4 I READ
40531 3
4 I READ
40531 4
4 I READ
40531 5
4 I READ
40531 6
4 I READ
40531 7
4 I READ
40531 8
4 I READ
40531 9
4 I READ
40531 10
4 I READ
40531 11
4 I READ
40531 12
4 I READ
40531 13
4 I READ
40531 14
4 I READ
40531 15
4 I READ
40531 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 23 / 24
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40532 1
4 I READ
40532 2
4 I READ
40532 3
4 I READ
40532 4
4 I READ
40532 5
4 I READ
40532 6
4 I READ
40532 7
4 I READ
40532 8
4 I READ
40532 9
4 I READ
40532 10
4 I READ
40532 11
4 I READ
40532 12
4 I READ
40532 13
4 I READ
40532 14
4 I READ
40532 15
4 I READ
40532 16
4 I READ
40533 1
4 I READ
40533 2
4 I READ
40533 3
4 I READ
40533 4
4 I READ
40533 5
4 I READ
40533 6
4 I READ
40533 7
4 I READ
40533 8
4 I READ
40533 9
4 I READ
40533 10
4 I READ
40533 11
4 I READ
40533 12
4 I READ
40533 13
4 I READ
40533 14
4 I READ
40533 15
4 I READ
40533 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 24 / 25
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40534 1
4 I READ
40534 2
4 I READ
40534 3
4 I READ
40534 4
4 I READ
40534 5
4 I READ
40534 6
4 I READ
40534 7
4 I READ
40534 8
4 I READ
40534 9
4 I READ
40534 10
4 I READ
40534 11
4 I READ
40534 12
4 I READ
40534 13
4 I READ
40534 14
4 I READ
40534 15
4 I READ
40534 16
4 I READ PAHH 3215 mPSHH 3215_trip COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40535 1
SOS8628462/1 4 I READ TAHH 3296 mTSHH 3296_trip BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40535 2
SOS8628431/1 4 I READ VAHH 3107 mVSHH 3107_trip COMMON RADIAL VIBR. HIGH HIGH TRIP
40535 3
4 I READ PAHH 3455 mPSHH 3455_trip COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628460/1 40535 4
4 I READ SAHH 3052 mSSHH 3052_trip STEAM TURBINE OVERSPEED TRIP
SOS8628437/1 40535 5
4 I READ XA 3048 <2> mXS 3048_trip <2> EXTERNAL TRIP TO COMPRESSOR
40535 6
4 I READ XHA 3318 mXHS 3318_trip UCP EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON TRIP
40535 7
4 I READ PALL 3403 mPSLL 3403_trip LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW LOW TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40535 8
4 I READ PAHH 3460 mPSHH 3460_trip COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628460/1 40535 9
4 I READ PALL 3471 mPSLL 3471_trip CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW LOW TRIP
SOS8628437/1 40535 10
4 I READ ZAHH 3004 <2> mZSHH 3004_trip <2> BEARINGS AXIAL DISPLAC. COMMON TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40535 11
4 I READ XHA 3120 mXHS 3120_trip EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN TRIP
SOS8628437/1 40535 12
4 I READ PAHH 3422 mPSHH 3422_trip HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628450/1 40535 13
4 I READ XA 3047A mXS 3047A_trip PLANT ESD
SOS8628437/1 40535 14
4 I READ XA 3214_trip mXS 3214_trip TRIP VALVE START.UP TEST ABORT INTERNO S.W.
40535 15
SOS8628450/1 4 I READ UALL 3101 mUSLL 3101_trip LOW STEAM QUALITY INTERNO S.W.
40535 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 General revision LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 25 / 26
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ PDAHH 3426 mPDSHH 3426_trip DIF.PRESS.WHEEL CHAMBER TO EXHAUST HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628450/1 40536 1
SOS8628460/1 4 I READ PALL 3451 mPSLL 3451_trip NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS LOW LOW TRIP
40536 2
SOS8628462/1 4 I READ XZSO 3030_trip mXZSO_ 3030_trip VALVE OPEN LIM SWITCH TRIP
40536 3
SOS8628462/1 4 I READ XZSO 3031_trip mXZSO_ 3031_trip VALVE OPEN LIM SWITCH TRIP
40536 4
4 I READ HS 3044 mXHS 3044_trip EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN FROM DCS/VCCR
40536 5
4 I READ GOV_FAILURE_trip mGOV_FAILURE_trip Max. time excededin critical band
40536 6
4 I READ UNDERSPEED_trip mUNDERSPEED_trip Max. time excededin critical band
40536 7
4 I READ TRP_MAXTIME_CRTBAND_trip
mTRP_MAXTIME_CRTBAND_trip
Max. time excededin critical band
40536 8
4 I READ ST_TRP_PICKUP_DISCR mST_TRP_PICKUP_DISCR
Speed pick up descrepancy trip
40536 9
4 I READ ST_TRP_PICKUP_FLT mST_TRP_PICKUP_FLT Speed pick up descrepancy trip
40536 10
4 I READ ST_TRP_STD_CTRL mST_TRP_STD_CTRL Overspeed trip
40536 11
4 I READ ST_TRP_TURB_OVERSPEED
mST_TRP_TURB_OVERSPEED
Overspeed trip
40536 12
4 I READ COM_TRIP_DEL mCOM_TRIP_DEL Common trip signal Delayed
40536 13
4 I READ TRIP_SEQ mTRIP_SEQ Steam Turbine Common Trip
40536 14
4 I READ
40536 15
4 I READ
40536 16
4 I READ
40537 1
4 I READ
40537 2
4 I READ
40537 3
4 I READ
40537 4
4 I READ
40537 5
4 I READ
40537 6
4 I READ
40537 7
4 I READ
40537 8
4 I READ
40537 9
4 I READ
40537 10
4 I READ
40537 11
4 I READ
40537 12
4 I READ
40537 13
4 I READ
40537 14
4 I READ
40537 15
4 I READ
40537 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 General revision LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 26 / 27
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 1 READ
40538 1
4 I READ
40538 2
4 I READ
40538 3
4 I READ
40538 4
4 I READ
40538 5
4 I READ
40538 6
4 I READ
40538 7
4 I READ
40538 8
4 I READ
40538 9
4 I READ
40538 10
5 I READ
40538 11
6 I READ
40538 12
7 I READ
40538 13
8 I READ
40538 14
9 I READ
40538 15
10 I READ
40538 16
11 I READ
40539 1
12 I READ
40539 2
13 I READ
40539 3
14 I READ
40539 4
4 I READ
40539 5
4 I READ
40539 6
4 I READ
40539 7
4 I READ
40539 8
4 I READ
40539 9
4 I READ
40539 10
4 I READ
40539 11
4 I READ
40539 12
4 I READ
40539 13
4 I READ
40539 14
4 I READ
40539 15
4 I READ
40539 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 General revision LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 27 / 28
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ PSHH 3215_trip_FO mPSHH 3215_trip_FO COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 1
4 I READ PSLL 3451_trip_FO mPSLL 3451_trip_FO NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS LOW LOW TRIP
SOS8628460/1 40540 2
4 I READ PDSHH 3426_trip_FO mPDSHH 3426_trip_FO DIF.PRESS.WHEEL CHAMBER TO EXHAUST HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 2
SOS8628450/1 4 I READ PSHH 3422_trip_FO mPSHH 3422_trip_FO HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 4
SOS8628460/1 4 I READ PSHH 3455_trip_FO mPSHH 3455_trip_FO COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 5
SOS8628460/1 4 I READ PSHH 3460_trip_FO mPSHH 3460_trip_FO COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 6
SOS8628431/1 4 I READ PSLL 3403_trip_FO mPSLL 3403_trip_FO LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW LOW TRIP
40540 7
SOS8628437/1 4 I READ PSLL 3471_trip_FO mPSLL 3471_trip_FO CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW LOW TRIP
40540 8
SOS8628437/1 4 I READ SSHH 3052_trip_FO mSSHH 3052_trip_FO STEAM TURBINE OVERSPEED TRIP
40540 9
4 I READ TSHH 3296_trip_FO <2> mTSHH 3296_trip_FO <2>BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 10
4 I READ UNDERSPEED_trip_FO mUNDERSPEED_trip_FO Max. time excededin critical band
40540 11
SOS8628450/1 4 I READ USLL 3102_trip_FO mUSLL 3102_trip_FO LOW STEAM QUALITY
40540 12
SOS8628431/1 4 I READ VSHH 3107_trip_FO mVSHH 3107_trip_FO COMMON RADIAL VIBR. HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 13
SOS8628437/1 4 I READ XHS 3120_trip_FO mXHS 3120_trip_FO EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN TRIP
40540 14
4 I READ XHS 3318_trip_FO mXHS 3318_trip_FO UCP EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON TRIP
40540 15
SOS8628437/1 4 I READ XS 3047A_trip_FO mXS 3047A_trip_FO PLANT ESD
40540 16
4 I READ mXHS1044_trip_FO
EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN FROM DCS/VCCR 40541 1
4 I READ XS 3048_trip_FO <2> mXS 3048_trip_FO <2> EXTERNAL TRIP TO COMPRESSOR
40541 2
4 I READ XS 3214_trip_FO mXS 3214_trip_FO Trip valve start-up test abort
40541 3
SOS8628462/1 4 I READ XZSO_ 3030_trip_FO mXZSO_ 3030_trip_FO VALVE OPEN LIM SWITCH TRIP
40541 4
SOS8628462/1 4 I READ XZSO_ 3031_trip_FO mXZSO_ 3031_trip_FO VALVE OPEN LIM SWITCH TRIP
40541 5
SOS8628431/1 4 I READ ZSHH 3004_trip_FO mZSHH 3004_trip_FO BEARINGS AXIAL DISPLAC. COMMON TRIP
40541 6
4 I READ ST_TRP_PICKUP_DISCR_FO
mST_TRP_PICKUP_DISCR_FO
Cumultive Trip valve congruency
40541 7
4 I READ ST_TRP_PICKUP_FLT_FO mST_TRP_PICKUP_FLT_FO
Cumultive Trip valve congruency
40541 8
4 I READ ST_TRP_TURB_OVERSPEED_FO
mST_TRP_TURB_OVERSPEED_FO
Cumultive Trip valve congruency
40541 9
4 I READ ST_TRP_STD_CTRL_FO mST_TRP_STD_CTRL_FOCumultive Trip valve congruency
40541 10
4 I READ TRP_MAXTIME_CRTBAND_FO
mTRP_MAXTIME_CRTBAND_trip_FO
Max. time excededin critical band
40541 11
4 I READ GOV_FAILURE_trip_FO mGOV_FAILURE_trip_FO Max. time excededin critical band
40541 12
4 I READ
40541 13
4 I READ
40541 14
4 I READ
40541 15
4 I READ
40541 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 General revision LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 28 / 29
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40542 1
4 I READ
40542 2
4 I READ
40542 3
4 I READ
40542 4
4 I READ
40542 5
4 I READ
40542 6
4 I READ
40542 7
4 I READ
40542 8
4 I READ
40542 9
4 I READ
40542 10
4 I READ
40542 11
4 I READ
40542 12
4 I READ
40542 13
4 I READ
40542 14
4 I READ
40542 15
4 I READ
40542 16
4 I READ
40543 1
4 I READ
40543 2
4 I READ
40543 3
4 I READ
40543 4
4 I READ
40543 5
4 I READ
40543 6
4 I READ
40543 7
4 I READ
40543 8
4 I READ
40543 9
4 I READ
40543 10
4 I READ
40543 11
4 I READ
40543 12
4 I READ
40543 13
4 I READ
40543 14
4 I READ
40543 15
4 I READ
40543 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 General revision LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 29 / 30
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40544 1
4 I READ
40544 2
4 I READ
40544 3
4 I READ
40544 4
4 I READ
40544 5
4 I READ
40544 6
4 I READ
40544 7
4 I READ
40544 8
4 I READ
40544 9
4 I READ
40544 10
4 I READ
40544 11
4 I READ
40544 12
4 I READ
40544 13
4 I READ
40544 14
4 I READ
40544 15
4 I READ
40544 16
4 I READ - fVT 3101_ok KEY PHASOR PROBE PROXIMITOR
SOS8628431/1 40545 1
4 I READ - fVT 3102X_ok STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40545 2
4 I READ - fVT 3102X_alm STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40545 3
4 I READ VAHH 3102X fVT 3102X_trp STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40545 4
4 I READ - fVT 3103X_ok STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40545 5
4 I READ - fVT 3103X_alm STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40545 6
4 I READ VAHH 3103X fVT 3103X_trp STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40545 7
4 I READ - fZAH 3001A_ok STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE CHANNEL OK.
SOS8628431/1 40545 8
4 I READ - fZAH 3001A_alm STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE HIGH ALM.
SOS8628431/1 40545 9
4 I READ ZAHH 3001A fZAH 3001A_trp STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40545 10
4 I READ - fVT 3102Y_ok STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40545 11
4 I READ - fVT 3102Y_alm STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40545 12
4 I READ VAHH 3002Y fVT 3102Y_trp STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40545 13
4 I READ - fVT 3103Y_ok STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40545 14
4 I READ - fVT 3103Y_alm STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40545 15
SOS8628431/1 4 I READ VAHH 3103Y fVT 3103Y_trp STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40545 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 30 / 31
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 31 / 32
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ TAHH 3719 fTI 3719_trp STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40548 1
4 I READ - fTI 3720_ok STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
SOS8628431/1 40548 2
4 I READ - fTI 3720_alm STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40548 3
4 I READ TAHH 3720 fTI 3720_trp STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40548 4
4 I READ - fTI 3721_ok STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
SOS8628431/1 40548 5
4 I READ - fTI 3721_alm STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40548 6
4 I READ TAHH 3721 fTI 3721_trp STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40548 7
4 I READ - fTI 3724_ok STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
SOS8628431/1 40548 8
4 I READ - fTI 3724_alm STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40548 9
4 I READ TAHH 3724 fTI 3724_trp STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40548 10
4 I READ - fTI 3722_ok STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
SOS8628431/1 40548 11
4 I READ - fTI 3722_alm STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40548 12
4 I READ TAHH 3722 fTI 3722_trp STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40548 13
4 I READ - fTI 3723_ok STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
SOS8628431/1 40548 14
4 I READ - fTI 3723_alm STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40548 15
4 I READ TAHH 3723 fTI 3723_trp STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40548 16
4 I READ - fTI 3727_ok COMPRESSOR RTD CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40549 1
4 I READ - fTI 3727_alm COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40549 2
4 I READ TAHH 3727 fTI 3727_trp COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40549 3
4 I READ - fTI 3728_ok COMPRESSOR RTD CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40549 4
4 I READ - fTI 3728_alm COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40549 5
4 I READ TAHH 3728 fTI 3728_trp COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40549 6
4 I READ - fTI 3729_ok COMPRESSOR RTD CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40549 7
4 I READ - fTI 3729_alm COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40549 8
4 I READ TAHH 3729 fTI 3729_trp COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40549 9
4 I READ - fTI 3730_ok COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40549 10
4 I READ - fTI 3730_alm COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40549 11
4 I READ TAHH 3730 fTI 3730_trp COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40549 12
4 I READ - fTI 3731_ok COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40549 13
4 I READ - fTI 3731_alm COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40549 14
4 I READ TAHH 3731 fTI 3731_trp COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40549 15
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 32 / 33
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 33 / 34
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40552 1
4 I READ
40552 2
4 I READ
40552 3
4 I READ
40552 4
4 I READ
40552 5
4 I READ
40552 6
4 I READ
40552 7
4 I READ
40552 8
4 I READ
40552 9
4 I READ
40552 10
4 I READ
40552 11
4 I READ
40552 12
4 I READ
40552 13
4 I READ
40552 14
4 I READ
40552 15
4 I READ
40552 16
4 I READ
40553 1
4 I READ
40553 2
4 I READ
40553 3
4 I READ
40553 4
4 I READ
40553 5
4 I READ
40553 6
4 I READ
40553 7
4 I READ
40553 8
4 I READ
40553 9
4 I READ
40553 10
4 I READ
40553 11
4 I READ
40553 12
4 I READ
40553 13
4 I READ
40553 14
4 I READ
40553 15
4 I READ
40553 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 34 / 35
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 35 / 36
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 36 / 37
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I WRITE <2>
40558 1
4 I WRITE <2>
40558 2
4 I WRITE <2>
40558 3
4 I WRITE
40558 4
4 I WRITE
40558 5
4 I WRITE
40558 6
4 I WRITE
40558 7
4 I WRITE
40558 8
4 I WRITE
40558 9
4 I WRITE
40558 10
4 I WRITE
40558 11
4 I WRITE
40558 12
4 I WRITE
40558 13
4 I WRITE
40558 14
4 I WRITE
40558 15
4 I WRITE
40558 16
4 I WRITE WATCH DOG <2>
40559 1
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 37 / 37
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Bernardi A.
Zipoli M.
STEAM TURBINE
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
ITEM 207K-300-200-100
Summary
2. OPERATING PARAMETERS................................................................................................................ 7
4. KWATT CONTROL.............................................................................................................................. 15
7. CASCADE CONTROL......................................................................................................................... 19
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
1. START-UP PARAMETERS
11550
1.1.b) Maximum Governor speed (rpm) (Maximum Continuous Speed)
They represent respectively the lower and the upper limit within which the turbine speed can vary, once
the start-up is over and the target speed is reached.
In the case of a generator drive it is the speed related to the mains frequency expressed in rpm.
1.1.f) 2nd warm-up set point (Kwatt) (no for mechanical drive)
N/A
It is the power set point for the 2nd warm up (only in the case of a generator drive).
The first critical start is the parameter that identifies the rpm value at the beginning of the first critical
band during the start-up phase, and can be obtained directly from the start-up diagram. The first critical
stop represents the rpm value at which the first critical band ends. The critical band presence or absence
is to be signaled through the check box.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
The second critical start is the parameter that identifies the rpm value at the beginning of the second
critical band during the start-up phase, and can be obtained directly from the start-up diagram. The
second critical stop represents the rpm value at which the second critical band ends. The critical band
presence or absence is to be signaled through the check box.
It represents the time in seconds below which the turbine is to be considered "hot".
See note 1.
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp during the Normal Stop phase
until the 1st warm up speed is reached.
It represents the 1st warm up time maximum value (with cold turbine) in seconds.
NOTE 1: If Hot start < time elapsed from last shutdown < Cold start, then the governor carries out an
interpolation between the two reference values.
1.1.u) 2nd warm up Time Set (sec) (no for mechanical drive) N/A
It represents the 2nd warm up maximum value (with cold turbine) in seconds.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
nd
1.1.v) Min power for 2 warm-up (%) (no for mechanical drive) N/A
It represents the power minimum value, expressed in % of deviation from the SECOND WARM-UP
SETPOINT, in order to guarantee the achievement of the 2nd warm-up. If during the 2nd warm-up
phase, the power produced by the generator is different from this value, the 2nd warm-up time count is
stopped and an alarm is generated
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp from zero to 1st warm up in case
of Hot Start conditions (see definition of Hot Start).
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp from zero to 1st warm up in case
of Cold Start conditions (see definition of Cold Start).
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp from zero to target speed in case
of Hot Start conditions (see definition of Hot Start).
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp from zero to target speed in case
of Cold Start conditions (see definition of Cold Start).
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp within the range corresponding to
the first critical band, if the first critical band is enabled.
Reference is made to the hot start condition (see definition of hot start).
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp within the range corresponding to
the first critical band, if the first critical band is enabled. Reference is made to the cold start condition
(see definition of cold start).
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp within the range corresponding to
the second critical band, if the second critical band is enabled. Reference is made to the hot start
condition (see definition of hot start).
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp within the range corresponding to
the second critical band, if the second critical band is enabled. Reference is made to the cold start
condition (see definition of cold start).
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
The figure below shows a diagram explaining the steam turbine start-up phase in the three conditions of
hot start, warm start, and cold start, as well as a diagram representing the phase of turbine normal stop.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
2. OPERATING PARAMETERS
30
2.1 NUMBER OF PULSES PER REVOLUTION
It represents the number of pulses per turbine driving shaft revolution. This value is used to obtain the
speed measurement in rpm.
2.2.a) Manual: in this mode the speed set point increase and decrease as well as the HP valve
limiter opening and closing are carried out in manual way. The speed set point can be increased up to
the 1st warm up and, once the 1st warm up time is over, it can be increased up to target speed.
In this (and only this) mode it is possible to carry out the overspeed test.
2.2.b) Semi auto: in this mode the set point grows in an automatic way, whereas the HP valve limiter
is managed manually. The ramp interrupts at the 1st warm up.
To continue with the start up sequence, it is necessary to act on the CONTINUE command.
2.2.c) Auto: the sequence is fully automatic: the speed set point shall automatically follow the trend
reported in the start-up diagram in accordance with the parameters reported in section “Start-up
parameters”. The HP valve limiter, too, is managed automatically.
2.3 THRESHOLDS
It represents the threshold beyond which a steam turbine high high speed trip occurs.
Note: this function is not to be used as safety protection; however, an overspeed device separated from
the governor must be featured.
It represents the threshold beyond which a steam turbine high speed alarm is generated.
It represents the maximum value (in seconds) of stay in the critical band region (1st or 2nd) during the
start-up phase, beyond which the UNICOS governor causes the steam turbine trip.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
2.4.a) GENERATOR DRIVE: parameter to be selected if the turbine is a generator drive. This check
box animates the following parameters (2.4.b-2.4.e).
2.4.b) Sliding pressure: parameter to be selected in the case of a turbogenerator. Once the parallel
connection (with the grid) is carried out, the pressure control on the HP valve shall be enabled. The HP
valve is gradually opened until full opening or until the pressure measured at the steam turbine inlet is
lower or equal to the pressure set point.
2.4.c) Droop enable: active only in parallel working with the grid.
If selected, it enables the droop type control.
It contributes to the opening or closing of the HP valve in function of the difference between the speed
measured and synchronous speed (rated frequency). Its contribution takes place if the above-mentioned
difference is higher than a dead band, which can be set and related to a gain, which can be set, too. This
check box animates the following parameters (2.4.d-2.4.e).
It represents the dead band of droop control intervention as percentage of synchronous speed.
This value indicates the revolutions error percentage that takes the valve to 100% of travel range. If
Droop SAT = 1, the error of 1% upon revolutions corresponds to the contribution of 100% upon the
valve.
2.4.f) MECHANICAL DRIVE: parameter to be selected if the turbine is the driver of a compressor.
This check box animates the following parameters (2.4.g-2.4.l).
2.4.g) Syngas
In the Syngas type mechanical drive configuration, during the start-up and normal stop stages, speed
control is carried out acting on the HP valve (the LP valve is kept open and steam inlet pressure control
is disabled). On the other hand, once the start-up is over and under normal working conditions, speed
control is carried out acting on the LP valve (in this case, steam inlet pressure control is carried out
acting on the HP valve).
If this valve reaches its min. or max. limit, speed is controlled acting on the HP valve again.
If the corresponding check box is selected, the external CASCADE mode is enabled (valid in the case of
a mechanical drive).
The Cascade is external if the speed set point at the UNICOS governor is supplied by an external PID
controller: a typical case is a PIC controller external to UNICOS located on the compressor discharge
whose control variable represents the UNICOS governor set point. It is important to stress that this
modality must be selected even for any other controller implemented in the same PLC such as an
antisurge or process controller whose output drives the steam turbine speed: all those controllers must
be classified as External Cascade Control regardless their implementation.
The external controller output shall be converted to standardized range (0-1).
This check box animates the following parameter (2.4.i).
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
If the corresponding check box is selected, the UNICOS speed governor carries out its control action
interpreting the signal coming from the external PID in the following way: 0 = 0 RPM; 1 = Maximum
Continuous Speed. Set points lower than the Minimum Operating Speed, however, are not activated by
the governor.
If the corresponding check box is not selected, the UNICOS speed governor carries out its control action
within the Minimum Operating Speed (0) and Maximum Continuous Speed (1) range.
If the corresponding check box is selected, the internal CASCADE mode is enabled (valid in the case of
a mechanical drive). See explanatory diagram below.
The Cascade is internal if, unlike the external one, the controller supplying the speed set point to the
UNICOS governor is defined inside this latter (i.e. the relevant process variable is acquired by UNICOS).
The value shall be converted from 4 ÷ 20 mA to EU on the basis of MIN-MAX limit values (the limit
values can be modified in the section dealing with Cascade Control). It’s important to stress that Internal
Cascade Control doesn’t mean any other controller implemented in the same PLC such as an antisurge
or process controller: all those controllers must be classified as External Cascade Control regardless
their implementation.
This check box animates the following parameters (2.4.k-2.4.l).
If the corresponding check box is selected, in the case of internal CASCADE mode, the speed set point
to the UNICOS governor is a dynamic process variable (for example supplied by the DCS). The value
shall be converted from 4 ÷ 20 mA to EU entering the same cascade process variable limit values.
If the corresponding check box is not selected, then the above-mentioned speed set point is a static
variable defined within a register in the UNICOS governor, modifiable through the VDU.
If the corresponding check box is selected, in Cascade mode two digital inputs external to the UNICOS
governor (for example coming from the DCS) are made available in order to raise / lower the Cascade
Controller set point.
The slope of the ramp on the basis of which this set point increases/decreases is defined on the
Cascade Control page at parameter Cascade ramp slope [rpm/sec].
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
Below you can find the EXTERNAL CASCADE and INTERNAL CASCADE mode diagrams.
UNICOS
TURBINE
SPEED
CASCADE
EXTERNAL CASCADE RAMP SLOPE PV
SET POINT
SIC
Internal Cascade PID SP
PROCESS VARIABLE +
PV +
MEASUREMENT
PID
HMI STATIC SP Minimum Control Speed
DYNAMIC
It represents the set point assumed by the HP valve limiter in case of trip. This value is standardized
between 0 and 1 and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%).
It represents the lower limit assumed by the HP valve limiter. This value is standardized between 0 and 1
and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%).
It represents the upper limit assumed by the HP valve limiter. This value is standardized between 0 and
1 and expresses the valve opening percentage (0 = 0%; 1=100%).
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the UNICOS governor raises/lowers the HP valve limiter. It
is standardized between 0 and 1 in function of time (seconds).
It represents the upper limit assumed by the HP valve limiter during automatic start-up until the 1st warm
up is over. This value is standardized between 0 and 1, and expresses the valve opening percentage
(0= 0%; 1=100%).
It represents the upper limit assumed by the HP valve limiter during automatic start-up until target speed
is reached. This value is standardized between 0 and 1, and expresses the valve opening percentage
(0= 0%; 1=100%).
It represents the set point assumed by the LP valve limiter in case of trip. This value is standardized
between 0 and 1, and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%).
It represents the lower limit assumed by the LP valve limiter. This value is standardized between 0 and
1, and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%).
It represents the upper limit assumed by the LP valve limiter. This value is standardized between 0 and
1, and expresses the valve opening percentage (0=0%; 1=100%).
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
2.7 LOSS OF PARALLEL STATE CONTROL (visible only in case of generator drive)
In case of shift from parallel to island, thus in case of main switch opening, the HP valve shall be
managed in one of the following modes:
2.7.a) Manual: The HP valve shall reach the position set in relation to the parameter:
2.7.c) Disable: The PID inside the Governor deals with the HP valve control.
2.7.d) Continuous: The HP valve shall reach the position calculated in function of the island load
continuous signal.
In case of shift from parallel to zero load, thus in case of generator breaker opening, the HP valve shall
reach the position set in relation to the parameter:
In case of instantaneous load increase with turbogenerator running in island mode (for example in case
of trip of a generator operating on the same island), with the “Load Recovery” signal the HP valve shall
be managed in one of the following modes:
2.7.f) Manual: The HP valve shall reach the position set in relation to the parameter:
2.7.h) Disable: The PID inside the Governor deals with the HP valve control.
2.7.i) Continuous: The HP valve shall reach the position calculated in function of the island load
continuous signal.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
3.1 PID PARAMETERS FOR GENERATOR DRIVE NO LOAD OR FOR MECHANICAL DRIVE UNDER
M.O.S.
The PID speed governor is based upon the PID classic diagram, which takes into consideration the three
actions: Proportional, Integral and Derivative. The PID control typically provides a control output u(t) on
the basis of error e(t) according to the formula:
The error e(t) is calculated in function of the difference between the process variable measured and the
set point. The PG value is the governor proportional gain, the IT value is the integration time and the DT
parameter is the derivative time.
In generator drive mode, in case of generator breaker opening, the parameters of the PID dealing with
speed control are multiplied for the value entered in Dynamic Multiplier Constant to make the governor
action more "reactive" (for a 10 sec interval).
In particular, the proportionality constant and the derivative action are multiplied for this value, whereas
the integral action is divided for this value.
It represents the PID governor proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action is
calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point.
This difference is then standardized at the speed measure full scale and is multiplied for the value set in
PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example, a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to an error
variation of 1% – with reference to speed full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%)
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between speed and set point,
standardized for speed full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no
effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
3.2 PID PARAMETERS FOR GENERATOR DRIVE AT LOAD (ISLAND) OR FOR MECHANICAL
DRIVE ABOVE M.O.S.
The PID speed governor is based on the classic PID diagram taking into consideration the three actions:
Proportional, Integral and Derivative. The PID control typically provides a control output u(t) based on
the error e(t) according to the formula:
The error e(t) is calculated in function of the difference between the process variable measured and the
set point. The PG value is the governor proportional gain, the IT value is the integration time and the DT
parameter is the derivative time.
It represents the PID governor proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action is
calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point.
This difference is then standardized at the speed measurement full scale and is multiplied for the value
set in PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example, a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to a 1%
error variation – with reference to speed full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%)
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
4. KWATT CONTROL
4.1.a) BYPASS: if the check box is not selected, the power control is carried out in a closed loop
using the feedback of the kW signal. Therefore, the control action is managed by the power control PID,
whose set point shall be managed according to load engagement and disengagement ramps.
If the check-box is selected, there is no control action carried out by the power PID, but the ramp shown
above is ‘rescaled’ in a 0% ÷ 100% range, where 0 = minimum power, or better, HP valve opening in the
moment of parallel connection, and 100% = HP valve completely open (maximum power).
In this case, the KWatt measurement is not used and control is carried out in an open loop.
It represents the PID power controller set point expressed in KWatt, in the case of a generator drive. The
following parameters (4.1.c 4.1.d) can be set when the dialog box pops up.
It represents the minimum value of the KWatt PID controller set point.
It represents the maximum value of the KWatt PID controller set point.
It represents the PID power controller proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action is
calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point.
This difference is then standardized at the power measurement full scale and is multiplied for the value
set in PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example, a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to a 1%
error variation – with reference to power full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%)
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between power and set point,
standardized for power full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no
effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID power controller pursues the set point expressed
in KWatt per second, under Hot start conditions.
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID power controller pursues the set point expressed
in KWatt per second, under Cold start conditions.
It represents the slope of the ramp with which power expressed in KWatt per second is decreased during
turbine normal stop.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
In the UNICOS governor, inlet pressure control at the first turbine stage can be enabled only in the case
of a generator drive and a mechanical drive in Syngas mode.
It represents the inlet pressure PID controller initial set point at the first turbine stage. The following
parameters (5.1.b 5.1.c) can be set when the dialog box pops up.
It represents the minimum value of the inlet pressure PID controller set point at the first turbine stage.
It represents the maximum value of the inlet pressure PID controller set point at the first turbine stage.
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID controller pursues the set point.
It represents the PID pressure controller proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action
is calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point.
This difference is then standardized at the pressure measurement full scale and is multiplied for the
value set in PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to a
1% error variation – with reference to pressure full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%)
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between power and set point,
standardized for power full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no
effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
6. EXTRACTION CONTROL
This section is visible only when the check box 9.2.d is unchecked
It represents the initial set point of the PID controller dealing with extraction flow control between the first
and the second stage of the turbine. The following parameters (6.1.b 6.1.c) can be set when the dialog
box pops up.
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID extraction controller pursues the set point.
It represents the minimum set point of the PID controller dealing with extraction flow control between the
first and the second stage of the turbine.
It represents the maximum set point of the PID controller dealing with extraction flow control between the
first and the second stage of the turbine.
It represents the PID extraction controller proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action
is calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point.
This difference is then standardized at the pressure measurement full scale and is multiplied for the
value set on PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to
a 1% error variation – with reference to pressure full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%)
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between power and set point,
standardized for power full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no
effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
7. CASCADE CONTROL
This selection is possible only if MECHANICAL DRIVE as been selected in section Operating
Parameters.
Regardless as to whether the internal or external cascade control has been selected or not, the SIC
(UNICOS speed governor) shall receive a set point that is always limited by a ramp whose slope can be
configured in Cascade ramp slope (in rpm per second).
It represents the Cascade controller initial set point. The following parameters (7.1.b 7.1.c) can be set
when the dialog box pops up.
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID Cascade controller pursues the set point.
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between power and set point,
standardized for power full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no
effect.
7.1.j) Direct inverse If the check box is not selected, the error leading the PID output is equal to SP-
PV the greater is the PV the lower is the PID output. If the check box is selected, the error leading the
PID output is equal to PV-SP the greater is the PV the higher is the PID output.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
8. STEAM MAP
This selection shall be valid only if extraction control is enabled in section PRIORITY LOGIC.
The diagram below represents the ratio between the steam flow on the HP and LP valves, and the
turbine power. This ratio is used in case of coupling between the two valves.
Max HP Flow
Point B
Flow (t/h)
Point A
Point C
FIG. 1
It represents the x-coordinate of point A in figure1. It identifies the maximum power in relation to the
minimum extraction, expressed in Watt.
It represents the y-coordinate of point A in figure 1. It identifies the HP valve maximum flow in relation to
the minimum extraction, expressed in tons/h.
It represents the y-coordinate of point B in figure 1. It identifies the HP valve minimum flow in relation to
the maximum extraction, expressed in tons/h.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
It represents the x-coordinate of point C in figure 1. It identifies the minimum power in relation to the
minimum extraction, expressed in KWatt. (NEGATIVE VALUES ARE POSSIBLE)
It represents the y-coordinate of point C in figure 1. It identifies the HP valve minimum flow in relation to
the minimum extraction, expressed in tons/h. (NEGATIVE VALUES ARE POSSIBLE)
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
9. PRIORITY LOGIC
9.1.a) LP PRIORITY
9.1.b) HP PRIORITY
9.1.c) NO PRIORITY
Priority is given neither to control on the HP valve nor to control on the LP valve.
Figure 2 shows the general control diagram of the two steam turbine valves.
HP
PID A11 +
+ HP
Valve
A12
A21
LP - LP
A22 +
Valve
PID
FIG.2
As can be noted, the two PIDs (and consequently their control actions on the HP and LP valves) interact
by means of dynamic coupling factors.
If this checkbox is selected, any interaction between the two PID controllers for HP and LP valves is
eliminated.
With reference to fig. 2, the four parameters assume the following values: A11=1, A22=1, A12=0, A21=0.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
If this checkbox is selected, the interaction of the LP controller with the HP one is eliminated; in practice,
making reference to fig. 2, we have: A11=1, A21=0, whereas A12 and A22 shall be calculated in function
of the steam map.
If this checkbox is selected, the interaction of the HP controller with the LP one is eliminated; in practice,
making reference to fig.2 we have: A22=1, A12=0, whereas A11 and A21 shall be calculated in function
of the steam map.
If this checkbox is selected, only the HP valve is featured and therefore the extraction is excluded.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
IMPIANTO – PLANT
VOYAGEUR HYDROTREATER GOHT #3
2 0 7K -300 / 2 07 K T -300 V P 2 0 7 -K -3 075 -1 1D
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
Zipoli M. 30.09.09
207K-300/207KT-300
3 REVISED SHEET 1,11,12,15 SSE Bernardi A.
2
1
REVISED ALL SHEET
GENERAL REVISION – ADDED SH. 29, 30
SSE
SSE
Bernardi A.
Bernardi A.
Rossi S.
Rossi S.
04.09.09
08.06.09
COVER SHEET N. SOS 9971996 /3
0 ISSUE SSE Bernardi A. Palma L. 05.12.08 LINGUA-RANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV. DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION PREP'D CONT-CHK'D APP-APPR'D DATA-DATE A 1 / 2
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
1. LUBE OIL MACHINE SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
2. LUBE OIL CONSOLE SYSYEM................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
3. CONTROL OIL SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
4. SEAL GAS SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
5. SEAL GAS CONDITIONING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
6. PROCESS SYSTEM..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
7. STEAM SYSTEM.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
8. PROCESS CONTROLLER ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
9. ANTISURGE #1.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
10. ANTISURGE#2........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
11. SPEED CONTROL ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
12. TRIP VALVE TEST..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
13. PERMISSIVE TO START ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
14. OVERRIDE ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 16
15. SETPOINT.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
16. ALARMS / TRIPS ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
17. EVENTS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
18. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
19. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
20. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
21. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
22. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
23. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
24. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
25. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
26. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
27. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
28. KEYBOARD ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
10.
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
3 REVISED ALL SHHET
2 REVISED ALL SHEET HMI VIDEO PAGES N. SOS 9971996 /3
1 REV. LINGUA-RANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV. DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION A 11 / 12
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Antisurge#2
11.
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
3 REVISED ALL SHHET
2 REVISED ALL SHEET HMI VIDEO PAGES N. SOS 9971996 /3
1 REV. LINGUA-RANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV. DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION A 12 / 13
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Speed Control
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
14.
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
3 REVISED ALL SHHET
2 REVISED ALL SHEET HMI VIDEO PAGES N. SOS 9971996 /3
1 REV. LINGUA-RANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV. DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION A 15 / 16
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Override
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
207K-300/207KT-300
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 1 di 9
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
INDEX
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 2 di 9
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Description of Unit Control Panel (UCP) for the turbine and compressor control
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 3 di 9
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
4. POWER SUPPLY
The Unit Control Panel works with the following voltages:
a) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac Line 1 From UPS to be supplied at UPS1-120 terminal board for the
following devices:
b) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac Line 2 From Emergency Power to be supplied at EP-120 terminal
board for the following devices:
c) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac From 120/208 distribution panel to be supplied at MCC-120 terminal
board for the following devices:
Internal Lights
Internal Fans
Internal Heaters
Power Outlet Socket
Power supply for Local Control Panel light
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 4 di 9
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
d) Internal Power Supply Distribution 24 Vdc from 23PW1 and 23PW2 for the following devices:
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 5 di 9
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
5. EARTH CIRCUITS
Inside the panel there are three earthing circuits:
• [PE] PROTECTION EARTH
Earth bar for the connection of the chassis of the instruments and of the armouring of the cables in
input;
Low level 4-20 mA Analog Signals, RTD Analog Signals, Speed and Vibration transmitters
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 6 di 9
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
7. OPERATING CONDITIONS
The control panel has been designed to be operated in a control room with air-conditioning in a safe
area. Operating temperature +50°F ÷ 95°F
8. STOCK REQUIREMENT
In case the UCP should be stocked before the installation, it must be placed in a controlled humidity
and temperature store with temperature ranging from 0 to 50 °C inside the panel.
9. HANDLING
For the lifting of the UCP, two bars with hole are provided on the roof of the UCP.
10. MAINTENANCE
UCP maintenance consists of the following actions:
• Check of the electrical protection devices: fuses and breakers;
• Check that lamp are properly working;
• Check that air filters are cleaned
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 7 di 9
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 8 di 9
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
De-energize breakers and fuses in the reverse order of power-up sequence and verify that respective
devices are disconnected.
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 9 di 9
EQUIPMENT LIST
Supplier part Assembly Material Manufacturer
Item Description Item on ass.y drw Qt.y
number drawing part number
Pagina 1 di 2
EQUIPMENT LIST
Supplier part Assembly Material Manufacturer
Item Description Item on ass.y drw Qt.y
number drawing part number
PHOENIX
26 QUINT-DIODE/40 REDUNDANCY MODULE SOS9971994 23D1-2 2938963 2
CONTACT
PHOENIX
27 QUINT-PS-100-240AC/24DC/40 POWER SUPPLY SOS9971994 23PW1-2 2938879 2
CONTACT
PHOENIX
28 UK 5 - HESILED24 FUSED T. BLOCK WITH LED SOS9971994 25FU1-4;26FU1-5;27FU1-3;28FU1-6;29FU1-6;30FU1-4 3004126 44
CONTACT
PHOENIX MINI-MCR-SL-PT100-UI-NC CONFIGURABLE
29 SOS9971994 92AB1 2864273 1
CONTACT TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCER
XHS 3318
30 MOELLER M22-A MOUNTING ADAPTER SOS9971994 216374 1
XHS 3318
31 MOELLER M22-K10 CONTACT NO SOS9971994 216376 3
XHS 3318
32 MOELLER M22-PV EMERGENCY PUSHBUTTON SOS9971994 216876 1
RS485_HART;TB101;TB102;TB103;TB104;TB105;TB106;TB107;TB108;TB109;TB109A;TB110;TB11
PHOENIX
35 UK 5-MTK-P/P DISCONNECTING TERMINAL BLOCK SOS9971994 1_1;TB111_2;TB112;TB114;TBDCS_A;TBDCS_D;TBLCP_A;TBLCP_B,TBMCC_C;TBMCC_F;TBPR_ 3004032 877
CONTACT
A;TBPR_D;TBPR_S;TBSIS_D;TBSPR_A;TBSPR_D;TBSPP_C;TBSPP_F;TBTYR_TBTYR_D
Pagina 2 di 2
Single-Phase Power Supply Unit,
Primary Switched for Universal Use
QUINT-PS-100-240AC/24DC/40
QUINT POWER provides:
• Preventive function monitoring through
professional signaling
• Global use due to a wide-range input
• A high level of operational safety even in complex
global networks
• Reliable startup of heavy loads due to
POWER BOOST
1. Short Description
Headquarters: © Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. KG • Flachsmarktstraße 8 • 32825 Blomberg • Germany
Phone +49 - 52 35 - 30 0 • Fax +49 - 52 35 - 34 12 00 • www.phoenixcontact.com
Local Contact: www.phoenixcontact.com/salesnetwork
Single-Phase Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit for Universal Use – QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
3. Technical Data
125 mm
L ( + )
130 mm
a c t iv e
N ( - ) P F C
P E D C O K
1 3
1 4
240 mm
QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
1 AC Uu
Solid Stranded Torque
[mm2] AWG [Nm] [Ib in.]
Pcs.
Description Type Order No. Pkt.
Power supply unit,
primary switched for universal use QUINT-PS-100-240AC/24DC/40 29 38 87 9 1
Technical Data
Input Data 1
Nominal input voltage 110 - 240 V AC (wide-range input)
Input voltage range 85 - 264 V AC 120 - 350 V DC
Frequency 45 - 65 Hz 0 Hz
Current consumption (for nominal values) 11 A (120 V AC)/4.5 A (230 V AC), approximately
Inrush current limiting/I2t (+25°C) 15 A, approximately/3.2 A2s, approximately
Mains buffering for a nominal load (typical) > 20 ms
Switch-on time after applying the mains voltage <1s
Transient surge protection Varistor
Input fuse, internal 20 AF (device protection)
Recommended backup fuse 16 A or 25 A circuit breaker,
characteristic B (EN 60 898)
Discharge current for PE < 3.5 mA
Output Data 2
Nominal output voltage UN/tolerance 24 V DC ±1%
Setting range for the output voltage 22.5 - 29.5 V DC
Output current (continuous) during convection cooling
and nominal values Nominal output current IN 25°C to +60°C 40 A (Uout = 24 V DC)
IBOOST 45 A
Derating From +60°C 2.5% per Kelvin/below 100 V AC: 2.5%/V
Short-circuit current limit IBOOST ≈ 45 A, approximately
Startup of capacitive loads Unlimited
System deviation on: Static load change 10 - 90% < 1%, typical
Dynamic load change 10 - 90% < 5%, typical
Input voltage change ±10% < 0.1%, typical
Maximum power dissipation No load/nominal load 20 W/80 W, approximately
Efficiency > 92% (for 230 V AC and nominal values)
Response time UOUT (10% - 90%) < 2 ms
Residual ripple/switching peaks (20 MHz) < 100 mVpp (for nominal values)
Can be connected in parallel To increase redundancy and power
Internal surge protection Yes, < 32 V DC
Resistance to return supply 35 V DC
General Data
Insulation voltage: Input/output 3 kV AC (type test)/2 kV AC (routine test)
Input/PE 3 kV AC (type test)/1.5 kV AC (routine test)
Output/PE 500 V DC (routine test)
Electrical equipment of machines EN 60 204 (Surge Voltage Category III)
Safety transformers for switched-mode power supply units EN 61 558-2-17
Electrical safety EN 60950/VDE 0805,
(of IT equipment) UL/C-UL Recognized UL 60 950 u
Industrial control equipment UL/C-UL Listed UL 508 U
Equipping high voltage installations LISTED
with electronic equipment EN 50 178 (VDE 0160)
Safety extra-low voltage PELV (EN 60 204)
SELV (EN 60 950)
Safe isolation VDE 0100-410
Protection against electric shock DIN 57100-410
Protection against electric shock,
basic requirements for safe isolation
in electrical equipment DIN VDE 0106-101
Limitation of harmonic line currents According to EN 61000-3-2
Climatic Data
Ambient temperature Operation -25°C to +70°C (> +60°C derating)
Storage -40°C to +85°C
Humidity Up to 95% at +25°C, no condensation
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6 < 15 Hz, amplitude ±2.5 mm/15 Hz - 150 Hz, 2.3g, 90 minutes
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27 30g in all space directions
Pollution degree 2 (according to EN 50 178)
Climatic category 3K3 (according to EN 60 721)
c
Conformance With EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and
the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) Requirements
Noise Immunity According to EN 61000-6-2: EN 61 000-6-2 QUINT-PS-100-240AC/24DC/40
6
DC
O
K O
DC 7
13
14
DC
O
K
QUINT POWER
+ O
u
+ tput DC
– 24
V
– 40
A
–
In
pu
5 tA
C
N 100- /40
24
L 0V DC
/24
4 00
40
-2 7 9
-1 8 8
www.interface.phoenixcontact.com
- PS 29 3
T
IN o.:
QU er-N
d
Or
°C
60 F
3 2 DC
-2 …
-1
3
+ 40 °
5…+1
5
O –2
K OK
A DC
22 djus 0-6
-2
.5- t 00
29 S
L 61 81-1
RIA EN 500
.5V AL ST L
OV DU RO NT
IN NT ME
EN
PR COUIP
13 AP EQKA
43 ns
U
14 io s
DC ct
r u a in
D
TE
O LIS st
K in o m
1 + O n t
io
ut
pu ll a t t in g
+ a ec
tD st
C in o n n
– 24 ad c
V R ef o r e
– 40
A be
–
5
Figure 04
5. Safety Notes and Warning The device contains dangerous live components
Instructions and high levels of stored energy.
6. Installation
6.1. Mounting
The power supply unit can be snapped onto all
DIN rails according to EN 60715 and should be
mounted horizontally (input terminal blocks facing
downwards).
Installation Dimensions
QUINT POWER
To ensure sufficient convection, we
recommend the following minimum
spacing be used between modules: In
5
pu
tA
C
N 100-2
4 C/4
0
L 0V
/2 4D
40 9
-2
00 87
S-1 38
www.interface.phoenixcontact.com
T-P 29
IN o.:
A DC
22 djust 0-
6-
2
.5-2 L 00 1
S 61 1-
9.5 RIA
AL ST L EN 5008
V OV INDUTROENT EN
PR N M
COUIP
13 AP EQKA
ns
U
14 43
ti o s
DC D
u c in
s tr m a
TE
O LIS
K in
+ O
utp
n
ti o g
to
ll a c ti n
+ ut DC s ta e
in o n n
– 24 ad c
V R efo re
– 40
A be
–
Figure 05
240 mm 122 mm
80 mm
145 mm
QUINT POWER
DC OK
130 mm
290 mm
Figure 06
Mounting:
Place the module with the DIN rail guideway on the
Mounting
top edge of the DIN rail and then snap it downwards.
Removal:
Release the snap-on catch using a screwdriver and
then detach the module from the bottom edge of the
DIN rail.
Figure 07
Figure 08
L L L L1
N PEN N L2
PE L3
L N PE L N PE L N PE
+ – + – + – L N PE
QUINT QUINT QUINT + –
QUINT
Figure 09
Connecting Cable:
To maintain UL approvals, use copper cables, which
Q
are designed for operating temperatures > +75°C.
U
14
It should be ensured that all output cables are the DC
O
K LIS
TE
D
Signaling
Both DC OK outputs are used for preventive function
monitoring of the power supply. A floating signal
contact 4 and an active DC OK signal 3 are available.
In addition, the DC OK LED 6 can be used to evaluate
the function of the power supply directly at the Output 24 V DC
installation location.
DC OK
Floating Contact (Figure 12)
When opened, the floating signal contact indicates
that the output voltage has fallen more than 10% below
13 14 ++–––
the set value. Signals and ohmic loads up to a
maximum of 30 V and currents up to a maximum of 1 A
can be switched.
With heavy inductive loads, e.g., a relay, a suitable DC OK
protective circuit (e.g., free-wheeling diode) is required.
30 V AC/DC 1 A, maximum
Figure 12
DC OK
24 V DC
20 mA
Figure 13
DC OK
DC OK
Any number of devices can be looped.
This signal combination saves on wiring costs and 13 14 ++––– 13 14 ++–––
logic inputs.
24 V DC
DC OK LED 20 mA DC OK
The green DC OK LED enables local function
evaluation in the control cabinet.
7. Function
UOUT 960 W 1080 W
7.1. Output Characteristic Curve
[V]
With heavy loads, the working point demonstrates
the U/I characteristic curve shown in Figure 13. The UN 24
output current is limited to 45 A.
The secondary voltage is reduced until the short < 60 °C < 40 °C
circuit on the secondary side is removed.
The U/I characteristic curve ensures that both heavy
capacitive loads and devices with DC/DC converters
can be supplied by QUINT POWER in the input circuit
IOUT
without any problems. 40 45
IN IBOOST [A]
Connected fuses are reliably tripped. The selectivity
in your system configuration is ensured at all times.
Figure 15
0
0 20 40 60
Figure 16
http://www.phoenixcontact.com
connection is recommended if the power supply unit
does not cover the current consumption of the most
powerful load. Otherwise, the loads should be divided
over independent individual devices.
A maximum of five devices can be connected in
parallel.
TNR:102315-01-gb
03/15/05
PHOENIX CONTACT
1. Short Description
2. Technical Data
(3.307 in.)
IN OUT
84 mm
2
62 mm
(2.441 in.)
QUINT-DIODE/40
Redundancy module
10 mm (0.39 in.) solid flexible torque
2]
[mm AWG [Nm] [Ib in.]
Pcs.
Description Type Order No. Pkt.
Technical Data
Input Data
Input voltage UN/Umax 24 V DC/< 30 V DC
Input current IN 2 x 20 A, 1 x 40 A
(Cable cross section 6 mm2 [10 AWG]) Imax 2 x 19 A, 1 x 39 A (< 40°C [104˚F]), 2 x 16 A, 1 x 32 A (< 60°C [140˚F])
2
(Cable cross section 10 mm [8 AWG]) Imax 2 x 27 A, 1 x 54 A (< 40°C [104˚F]), 2 x 21 A, 1 x 43 A (< 60°C [140˚F])
(Cable cross section 16 mm2 [6 AWG]) Imax 2 x 30 A, 1 x 60 A (< 40°C [104˚F]), 2 x 24 A, 1 x 48 A (< 60°C [140˚F])
Transient surge voltage protection using Transil diode Yes
Protection against polarity reversal with diode Yes, < 60 V
Input/output voltage drop 0.5 V, approximately
Maximum power dissipation with nominal load 20 W, approximately
General Data
Insulation voltage: Input, output/housing 1 kV
Mounting position NS 35 DIN rail according to EN 50 022
Can be mounted with spacing - Vertical 5 cm (1.969 in.)
- Horizontal 2 cm (0.787 in.)
Degree of protection IP20
Protection class (without PE connection) II
Efficiency > 97%
Housing version AIMg (enclosure), GD-ZnAICu (heatsink)
Dimensions (W x H x D) + DIN rail (62 x 84 x 102 mm [2.441 x 3.307 x 4.016 in.])
Weight 0.7 kg, approximately
Climatic Data
Ambient temperature - Operation -25°C to +70°C (-13˚F to +158˚F) -25°C to +60°C (-13°F to +140°F)
- Storage -40°C to +85°C (-40˚F to +185˚F)
Humidity > 95%
Vibration according to IEC 68-2-6 3 - 15 Hz, amplitude ±2.5 mm/15 Hz - 150 Hz, 2.3 g
Shock according to IEC 68-2-27 30 g, 18 ms
Degree of pollution according to EN 50 178 2
Climatic category
Certification/Standards
Electrical safety EN 60 950/VDE 0805, EN 50 178/VDE 0160
(of IT equipment) u UL/C-UL Recognized UL 60 950
Industrial control equipment U UL/C-UL Listed UL 508
LISTED
Electromagnetic compatibility
c Conformance with EMC directive: 89/336/EEC
• Noise immunity EN 61 000-6-2
• Noise emission EN 55 011/EN 55 022 B1)
1
) Class B: Industrial and domestic applications
1 IN
2 OU
T
Figure 04
5. Installation
5.1. Mounting
The redundancy module can be snapped onto all
DIN rails according to EN 50 022-35. The module can
be mounted horizontally (input terminal blocks facing
Mounting Removal
upwards or downwards) or vertically on the DIN rail.
Installation Dimensions
Mounting:
Place the module with the DIN rail guideway on the
top edge of the DIN rail and then snap it downwards.
Figure 05
Removal:
Release the snap-on catch using a screwdriver and
then detach the module from the bottom edge of the
DIN rail.
I
U
Q
Connection Cable:
1 IN
The following cable cross sections can be connected:
2 OU
T
Solid
[mm2]
Flexible
[mm2]
AWG
[Nm]
Torque
[Ib in.]
1
1 2 3 0.2 - 16 0.5 - 10 20 - 6 1.2 - 1.5 10.6 - 13.3
10 mm (0.39 in.)
For reliable and safe-to-touch mm
2
connection: Strip 10 mm (0.39 in.)
from the connector ends.
Figure 06
6. Function
6.1 Input
The maximum permissible current depends on the
cross section of the connected cables and the ambient GND 24V DC
temperature (see Table 1). QUINT-DIODE/40
Power Supply + 1
Table 1
0
Cable Cross Ambient Temperature -25 30 40 60 70
Section Ambient temperature [°C]
40°C (104˚F) 50°C (122˚F) 60°C (140˚F)
10 mm2/8 AWG Figure 09
6 mm2/10 AWG 2 x 19 A 2 x 18 A 2 x 16 A
1 x 39 A 1 x 36 A 1 x 32 A
10 mm2/8 AWG
04/30/03
2 x 27 A 2 x 25 A 2 x 21 A
1 x 54 A 1 x 50 A 1 x 43 A
2 x 30 A 2 x 27 A 2 x 24 A
16 mm2/6 AWG 1 x 60 A 1 x 55 A 1 x 48 A
TNR: 5156438-00
Color Code: Chart D Page 375 5363/1C* 3 0.032 0,81 0.268 6,81
5363C 3 0.032 0,81 0.268 6,81
Jacket Colors: Chrome Gray, Industrial Black, Robust Red, High Visibility Yellow,
5364C 4 0.032 0,81 0.292 7,42
Safety Orange, Bold Blue, Environmental Green, Sand Beige, Pure White 5366C 6 0.032 0,81 0.347 8,81
SPECIFICATIONS
UL Type CM, AWM Style 2464 Overall
UL AWM Style 1569 Conductors
CSA CMG FT4
Passes UL VW-1 Flame Test
Passes CSA FT4 Flame Test
RoHS Compliant
AVAILABILITY
Many Items Are Available For Same-Day Shipment From Inventory
Orders Placed By 6:00 EST Will Be Shipped The Same Day
Please Refer To http://www.alphawire.com/pages/stk.cfm For Stocked Items
Minimums May Apply For Non Stocked Items
Web Site: www.alphawire.com Toll Free: 1-800-52 ALPHA • Telephone: 908-925-8000 • Fax: 908-925-6923
Email: info@alphawire.com Europe/UK Telephone: +44 (0) 1932 772422 • Europe/UK Fax: +44 (0) 1932 772433
907X]PI4:'WMRKPIGSVI:
%TTPMGEXMSR
*SVXLIMRXIVREP[MVMRKSJW[MXGLFSVHWIPIGXVMGEPIUYMTQIRXIKLSYWILSPHWVEHMSSVXIPIZMWMSRWERHGSRXVSPHIWOW'SRRIGXMRK[MVIWMR
QEGLMRIWPEMHMRTVIHIGXMZIXYFIWERHJPI\MFPITMTIWERHEPWSJSVQSXSVWERHXVERWJSVQEXSVW
90F^['7%
%;1 !%TTPMERGI;MVMRK1EXIVMEP
*SVMRXIVREP[MVMRKWJSVIPIGXVMGEPIUYMTQIRXERHGSRXVSPETTEVEXYWIKIPIGXVSRMGEWWIQFP]GSQTSRIRXW9018;1EGLMRI8SSP;MVIW
'7%8);)UYMTQIRX0IEH;MVIW
18; !1EGLMRI8SSP;MVI
*SVXLIIPIGXVSRMGEPMRWXEPPEXMSRSJQEGLMRIXSSPWERHXLIVIPEXMZIGSRXVSP
90 !9RHIV[VMXIVW0EFSVEXSVMIW-RG97%
'7% !'EREHMER7XERHEVHW%WWSGMEXMSR/EREHE
!8LITVSHYGXMWGSRJSVQIH[MXLXLI)'0S[:SPXEKI(MVIGXMZI))'ERH))'
4EVX2S 'VSWW %;+RS 3YXIV 'ST ;IMKLX 4EVX2S 'VSWW %;+RS 3YXIV 'ST ;IMKLX
WIGXMSR GEQQ [IMKLX GEOKOQ WIGXMSR GEQQ [IMKLX GEOKOQ
GEQQª OKOQ GEQQª OKOQ
\\ \\
\\ \\
\\ \\
\\ \\
\\ \\
\\ \\
\\ OGQMP
\\ OGQMP
\\ OGQMP
\\ OGQMP
\\ OGQMP
\\
(MQIRWMSRWERHWTIGMJMGEXMSRWQE]FIGLERKIH[MXLSYXTVMSVRSXMGI
*
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Functions Features
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC) is a configurable
3-way isolated temperature measuring transducer. It
is suitable for the connection of PT100 resistance ther-
mometers in acc. with IEC 60751 in 2, 3 and 4-conduc-
tor connection systems.
On the output side, the analog standard signals
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 0...10 V, 0...5 V, 1...5 V,
10...0 V, 20...0 mA, 20...4 mA are available,
electrically isolated.
The DIP switches are accessible on the side of the
housing and allow the following parameters to be con-
figured:
– Connection system,
– Temperature span to be measured,
– Output signal, and
– Type of error evaluation.
The voltage supply (19.2...30 V DC) can be provided
via connecting terminal blocks "7"/"8" of the modules, Figure 1 Features
or together, via the DIN rail connector (see Figure 5 on
page 8). Please also observe "Connection Systems" 1 Input: PT100 resistance thermometer
on page 9. 2 Transparent cover
3 Diagnostics LED
4 Groove for ZBF 6 Zack marker strip
5 Output: Standard signals
6 Supply voltage
7 Connection option for DIN rail connector
8 DIP switch S1
9 DIP switch S2
10 DIP switch S3
11 Universal snap-on foot for EN mounting rails
101949_02_en 1
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Technical Data
General Data
Supply voltage 19.2...30 V DC
Current consumption at 24 V DC < 25 mA
Power consumption < 500 mW
Transmission error
At max. measuring span < 0.2%
With configured measuring span ∆TEMP ((100 K / ∆TEMP [K]) + 0.1) %
Temperature coefficient 0.02%/K, max.
Step response (0...99%) < 30 ms
Test voltage (input / output / supply) 1.5 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min.
Ambient temperature range
Operation -20°C…+65°C
Storage -40°C…+85°C
Error messages LED red
Dimensions (W x H x D) 6.2 mm x 93.1 mm x 102.5 mm
Conductor cross section 0.2...2.5 mm2 (AWG 24...12)
Stripping length
Screw connection 12 mm
Spring-cage connection 8 mm
Housing design Polybutylenterephthalate PBT, green
Tests / Approvals
cuF
U PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
LISTED 31ZN
Class I Div 2 Groups A, B, C, D T5
A) This equipment is suitable for use in Class I,
Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D or non-hazardous
locations only.
B) Warning - explosion hazard - substitution of
components may impair suitability for Class 1,
Division 2.
C) Warning - explosion hazard - do not disconnect
equipment unless power has been switched off or the
area is known to be non-hazardous.
Statement of conformity in acc. with EN 60079-15 X II 3 G Ex nA II T4 X
2 101949_02_en
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Conformance With EMC Guideline 89/336/EEC And Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
Immunity to Interference According to EN 61000-6-21
Discharge of static electricity (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 Criterion B2
Electromagnetic HF field EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A3
Fast transients (Burst) EN 61000-4-4 Criterion B4
Surge voltage capacities (Surge) EN 61000-4-5 Criterion B4
Conducted disturbance EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A3
Noise Emission According to EN 61000-6-4
Noise emission of housing EN 550115 Class A6
1
EN 61000 corresponds to IEC 1000
2 Criterion B: Take protective measures against electrostatic discharge.
3
Criterion A: Normal operating behavior within the defined limits.
4
Criterion B: Temporary impairment to operational behavior that is corrected by the device itself.
5 EN 55011 corresponds to CISPR11
6
Class A: Area of application industry.
101949_02_en 3
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Ordering Data
Description Order Designation Order No.
Configurable temperature transducer for PT100 MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI 28 64 43 5
Screw terminal block, preconfigured
(see "Ordering Key for MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI and
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP" on page 5)
Configurable temperature transducer for PT100 MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-NC 28 64 27 3
Screw terminal block, not configured
(see "NC Version" on page 10)
Configurable temperature transducer for PT100 MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP 28 64 73 6
Spring-cage terminal block, preconfigured
(see "Ordering Key for MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI and
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP" on page 5)
Configurable temperature transducer for PT100 MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP-NC 28 64 28 6
Spring-cage terminal block, not configured
(see "NC Version" on page 10)
Accessories
Description Order Designation Order No.
DIN rail connector ME 6,2 TBUS-2 1,5/5-ST-3,81 GN 28 69 72 8
Power terminal block with screw connection MINI MCR-SL-PTB 28 64 13 4
Power terminal block with spring-cage connection MINI MCR-SL-PTB-SP 28 64 14 7
System power supply (not for Zone 2!) MINI-SYS-PS-100-240AC/24DC/1,5 28 66 98 3
4 101949_02_en
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Output:
Output Output signal
OUT01 = 0...20 mA
OUT02 = 4...20 mA
OUT03 = 0...10 V
OUT05 = 0...5 V
OUT06 = 1...5 V
OUT07 = 20...0 mA
OUT08 = 20...4 mA
OUT09 = 10...0 V
101949_02_en 5
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Failure Information:
Installation
Screw Connection Spring-Cage Connection
6 101949_02_en
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
The device may only be installed and put into operation by qualified personnel. The corresponding
national regulations (e.g. VDE, DIN) must be observed.
Only engage or connect conductors in the hazardous area when the device is deenergized!
Block Diagram
101949_02_en 7
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Figure 5 Mounting/Removing
8 101949_02_en
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
101949_02_en 9
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
NC Version
If the device is not configured ("NC version":
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-NC or ...-SP-NC), all DIP
Figure 8 4-conductor connection system switches are at pos. 0. The device does not have a de-
fined function until the DIP switches have been set.
DIP Switch S1
Diagnostics
DIP switch S1 (Figure 1, detail 8) defines the connec-
LED (Figure 1, detail 3) is visible on the front and tion system, output signal range and the start of the
displays the following error statuses: measuring range.
– LED flashes: Measuring range span less than Connection Output Signal Start
50 K System Range Temperature
– LED lit: Line break on the sensor side 1 2 3 4 5 OUT 6 7 8 [°C] [°F]
– LED lit: Short circuit on the sensor side 2-cond. 0...20 mA 0 32
– LED lit: Measuring range exceeded • 2-cond. • 20...0 mA • -10 14
– LED lit: Measuring range fallen below • 3-cond. • 4...20 mA • -20 -4
• • 4-cond. • • 20...4 mA • • -30 -22
• 0...10 V • -40 -40
• • 10...0 V • • -50 -58
• • 0...5 V • • -100 -148
• = ON • • • 1...5 V • • • -150 -238
DIP Switch S3
DIP switch S3 (Figure 1, detail 10) is used to select
the voltage and current output.
1 2 OUT
• 0(4)...20 mA, 20...0(4) mA
• 0...10 V, 10...0 V, 0(1)...5 V
• = ON
10 101949_02_en
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
101949_02_en 11
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
12 101949_02_en
Multi-stage performance filter FN 2070
• Current ratings from 1 to 36A
• Very high differential and common mode attenuation
• Good high-frequency attenuation
• Optional medical versions (B types)
Additional specifications
Standard types 250 50/60 DC to 400 2000 1700 1 550 000 0.4
B medical types (no Y capacitors) 250 50/60 DC to 400 2500 1700 1 600 000 0.002
A safety types (lower capacitance) 250 50/60 DC to 400 2500 1700 1 550 000 0.040
Electrical schematic
FN 2070
Cx L R Cx L
P P'
LOAD
LINE
N N'
E
Cy Cy
136
FN 2070 insertion loss
Per CISPR 17; A = 50Ω/50Ω sym, B = 50Ω/50Ω asym, C = 0.1Ω/100Ω sym, D = 100Ω/0.1Ω sym
Mechanical data
Front S
Housing Tol.
style K1 K2 ± mm
A 85 ± 0.5 C
L
K
B 54 ± 0.5
30.3 40.3 J
C ± 0.5 P
D 64.8 ± 0.5 Top M
F 75 ± 0.3
J 27 ± 0.2 N
K 12.3/8.3§ ± 0.5
L 20.8/23.3 29.8 ± 0.5 A F D
M 5.3 ± 0.1
N 6.3 ± 0.1
P 0.7 ± 0.1
S 19.9/34.9§ 11.4/34.9§ ± 0.5 B
§ with /07 connections
wire length of /07: 140 +5 mm Housings K1, K2
Housing Tol.*
Front S
style P Q L2 ± mm
137
Presentation, Limit switches 3
terminology 3
Osiswitch®
General
Detection movements
b Linear actuation (plunger) b Rotary actuation (lever) b Multi-directional actuation
Terminology Rated value of a quantity b This replace the term “nominal value”.
b It is the fixed value for a specific function.
Catégories d'emploi b AC-15 replaces AC-11: control of an electromagnet on a.c., test
10 le/le.
b AC-12: control of a resistive load on a.c. or static load isolated
by opto-coupler.
b DC-13 replaces DC-11: control of an electromagnet on d.c., test
le/le.
Positive opening travel b Minimum travel from the initial movement of contact actuator to
the position required to accomplish positive opening operation.
Positive opening force b The force required on the contact actuator to accomplish
positive opening operation.
Switching capacity b Ithe is no longer a rated value but a conventional current used
for heating tests).
Example: for category A300 the corresponding rated current,
le maximum, is 6 A-120 V or 3 A-240 V, the equivalent Ithe being
10 A.
Positive opening b A limit switch complies to this specification when all the closed
operation contact elements of the switch can be changed, with certainty, to
the open position (no flexible link between the moving contacts and
the operator of the switch, to which an actuating force is applied).
b All limit switches incorporating either a slow break contact block
or a snap action N/C + N/O (form Zb), N/C + N/O + N/O, N/C + N/C
+ N/O, N/C + N/C + N/O + N/O contact block are positive opening
operation, in complete conformity with the standard IEC 60947-5-1
Appendix K.
Osiswitch®
General
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
21 22 21 22
13 14 13 14
Osiswitch®
General
v Rotary movement
1
1 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 21-22.
C
v Rotary movement
mounting 3
Osiswitch®
General
L L1
1 2
Type of cam
1 Recommended 1 2
2 To be avoided 30 30
Osiswitch®
General
15˚
15˚
15˚
All the heads can be adjusted in All the levers can be adjusted in 15° steps throughout 360°,
15° steps throughout 360°, in in relation to the horizontal axis of the head.
relation to the body.
Type XCK J
b Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 45° steps by reversing the lever or its mounting.
1 Reversed a = 5°
2 Forward a = 45°
1 2
Osiswitch®
General
b XCK J
b XCK S
Head ZCE 05
B
2
A = length of lever + 11 mm
ZCK E09: 13 < h < 18 mm and B = 12 mm max.
ZCK JE09: 14 < h < 24 mm and B = 6 mm max.
Osiswitch®
General
CENELEC EN 50047
The European standards organisation CENELEC, which has 14 member countries, has defined in this standard the first type of limit switch.
It defines 4 variants of devices (forms A, B, C, E). (1) Minimum value A: reference axis
Limit switches XCK P, XCK D and XCK T conform to the (2) Maximum value H: differential travel
standard EN 50047. P: tripping point
E: cable entry
Form A, with roller lever Form B, with end plunger (rounded)
50 (2)
20 (1)
H P
12,5
P
5 (1)
H
55
40
10 (1)
A
15 (1)
21 (1)
55 (2)
E
31 (2)
12,5 (1)
30 (2)
Form C, with end roller plunger Form E, with roller lever for 1 direction of actuation
10 (1) 10 (1)
20 (1)
H
12,5
P
2,5 (1)
35
5 (1)
25
10 2
20 (1)
P H
H
31 (1)
25 (1)
P
28
40
30 (2)
(continued) 3
Osiswitch®
General
70 (2)
20 (1)
H P
H
70 (2)
5 (1)
40 (1)
67
5,3
31(1)
10 (1)
A
7,3
80 (2)
E B
15 (1)
30 42,5 (2)
46 (2)
100 (1)
200
3 (1)
58
20 (1)
P
H
53 (1)
44 (1)
Form F, with side plunger (rounded) Form G, with side roller plunger
56 (1)
20 (1) 58 20 (1) 41
39 (1)
47 (1) 30˚
H
30 (1)
H
3
20
20
H H
H
72 55
H H 3 (1)
20
59 (1) 41 (1)
67 (1) 50 (1)
Contact type: Reed / magnet contact Application: The LC 013 air-flow monitor can be used in combination with optical or audible
NC (normally closed) Contact open with air flow signaling devices (such as LED’s or alarms), or remote monitoring devices. It should be
NO (normally open) Contact closed with air flow connected:
Switching threshold A) in series directly with the signaling device itself, if the power of the connected device does
of air flow speed: >8.2 ft/s (2.5 m/s) not exceed the electrical ratings of the LC 013 as listed, or
Hysteresis: 3.3 ft/s (1 m/s) - fixed B) to the pilot switch side of a relay (i.e. our SM 010), if the signaling device to be switched
Contact resistance incl. wire: 370mW exceeds the electrical ratings of the LC 013 and needs to be switched via relay. In this case, a
Service life: > 100,000 cycles properly sized relay should be specified by the customer for the specific application/device.
Max. switching capacity: 10W (resistive load)
Max. switching voltage: NC: AC/DC 240 V / NO: DC 60 V Please refer to the table shown below to ensure the correct contact type (NC-normally
Max. switching current: NC: DC 500mA / NO: DC 170mA closed or NO-normally open) suitable for the application.
Connection: 2 x single strand AWG 26, length 500 mm, tip of
stranded wire stripped/tinned (5 mm) Installation notes:
Mounting: Attachment clamp and/or clip, To avoid possible interference problems, a suitable distance from the following must be
or integrated in protective grill (see below) guaranteed, preferably through prior testing:
Housing: Plastic, UL 94HB, black · magnets (permanent magnets) and ferrous metals (e.g. sheet metal)
Dimensions: 1.3 x 0.7 x 0.3” (34 x 17.5 x 7.5 mm) · electromagnetic fields and inductive loads (e.g. caused by transformers, motors, etc.)
Mounting position: Air-flow monitor opening perpendicular to air flow
Operating/storage temperature: -4 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C) / -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C) The air-flow monitor must be positioned directly in the air flow in a dust-free and
Protection type: IP 20 contamination-free environment. Avoid installing in areas where air pockets or turbulence
Agency approvals: UL and VDE can be expected.
LC013/03-07/US
80 x 80mm
+
- 92 x 92 / 120 x 120mm
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Suitability of this product for its intended use and any associated risks must be determined by the end customer/buyer in its final application.
STEGO, Inc. · 1395 South Marietta Parkway · Building 800 · Marietta, GA 30067 · Tel: (770) 984-0858 · Fax: (770) 984-0615
Toll free: 1-888-783-4611 (US & Canada only) · www.stegousa.com
Semiconductor Heater HG 140 Series 15W to 150W
Quick installation
These heaters are used in enclosures where damage from condensation must be prevented, or
where the temperature may not fall below a minimum value. The aluminium profile heater body
design has a chimney effect and distributes the heat evenly. The pressure clamp connectors
save time and simplify installation.
|
Technical Data
Art. No. Heating capacity* Inrush current max. Length (L) Weight (approx.)
14000.0-00 15W 1.5A 65mm 0.30kg
buyer in its final application.
++ STEGO UK Ltd. + Unit 12, First Quarter Business Park + Blenheim Road + Epsom, Surrey KT19 9QN + England + info@stego.co.uk + www.stego.co.uk ++
Slimline
Light
SL 025
Compact design
Light with Motion Sensor
Integrated receptacle
Energy-saving lamp
On/Off switch or Motion Sensor
The SL025 Light was designed to fit in tight spaces in
enclosures. It features an integrated receptacle so that electrical
devices (e.g. power tools) can be easily plugged in when
needed. The standard light can be screw-mounted in a variety of
positions, or the light can be fitted with an available magnet
mount. The optional motion sensor was designed so it can be
used in enclosures with glass doors and not be activated by
movement outside the enclosure.
Technical Data SL 025
Part No.: Specify according to plug and switch types as shown below
Light bulb: Compact fluorescent light bulb
Power: 11W (~75W incand.), Base: 2G7, electronic ballast
Luminosity: 900 Lm
Service life: 5000h
Light with On/Off Switch Switch: On/off switch (for light only)
Motion sensor: PIR = Passive Infrared (see note below)
Receptacle: max. AC 250 V / 16A (Schuko)
Connection: 3-pole screw terminal for AWG 14 max. (2.5 mm²)
(includes cable strain relief)
Mounting: M5 screws (not included), 11.8” (300 mm) hole distance
or optional attached magnet (see part nos. below)
Dimensions: L x W x D: 13.6 x 3.6 x 1.6” (345 x 91 x 40 mm)
Housing: Plastic, UL94V-O
Weight (approx.): 0.9 lbs. (400 g), 1.3 lbs. (600 g) with magnet
Protection type: IP 20
Agency approvals: VDE, UL
Note: A Passive Infrared (PIR) motion sensor detects the motion of the enclosure door No receptacle (AC 230 V): 02527.0-00 02527.0-04
being opened and automatically turns on the light. The sensor is factory pre-set to turn the w/ magnet mounting: 02527.1-00 02527.1-04
SL025/03-07/US
light off 5 minutes after all motion ceases. The motion sensor does not detect movement
through glass or fiberglass, thus allowing installation in enclosure with glass doors. No receptacle (AC 120 V): 02527.0-10 02527.0-12
w/ magnet mounting: 02527.1-10 02527.1-12
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Suitability of this product for its intended use and any associated risks must be determined by the end customer/buyer in its final application.
STEGO, Inc. · 1395 South Marietta Parkway · Building 800 · Marietta, GA 30067 · Tel: (770) 984-0858 · Fax: (770) 984-0615
Toll free: 1-888-783-4611 (US & Canada only) · www.stegousa.com
SG_Order_MV_E.qxd 17.10.2005 10:39 Seite 145
Protective Devices
Rated current In (A) Type Designation Article No. Units per package
2-p
pole
SG8602
3-p
pole
SG14202
Explanation PLSM:
145
P = XPole, LS = MCB, M = 10 kA
Moxa Industrial Media Converter
IMC-101 Hardware Installation Guide
P/N: 18020010104
Overview
Moxa Industrial Media Converter, which is specially designed for reliable and
stable operation in harsh industrial environments, provides industrial grade
media conversion between 10/100BaseT(X) and 100BaseFX. IMC-101’s
reliable industrial design is excellent for keeping your industrial automation
applications running continuously, and comes with a relay output warning
alarm to help prevent damages and losses.
This product has a wide operating temperature range, from -40 to 75°C, and is
designed to withstand a high degree of vibration and shock. The rugged
hardware design makes IMC-101 perfect for ensuring that your Ethernet
equipment can withstand critical industrial applications, such as in hazardous
locations (Class 1 Division 2/Zone 2), and complies with FCC, TÜV, UL, and
CE Standards
Package Checklist
Moxa Industrial Media Converter is shipped with the following items. If any of
these items is missing or damaged, please contact your customer service
representative for assistance.
y Moxa Industrial Media Converter
y Hardware Installation Guide
y Moxa Product Warranty booklet
Features
y Supports 10/100Base-TX auto-negotiation and auto-MDI/MDI-X
y Multi mode, single mode with SC or ST fiber connector available
y Supports Link Fault Pass-Through
y Relay Output alarm when a port breaks or the power fails
y Redundant 12 to 48 VDC power inputs, DIN-Rail or panel mountable
y Operating temperature range from 0 to 60°C, or extended operating
temperature from –40 to 75°C for (-T) models
2
Panel Layout of IMC-101 Series
Top Panel View
1. Grounding screw
1 V2+
PWR2
2. Terminal block for power
V2-
2 V1+
FAULT
PWR1
input PWR1/PWR2 and relay
V1-
V1 V2 INPUTS: 24 VDC
3 output
3. Heat dissipation orifices
PORT ALARM
4 4. Dip switch
ON
1
2
DIP
3
5. Power input PWR1 LED
Front Panel View (IMC-101-M-ST) 6. Power input PWR2 LED
2 7. Fault LED
5 8. 100BaseFX (ST connector)
6
7 Port
9. FX port’s 100 Mbps LED
8 10. FX port’s Full
9
10 FDX /CO L
Duplex/Collision LED
11. TP port’s 100 Mbps LED
12. 10/100BaseT(X)
11
12 13. TP port’s 10 Mbps LED
14 13 14. Model Name
15. 100BaseFX (SC connector)
Front Panel View (IMC-101-M-SC)
Port
2
5 16. Screw hole for wall mounting kit
6 17. DIN-Rail mounting kit
7
15
9
10 FDX /CO L
11
12
14 13
16
17
16
3
Mounting Dimensions
(Unit = mm)
15.10
30.00
13.10 25.40
9.50 54.00
135.00 135.00
46.77
+ +
+ +
+ + + +
23.15 +
+ +
+
30.50
10.65 10.65
4
DIN-Rail Mounting
The aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate should be fixed to the back panel of
IMC when you take it out of the box. If you need to reattach the DIN-Rail
attachment plate to IMC, make sure the stiff metal spring is situated towards
the top, as shown in the figures below.
STEP 1: STEP 2:
Insert the top of the DIN-Rail into the The DIN-Rail attachment unit will
slot just below the stiff metal spring. snap into place as shown below.
metal
metal
spring
spring
DIN-Rail DIN-Rail
STEP 1:
Remove the aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate from Moxa Industrial Media
Converter, and then attach the wall mount plates, as shown in the diagrams
below.
Top
plate
Bottom
plate
5
STEP 2:
Mounting Moxa Industrial Media Converter on the wall
requires 4 screws. Use the IMC, with wall mount plates
attached, as a guide to mark the correct locations of the 4
screws. The heads of the screws should be less than 6.0
mm in diameter, and the shafts should be less than 3.5 6.0 mm
mm in diameter, as shown in the figure at the right.
NOTE Test the screw head and shank size by inserting
the screw into one of the keyhole shaped
apertures of the Wall Mounting Plates, before it 3.5 mm
is screwed into the wall.
STEP 3:
Once the screws are fixed in the wall, insert the four screw heads through the
large parts of the keyhole-shaped apertures, and then slide Moxa Industrial
Media Converter downwards, as indicated below. Tighten the four screws for
added stability.
Wiring Requirements
WARNING Do not disconnect modules or wires unless power has been
switched off or the area is known to be non hazardous.
The devices may only be connected to the supply voltage shown
on the type plate.
The devices are designed for operation with a safety extra-low
voltage. Thus, they may only be connected to the supply voltage
connections and to the signal contact with the safety extra-low
voltages (SELV) in compliance with IEC950/ EN60950/
VDE0805.
6
WARNING This equipment has been evaluated as EEx nC IIC T4
equipment under DEMKO Certificate No. 03 ATEX
0324537U. Each module is marked with II 3G and is
suitable for use in Zone 2 Explosive Atmospheres. Devices
must be installed in a minimum IP 54 enclosure as defined in
IEC 60529 and EN 60529.
7
ATTENTION This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded
mounting surface such as a metal panel.
ATTENTION
Before connecting IMC to the DC power inputs, make sure the DC
power source voltage is stable.
8
Communication Connections
IMC-101 models have one 10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet port, and one 100BaseFX
(SC or ST type connector) fiber port.
RJ45 (8-pin, MDI) Port Pinouts RJ45 (8-pin, MDI-X) Port Pinouts
Straight-Through Cable
Switch Port NIC Port
RJ45 Plug Pin 1
RJ45 RJ45
Connector Cable Wiring Connector
Tx+ 3 3 Rx+
Tx- 6 6 Rx-
Rx+ 1 1 Tx+
Rx- 2 2 Tx-
9
SC-Port Pinouts SC-Port to SC-Port Cable Wiring
A A
Tx
B B
Cable Wiring
Rx A A
B B
Tx
B B
Cable Wiring
A A
Rx
B B
ATTENTION
This is a Class 1 Laser/LED product. Do not stare into the Laser
Beam.
Alarm Contact
Moxa Industrial Media Converter has one Alarm Contact located on the top panel.
For detailed instructions on how to connect the Alarm Contact power wires to the
two middle contacts of the 6-contact terminal block connector, see the “Wiring the
Alarm Contact” section above. A typical scenario would be to connect the Fault
circuit to a warning light located in the control room. The light can be set up to
switch on when a fault is detected.
The Alarm Contact has two terminals that form a Fault circuit for connecting to an
alarm system. The two wires attached to the Fault contacts form an open circuit
when (1) IMC has lost power from one of the DC power inputs, or (2) one of the
ports for which the corresponding PORT ALARM Dip Switch is set to ON is not
properly connected.
If neither of these two conditions occurs, the Fault circuit will be closed.
10
Dip Switch Setting
IMC-101 series DIP switch
Dip Switch 1 (Default: Off )
ON: Enables the PORT Alarm. If the port’s link fails, the
relay will form an open circuit and the fault LED will
light up.
ON DIP Off: Disables the corresponding PORT Alarm. The relay will
form a closed circuit and the Fault LED will never light
up.
1 2 3 Dip Switch 2 (Default: ON )
ON: Enables full duplex for 100BaseFX
Off: Disables full duplex for 100BaseFX
Dip Switch 3
Reserved for future use
To activate the updated DIP switch setting, power off and then power on the
IMC.
LED Indicators
The front panel of Moxa Industrial Media Converter contains several LED
indicators. The function of each LED is described in the table below.
LED Color State Description
Power is being supplied to power
On
input PWR1
PWR1 AMBER
Power is not being supplied to
Off power input PWR1
11
On FX port’s 100 Mbps is active
100M Data is being transmitted at 100
GREEN Blinking
(FX) Mbps
Off 100BaseFX port is inactive
12
Specifications
Technology
Standards IEEE802.3, 802.3u, Link Fault Pass-Through
Interface
RJ45 ports 10/100BaseT(X)
Fiber ports 100BaseFX (SC, ST connectors available)
LED Indicators Power, Fault, 10/100M, Full Duplex/Collision,
Dip Switch Port break alarm mask, 100BaseFx Full/Half duplex
selection
Alarm Contact One relay output with current carrying capacity of
1A @ 24 VDC
Optical Fiber
Multi Single Single Single
mode mode, 15 mode, 40 mode, 80
Distance, km 5 15 40 80
Wavelength, nm 1310 1310 1310 1550
Min. TX Output, dBm -20 -15 -5 -5
Max. TX Output, dBm -14 -6 0 0
Sensitivity, dBm -34 to -30 -36 to -32 -36 to -32 -36 to -32
Recommended Diameter 62.5/125 9/125 9/125 9/125
(Core/Cladding) μm (1 dB/km,
800 MHz × km)
Power
Input Voltage 12 to 48 VDC; Redundant inputs
Input Current (@24V) 0.16 A
Connection Removable Terminal Block
Overload Current Protection 1.1 A
Reverse Polarity Protection Present
Mechanical
Casing IP30 protection, aluminum case
Dimensions (W x H x D) 53.6 x 135 x 105 mm
Weight 0.63 kg
Installation DIN-Rail, Wall Mounting
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0 to 60℃ (32 to 140 oF),
-40 to 75oC (-40 to 167oF) for – T models
Storage Temperature -40 to 85℃ (-40 to 185 oF)
Ambient Relative Humidity 5 to 90% (non-condensing)
Regulatory Approvals
Safety UL60950, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 60950, EN60950
Hazardous Location UL/cUL Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D
ATEX Class I, Zone 2, EEx nC IIC
EMI FCC Part 15, CISPR (EN55022) class A
EMS EN61000-4-2 (ESD), level 3
EN61000-4-3 (RS), level 3
EN61000-4-4 (EFT), level 3
EN61000-4-5 (Surge), level 3
EN61000-4-2 (CS), level 3
Shock IEC 60068-2-27
Free Fall IEC 60068-2-32
Vibration IEC 60068-2-6
WARRANTY 5 years
13
Revision History
Document Edition Revision Date Revision Details
2nd June 15, 2004 1. Updated the edition of this
manual on the title page.
2. Changed the Moxa logo on the
title page.
3. Added several “Attention”
messages
4. Added one product feature:
Operating temperature ranges
from 0 to 60°C, or extended
operting temperature from –40 to
75°C for (-T) models.
3rd July 1, 2004 1. Revise 100BaseFX for fiber optic
port of ST connector.
4th Nov. 15, 2004 1. Modify Optical Fiber specs.
2. Improve resolution of figures.
14
Extract from the online
catalog
UKKB 3
Order No.: 2771010
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2771010
Double-level terminal block with a screw connection, cross section: 0.2
mm - 2.5 mm , AWG: 28 - 12, width: 5.2 mm, color: Gray
2 2
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
Commercial data 01/01/2003
EAN 4017918068165
Pack 50 Pcs.
Customs tariff 85369010
Weight/Piece 0.014051 KG
Catalog page information Page 291 (CL-2007) http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data
General
Number of levels 2
Number of connections 4
Color gray
Insulating material PA
Dimensions
Width 5.2 mm
Length 67 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 62 mm
Height NS 35/15 69.5 mm
Height NS 32 67 mm
Technical data
Rated surge voltage 6 kV
Pollution degree 3
Surge voltage category III
Insulating material group I
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-1
Nominal current IN 32 A
Nominal voltage UN 500 V
Connection data
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm
2
min.
max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 0.25 mm
2
Certificates / Approvals
Certification BV, CCA, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, GOST, KEMA, LR, PRS, RS, UL
CSA
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 25 A
AWG/kcmil 28-12
CUL
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 20 A
AWG/kcmil 28-12
UL
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 20 A
AWG/kcmil 28-12
Address
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2791032
2-level terminal block with screw connection, diode conducting
direction from bottom to top, cross section: 0.2 - 4 mm², width: 6.2 mm,
color: Gray
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
Commercial data 07/26/2006
EAN 4017918072407
Pack 50 Pcs.
Customs tariff 85369010
Weight/Piece 0.01641 KG
Catalog page information Page 324 (CL-2007) http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data
General
Number of levels 2
Number of connections 4
Color gray
Insulating material PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 V0
Dimensions
Width 6.2 mm
Length 56 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 62 mm
Height NS 35/15 69.5 mm
Height NS 32 67 mm
Technical data
Maximum load current 2
32 A (with 4 mm conductor cross section)
Rated surge voltage 6 kV
Pollution degree 3
Surge voltage category III
Insulating material group I
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-1
Nominal current IN 32 A
Nominal voltage UN 500 V (data is based on the dielectric strength of adjacent
terminal blocks or of the mounting rail.)
Connection data
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm
2
min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded 1.5 mm
2
max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 0.25 mm
2
Certificates / Approvals
CUL
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 30 A
AWG/kcmil 26-10
UL
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 30 A
AWG/kcmil 26-10
Address
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3003567
Double-level terminal block with a screw connection, cross section: 0.5
mm - 10 mm , AWG: 24 - 6, width: 10.2 mm, color: Gray
2 2
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
Commercial data 01/01/2003
EAN 4017918100759
Pack 50 Pcs.
Customs tariff 85369010
Weight/Piece 0.04692 KG
Catalog page information Page 292 (CL-2007) http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data
General
Number of levels 2
Number of connections 4
Color gray
Insulating material PA
Dimensions
Width 10.2 mm
Length 77.5 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 73 mm
Height NS 35/15 80.5 mm
Height NS 32 78 mm
Technical data
Rated surge voltage 6 kV
Pollution degree 3
Surge voltage category III
Insulating material group I
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-1
Nominal current IN 70 A
Nominal voltage UN 500 V
Connection data
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.5 mm
2
min.
max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 0.5 mm
2
Certificates / Approvals
Certification GOST
Address
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3004032
Knife disconnect terminal block with screw connection, with test socket
screws on both sides, cross section: 0.2 - 4 mm², AWG: 22 - 12, width:
6.2 mm, color: Gray
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
Commercial data 01/01/2003
EAN 4017918090579
Pack 50 Pcs.
Customs tariff 85369010
Weight/Piece 0.01325 KG
Catalog page information Page 315 (CL-2007) http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data
General
Number of levels 1
Number of connections 2
Color gray
Insulating material PA
Dimensions
Width 6.2 mm
Length 51 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 58.5 mm
Height NS 35/15 66 mm
Height NS 32 63.5 mm
Technical data
Maximum load current 2
16 A (with 4 mm conductor cross section)
Rated surge voltage 6 kV
Pollution degree 3
Surge voltage category III
Insulating material group I
Nominal current IN 16 A
Nominal voltage UN 500 V
Connection data
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm
2
min.
max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 0.25 mm
2
Certificates / Approvals
CSA
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 15 A
AWG/kcmil 18-10
CUL
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 15 A
AWG/kcmil 22-12
UL
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 15 A
AWG/kcmil 22-12
Address
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3004126
Fuse terminal block for cartridge fuse insert, cross section: 0.2 - 4
mm², AWG: 26 - 10, width: 8.2 mm, color: black
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
Commercial data 08/01/2006
EAN 4017918090647
Pack 50 Pcs.
Customs tariff 85363010
Weight/Piece 0.019733 KG
Catalog page information Page 304 (CL-2007) http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data
General
Number of levels 1
Number of connections 2
Color black
Insulating material PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 V2
Dimensions
Width 8.2 mm
Length 72.5 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 56.5 mm
Height NS 35/15 64 mm
Height NS 32 61.5 mm
Technical data
Fuse G / 5 x 20
Fuse type Glass
LED voltage range 12 V AC/DC ... 30 V AC/DC
Rated surge voltage 6 kV
Pollution degree 3
Surge voltage category III
Insulating material group I
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-3
Nominal current IN 6.3 A
Nominal voltage UN 500 V As a fuse terminal block
LED voltage range 12 V AC/DC ... 30 V AC/DC
LED current range 3.5 mA ... 8.1 mA
Connection data
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm
2
min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded 1.5 mm
2
max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 0.25 mm
2
Certificates / Approvals
CSA
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 6.3 A
AWG/kcmil 28-10
UL
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 6.3 A
AWG/kcmil 26-10
Address
2 R
Approvals
Accessories Type Part number Type Part number Type Part number
1 End sectionyellow FEM4AP V0 green th. 3 mm 0199 879.01 closed block FEM6 th. 2,8 mm 0103 062.21
yellow FEM6 V0 th. 2,8 mm 0199 305.02
2 Separator end section grey SCF6 th. 3 mm 0118 707.03
On rail : Recomm.screwdriver/Recomm.torque 4 mm .16" / 0,8 Nm 7.0 lb.in 4 mm .16" / 0,8 Nm 7.0 lb.in
R See markers marking method 11 12 RC65 5 11 12
2 R
Approvals
Accessories Type Part number Type Part number Type Part number
1 End sectionyellow closed block closed block closed block
2 Separator end section grey SCFM6 th. 3 mm 0114 825.05 SCFM6 th. 3 mm 0114 825.05
On rail : Recomm.screwdriver/Recomm.torque 4 mm .16 / 0,8 Nm 7.0 lb.in 5,5 mm .22" / 1,0 Nm 9.0 lb.in 5,5 mm .22" / 1,0 Nm 9.0 lb.in
R See markers marking method 12 17 26 12 17 26 13 17 26
79
T01009 001229
40
Modular Fuseholders Bussmann®
Specifications
Fuse Size (mm) 10 ≈ 38 14 ≈ 51 22 ≈ 56
Voltage U.L./CSA*** 600V 750V*** 750V***
IEC 690V 660V 660V
Amperage U.L./CSA*** 30A 30A*** 50A***
IEC 32A 50A(See Watts Loss) 125A(See Watts Loss)
Wire Size #8 - #18 Cu only #6 - #14 Cu only #1 - #14 Cu only
Wire Type (& Temp.) Solid/Stranded (75°) Solid/Stranded (75°) Solid/Stranded (75°)
Torque (in-lbs) 12 in-lbs 17.7 in-lbs 22.1 in-lbs
IP Rating IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Contact Material (fuseclip) Tin-plated copper Tin-plated copper Tin-plated copper
Connector Material Steel Steel Steel
Maximum Watts Loss of Fuse 3W‡ 5W‡ 9.5W‡
Dual Wire Rating Please consult factory
G
in (mm) in (mm)
H
A E
A 2.26 (57.5) G 2.07 (52.5)
B F I J
B 1.73 (44.0) H 0.75 (19.0)
C K
E 3.24 (82.2) K 3.18 (80.7)
D L
Size: 14 ≈ 51 Fuseholder
L in (mm) in (mm)
E C
F A B A 0.98 (26.0) I 3.50 (89.0)
J J
B 2.05 (52.0) J 0.20 (5.0)
G N
H
Size: 22 ≈ 58 Fuseholder
L
E C
F A B
J J in (mm) in (mm)
The only controlled copy of this BIF document is the electronic read-only version located on the Bussmann Network Drive. All other copies of this document are by definition uncontrolled. This
bulletin is intended to clearly present comprehensive product data and provide technical information that will help the end user with design applications. Bussmann reserves the right, without
notice, to change design or construction of any products and to discontinue or limit distribution of any products. Bussmann also reserves the right to change or update, without notice, any tech-
nical information contained in this bulletin. Once a product has been selected, it should be tested by the user in all possible applications.
LOW-PEAK® LP-CC
Time-Delay Fuses
Class CC – 600 Volt, ⁄Ω™ to 30 Amps
Dimensional Data General Information:
LP-CC LOW-PEAK Yellow™ Fuse
• A superior all-purpose, space-saving branch circuit fuse
that meets most protection requirements up to 30A.
• Very compact; physical size is only ⁄‹Ω£™∑ ≈ 1⁄Ω™∑ (10.3mm ≈
1.5" (±0.031) 38.1mm) with rejection tip.
(38.1mm)
• The unique yellow color makes it easy to tell that the correct
fuse type is installed.
• Faster response to damaging short-circuit currents and
higher interrupting rating than mechanical overcurrent
protective devices.
.41" (±0.005)
(10.3mm) 200,000A Interrupting Rating
• Maximum interrupting rating for available fault current in
today's large capacity systems.
• Helps ensure that future growth will not obsolete the system.
Catalog Symbol: LP-CC Dual Characteristics
• Time-delay to avoid unwanted fuse openings from surge
Time-Delay, Current-Limiting
currents.
Ampere Rating: ⁄Ω™ to 30A
• Fast speed of response under short-circuit conditions for a
AC Voltage Rating: 600V (or less) high degree of current-limitation.
Interrupting Rating: 200,000A RMS Sym. • ADVANTAGE: The LOW-PEAK ® fuse can be sized close
Agency Information: to full load ratings for maximum overload and short-circuit
UL Listed, Std. 248-4, Class CC, Guide JDDZ, File E4273 protection.
CSA Certified, C22.2 No. 248.4, Class 1422-02, File 53787 • ADVANTAGE: Can be used where either a time-delay or
DC Voltage Rating: 300Vdc (or less) a fast-acting fuse is needed, making selection easier and
⁄Ω™-2 °/⁄‚A and 20-30A, 20,000 AIR, UL 198L reducing spare fuse inventories for substantial cost reduction.
150Vdc or less 3-15A, 20,000 AIR, UL 198L
Superior Motor Protection
Catalog Numbers • For protection of small horsepower motor circuits.
LP-CC-⁄Ω™ LP-CC-1⁄Ω™ LP-CC-3 LP-CC-6 LP-CC-12
• Proper sizing can provide Type “2” coordinated protection
LP-CC-flΩ¡º LP-CC-1flΩ¡º LP-CC-3¤Ω¡º LP-CC-6⁄Ω¢ LP-CC-15
for NEMA and IEC motor controllers.
LP-CC-°Ω¡º LP-CC-1°Ω¡º LP-CC-3⁄Ω™ LP-CC-7 LP-CC-20
• Motors receive maximum protection against burnout from
LP-CC-1 LP-CC-2 LP-CC-4 LP-CC-7⁄Ω™ LP-CC-25
overloads and single phasing.
LP-CC-1⁄Ω• LP-CC-2⁄Ω¢ LP-CC-4⁄Ω™ LP-CC-8 LP-CC-30 Current-Limiting Effects
LP-CC-1⁄Ω¢ LP-CC-2⁄Ω™ LP-CC-5 LP-CC-9 — Prospective Short- *Let-Through Current (Apparent RMS Symmetrical)
LP-CC-1›Ω¡º LP-CC-2°Ω¡º LP-CC-5flΩ¡º LP-CC-10 — Circuit Current 1⁄Ω¢A 2°Ω¡ºA 15A 20A 25A 30A
1,000 100 135 240 305 380 435
3,000 140 210 350 440 575 580
Carton Quantity and Weight
5,000 165 255 420 570 690 710
Ampere Carton Weight*
10,000 210 340 540 700 870 1,000
Ratings Qty. Lbs. Kg.
20,000 260 435 680 870 1,090 1,305
0-30 10 .193 .088
30,000 290 525 800 1,030 1,300 1,520
*Weight per carton.
40,000 315 610 870 1,150 1,390 1,700
50,000 340 650 915 1,215 1,520 1,820
60,000 350 735 1,050 1,300 1,650 1,980
Recommended fuseblocks/fuseholders for 80,000 390 785 1,130 1,500 1,780 2,180
Class CC 600V fuses 100,000 420 830 1,210 1,600 2,000 2,400
See Data Sheets listed below 200,000 525 1,100 1,600 2,000 2,520 3,050
• Open fuseblocks - 1105 *RMS Symmetrical Amperes Short-Circuit
• Finger-safe fuseholders - 1109, 1102, 1103, 1151 NOTE: To calculate Ip (Ipeak) multiply IRMS value ≈ 2.3.
• Panel-mount fuseholders - 2114, 2113
• In-line fuseholders - 2126
LOW-PEAK® LP-CC
Time-Delay Fuses
Class CC – 600 Volt, ⁄Ω™ to 30 Amps
3⁄Ω™
4⁄Ω™
1⁄Ω¢
AMPERE
flꭧ
°Ω¡º
10
12
15
20
25
30
RATING
⁄Ω™
4,000
1
3
4
6
8
AMPERE
RATING
200 3,000
30
1,000
25
20
800
15
600
500
400 2-8/10
300 1-1/4
10
200
TIME IN SECONDS
100
80
60
50
40
1
30
20
10
1,000
2,000
10
20
30
40
50
60
80
100
200
300
400
500
600
800
.1 PROSPECTIVE SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT–SYMMETRICAL RMS AMPS
.01
.4
10
100
1,000
CURRENT IN AMPERES
The only controlled copy of this Data Sheet is the electronic read-only version located on the Bussmann Network Drive. All other copies of this document are by definition uncontrolled. This bulletin is
intended to clearly present comprehensive product data and provide technical information that will help the end user with design applications. Bussmann reserves the right, without notice, to change
design or construction of any products and to discontinue or limit distribution of any products. Bussmann also reserves the right to change or update, without notice, any technical information con-
tained in this bulletin. Once a product has been selected, it should be tested by the user in all possible applications.
Moeller HPL0211-2004/2005
Fixing adapters
Fixing adapter (front fixing) for 3 contact-/LED elements
For M22-(C)K... contact elements and M22-(C)LED... LED elements
RMQ-Titan
Sequence numbers on fixing adapter
– – – – – 1 3 2 M22-A 50 off
4 6 5 216374
– – – – – 1 3 2 M22-A-GVP 500 off
4 6 5 216375
Fixing adapter (front fixing) for 4 contact elements
For M22-(C)K contact elements
– – – – – M22-A4 50 off
4 3 2 1 279437
Contact elements
Front fixing Screw 1M – .3
1 3 2 M22-K10 20 off
terminals 4 6 5 216376
0 2.8 5.5
1M – .4
M22-K10-GVP 500 off
216377
– 1Bf .1
1 3 2
M22-K01 20 off
4 6 5 216378
0 1.2 5.5
– 1Bf .2
M22-K01-GVP 500 off
216379
– 1Bf .5
1 3 2
M22-K01D 20 off
4 6 5 262165
0 2.8 5.5
.6
– 1Bf .1
1 3 2
M22-CK01 20 off
4 6 5 216385
0 1.2 5.5
.2
– 1Bf .5
1 3 2
M22-CK01D 20 off
4 6 5 262510
0 2.8 5.5
.6
Complete modules
Assembly of contact element with screw terminals and fixing adapter,
Front fixing
– 1M 1Bf 13 21
1 3 2
M22-AK11 5 off
4 6 5 216505
14 22 0 1.2 2.8 5.5
– 1M – 13
1 3 2 M22-AK10 5 off
4 6 5 216504
0 2.8 5.5
14
– 1Bf 21
1 3 2
M22-AK01 5 off
4 6 5 216503
0 1.2 5.5
22
Notes 1) Assignment: Assignment of the fixing adapter with sequence numbers according to EN 50013
xy x = Sequence number on fixing adapter
y = Function number on contact element
xy
2) Cage Clamp is a registered trademark of Wago Kontakttechnik GmbH/Minden, Germany
Type: M22−A
Article No.: 216374
Ordering information
Description 3 contact blocks
Configuration
Assignment: Assignment of the fixing adapter with sequence numbers according to EN 50013
General
IEC/EN 60947
Standards
VDE 0660
Lifespan, mechanical Operations × 106 >5
Operating frequency Operations/h 3600
Operating force n 5
Operating torque (screw
Nm 0,8
terminals)
Degree of protection, IEC/EN
IP 20
60529
1
2/10 Emergency-Stop Actuators
RMQ-Titan
Moeller HPL0211-2004/2005
Emergency-Stop actuators1)
Non-illuminated, pull to release, – RAL 3000 M22-PV 5 off
IP66, IP69K 216876
– M22-PV-GVP 50 off
216877
Notes 1)
Emergency-Stop Actuators 2/11
RMQ-Titan
Moeller HPL0211-2004/2005
RMQ-Titan
With 1 key, not suitable for master key systems
Release by using the key
MS1 individual lock mechanisms – RAL 3000 M22-PVS 5 off
216879
Individual lock mechanisms MS2 – MS20 – RAL 3000 M22-PVS-MS* 1 off
216880
Notes 1)
Product catalog | Functional Electronics | Relay connector | RIDERSERIES | Complete modul | 2 CO | RCL
Contact data
Number of contacts 2
Contact base material AgNi 90/10
Mechanical endurance 30*10
Input
Rated voltage 24 V DC
DC Response/dropout Volt 16.8 V / 2.4 V
Rated current DC 16.7 mA
Power rating 500 mW
Status indicator Green LED = DC coil; red LED = AC coil
Output
Continuous current 8A
Response time / Drop-out time 7 ms / 3 ms
max. switching power 4000 VA
max. switching voltage AC 250 V
min. switching current 10 mA
Rated data
Connection system Screw connection
DIN Rail compatibility TS 35
UL 94 flammability rating V-0
Ambient temperature (operational) -40 °C...+70 °C
-1-
Product catalog | Functional Electronics | Relay connector | RIDERSERIES | Complete modul | 2 CO | RCL
Dimensions
Clamping range, max. 2.5 mm²
Clamping range, min. 0.5 mm²
Clamping range, nom. 2.5 mm²
Length 78.5 mm
Height 62 mm
Width 15.5 mm
Approvals
Approval body CEy
Classifications
ETIM 2.0 EC001437
ETIM 3.0 EC001437
eClass 4.1 40-02-06-14
eClass 5.0 27-37-16-01
eClass 5.1 27-37-16-01
Similar products
-2-
Product catalog | Functional Electronics | Relay connector | RIDERSERIES | Complete modul | 2 CO | RCL
Contact data
Number of contacts 2
Contact base material AgNi 90/10
Input
Rated voltage 115 V AC
AC Response/dropout Volt 86,3 V / 17,3 V
Rated current AC 6,6 mA
Power rating 0,75 VA
Status indicator Green LED = DC coil; red LED = AC coil
Output
Continuous current 8A
max. switching power 4000 VA
max. switching voltage AC 250 V
Rated data
Connection system Screw connection
DIN Rail compatibility TS 35
UL 94 flammability rating V-0
Ambient temperature (operational) -40 °C...+70 °C
-1-
Product catalog | Functional Electronics | Relay connector | RIDERSERIES | Complete modul | 2 CO | RCL
Dimensions
Clamping range, max. 2.5 mm²
Clamping range, min. 0.5 mm²
Clamping range, nom. 2.5 mm²
Length 78.5 mm
Height 62 mm
Width 15.5 mm
Approvals
Approval body CEy
Classifications
ETIM 2.0 EC001437
ETIM 3.0 EC001437
eClass 4.1 40-02-06-14
eClass 5.0 27-37-16-01
eClass 5.1 27-37-16-01
Similar products
-2-
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay
PSR-ESAM4
– Cross-circuit detection
1. Short Description
The PSR-...-24UC/ESAM4/8x1/1x2 safety relay can
be used in emergency stop devices according to
EN 418 and in safety circuits according to DIN EN
60204-1/VDE 0113 Part 1. Depending on the external
circuit, up to Safety Category 4 according to EN 954-1
can be achieved.
One or two-channel control is available with manual
or automatic activation. The connected start button is
monitored.
The relay has eight enable current paths and one
signaling current path. The contacts drop without delay
according to Stop Category 0 (DIN EN 60204-1/
VDE 0113 Part 1).
Headquarters: © Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. KG • Flachsmarktstraße 8 • 32825 Blomberg • Germany
Phone +49 - 52 35 - 30 0 • Fax +49 - 52 35 - 34 12 00 • www.phoenixcontact.com
Local Contact: www.phoenixcontact.com/salesnetwork
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-ESAM4
2. Technical Data
(4.508 in.)
114.5 mm
Logic K1
≈
= K2
99 mm
(3.898 in.)
PSR-ESAM4
7/10
M3 Housing width 45 mm (1.772 in.)
solid flexible
[mm2] AWG
Pcs.
Description Type Order No. Pkt.
Safety relay, Category 4, with or Screw-cage PSR-SCP-24UC/ESAM4/8X1/1X2 29 63 91 2 1
without start button monitoring terminal block PSR-SPP-24UC/ESAM4/8X1/1X2 29 63 99 6 1
Technical Data
Input Data
Nominal input voltage UN 24 V AC/DC
Permissible range 0.85 - 1.1 x UN
Typical current consumption at UN 210 mA AC, 120 mA DC
Voltage at input, start, and feedback circuit 24 V DC, approximately
Maximum voltage drop for S11/S12 and S21/S22 2 V DC, approximately (corresponds to 11 Ω)
(e.g., two Form B contacts of an emergency stop button) (at UN = 24 V DC and Tamb = 25°C [77°F])
Typical response time at UN
- Monitored/manual start 60 ms
- Automatic start 250 ms
Typical release time (K1, K2) at UN 20 ms
Simultaneity input S11/S12 and S21/S22 ∞
Recovery time 1 s, approximately
Output Data
Contact version 8 enable current paths
1 signaling current path
Contact material Silver stannic oxide, gold-flashed (AgSnO2 0.2 µm Au)
Maximum switching voltage 250 V AC/DC
Minimum switching voltage 15 V AC/DC
Limiting continuous current 6 A (Form A contact/Form B contact)
ITH=I12+I22+I32 On request
Maximum inrush current 6A
Minimum switching current 25 mA
Maximum shutdown power Ohmic load Inductive load
τ = 0 ms τ = 40 ms
24 V DC 144 W 42 W
48 V DC 288 W 42 W
110 V DC 110 W 42 W
220 V DC 88 W 42 W
250 V AC 1500 VA
Minimum switching power 0.4 W
Mechanical life 107 cycles, approximately
Breaking capacity according to Cycles: 360/h 24 V (DC13) 4 A; 230 V (AC15) 4 A
DIN EN 60947-5-1/VDE 0660 Part 200 3600/h 24 V (DC13) 2.5 A; 230 V (AC15) 3 A
Short-circuit protection of the output circuits, 6 A fast-blow
external
General Data
S
12
S
S
34
10
A1, A2 Connection
S
S
33
11
S
S
O
35
11
rd
.-
S
12
N
91
o
.:
– Please observe the safety regulations of electrical
2
P
33
92
for operating
6
w
3
9
er
34
43
K
2
1
91-92
13
53
44
23
2
33
54
43
voltage
14
53
engineering and industrial safety and liability
A
24
63
1
Signaling
34
73
S
13
21
83
44
S
14
22
54
91
A
64
23
74
24
84
83
92
S2
63
1S 64
73
22
74
A2
74
53-54
K1
23
K2
33 43 53
power. Enable
63 73 83
u
92
74
24
84
83
7 mm A1
84
92
S2
63
1S
22
74
A2
83
ends accordingly. 23
24
84
73
A2 S33 S34 S21 S22
74
PSR-SCP-24UC/ESAM4/8X1/1X2
24
84
83
84
92
10 mm
63
64
73
A1
S2
74
1
S2
2A
2
83
63
64
13
14
23
24
84
73
74
PSR-SPP-24UC/ESAM4/8X1/1X2
4.1. Closing the Activation Circuit and Feedback 4.2. Closing the Input Circuit (Emergency
Circuit Shutdown)
Emergency stop
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35
Figure 06 Figure 10
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35
Figure 07 Figure 11
Monitored reset with monitored contact expansion: Two-channel without cross-circuit protection:
Connect the reset button and the Form B contacts of the expansion Connect the Form B contact of the tripping device to
contactors in series to terminal blocks S33 and S34. S10/S11 and S11/S12, and jumper S21/S22.
exp.
Reset K5 Emergency stop
K6
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35
Figure 08 Figure 12
exp.
K5
K6
Figure 09
5. Connection Examples
Reset
Emergency
stop
Reset Button
Suitable for up to Safety Category 4.
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
A1 A2 14 24 92
24V AC/DC
GND
Figure 13
Reset
Emergency
stop
Monitored Reset Button (Jumper S33/
S35: Automatic Activation)
Suitable for up to Safety Category 4**.
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 13 23 91
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
A1 A2 14 24 92
24V AC/DC
GND
Figure 14
Reset
Solid-state output
A1 A2 14 24 92
http://www.phoenixcontact.com
24V AC/DC
GND
Figure 15
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
TNR: 5107089-02
A1 A2 14 24 92
24V AC/DC
GND
Figure 16
02/15/05
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
A1 A2 14 24 92
– Safe isolation
– Cross-circuit detection
– Approvals: U Listed
1. Short Description
The PSR-...-24UC/ES...4/2X1/1X2 safety relays can
be used in emergency stop devices according to
EN 418 and in safety circuits according to DIN EN
60204-1/VDE 0113 Part 1. Depending on the external
circuit, up to Safety Category 4 according to EN 954-1
can be achieved.
The connected start button is monitored for the
PSR-...-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2. This relay can only be
activated manually. Depending on the circuit, the
PSR-...-24UC/ESA4/2X1/1X2 can be activated both
manually and automatically. However, the connected
start button is not monitored.
One or two-channel control is available for both
modules.
The relay has two enable current paths and one
signaling current path. The contacts drop without delay
according to Stop Category 0 (DIN EN 60204-1/
VDE 0113 Part 1).
Headquarters: © Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. KG • Flachsmarktstraße 8 • 32825 Blomberg • Germany
Phone +49 - 52 35 - 30 0 • Fax +49 - 52 35 - 34 12 00 • www.phoenixcontact.com
Local Contact: www.phoenixcontact.com/salesnetwork
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-ESA4; PSR-ESM4
2. Technical Data
A 1 S 2 1 S 3 3 S 3 4 S 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 1
(4.508 in.)
»
114.5 mm
K 1
=
Logic
K 2
A 2 S 1 1 S 1 2 1 4 2 4 3 2
99 mm
(3.898 in.)
PSR-ESA4
PSR-ESM4
7/10
M3 Housing width 22.5 mm (0.886 in.)
solid flexible
[mm2] AWG
Pcs.
Description Type Order No. Pkt.
Safety relay, Category 4, Screw-cage PSR-SCP-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2 29 63 71 8 1
with start button monitoring Spring-cage PSR-SPP-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2 29 63 70 5 1
Safety relay, Category 4 Screw-cage PSR-SCP-24UC/ESA4/2X1/1X2 29 63 75 0 1
Spring-cage PSR-SPP-24UC/ESA4/2X1/1X2 29 63 93 8 1
Technical Data
Input Data
Nominal input voltage UN 24 V AC/DC
Permissible range 0.85 - 1.1 x UN
Typical current consumption at UN 140 mA AC, 65 mA DC
Voltage at input, start, and feedback circuit 24 V DC, approximately
Maximum voltage drop for S11/S12 and S21/S22 2 V DC, approximately (corresponds to 22.8 Ω)
(e.g., two Form B contacts)
Typical response time (K1, K2) at UN 45 ms
Typical release time (K1, K2) at UN 45 ms (one-channel)
20 ms (two-channel)
Recovery time 1 s, approximately
Output Data
Contact version 2 enable current paths,
1 signaling current path
Contact material Silver stannic oxide, gold-flashed (AgSnO2 0.2 µm Au)
Maximum switching voltage 250 V AC/DC
Minimum switching voltage 15 V AC/DC
Limiting continuous current 6 A (Form A contact/Form B contact)
Maximum inrush current 6A
Minimum switching current 25 mA
Maximum shutdown power Ohmic load Inductive load
τ = 0 ms τ = 40 ms
24 V DC 144 W 42 W
48 V DC 288 W 42 W
110 V DC 110 W 42 W
220 V DC 88 W 42 W
250 V AC 1500 V A
Minimum switching power 0.4 W
Mechanical life 107 cycles, approximately
Breaking capacity according to Cycles: 360/h 24 V (DC13) 4 A; 230 V (AC15) 4A
DIN EN 60947-5-1/VDE 0660 Part 200 3600/h 24 V (DC13) 2.5 A; 230 V (AC15) 3A
Short-circuit protection of the output circuits, 6 A fast-blow
external
General Data
Note: When operating relay modules the operator must meet the
requirements for emitted interference for electrical and electronic
equipment (EN 50081-2) on the contact side and, if required, take
appropriate measures.
A
1
S
S
12
33
3.1. Safety Instructions
S
21
34
Input circuit
S
rd
S
22
11
.-
N
o
A
2
.:
P
o
2
w
9
6
er
3
– Please observe the safety regulations of electrical
7
1
K
8
1
13
K
2
23
31
14
24
S33, S34
32
32
C
N
13
C
23
associations.
14
Start circuit
24
31
nc /
A1
31-32 32 S21
S33
Signaling 23
=
A2
24
S34
power. current
S22
Logic
S11
13
K2
23
31
14
13-14, 23-24
engineer.
24
Enable
32
32
7 mm
13
14
24
31
For reliable and safe contacts, strip the connector 13
ends accordingly. 14
32
PSR-SCP-24UC/ES...4/2X1/1X2
3
23
14
10 mm
24
31
13
14
23
2
PSR-SPP-24UC/ES...4/2X1/1X2
4. Connection Examples
One-channel emergency stop circuit with manual activation1), One-channel safety door monitoring with automatic activation,
suitable for up to Safety Category 2. suitable for up to Safety Category 2.
Reset
S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13 23 31 S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13 23 31
A1 A2 14 24 32 A1 A2 14 24 32
Emergency
stop
24V UC 24V AC/DC
GND GND
Two-channel emergency stop circuit with cross-circuit Two-channel safety door monitoring with cross-circuit
monitoring and manual activation1), suitable for up to Safety monitoring and automatic activation, suitable for up to Safety
Category 4. Category 4.
Emergency
stop
Reset
S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13 23 31
24V AC/DC
24V UC
GND
GND
Two-channel emergency stop circuit with cross-circuit Two-channel safety door monitoring with cross-circuit
monitoring, manual activation1), and monitored contact monitoring, automatic activation, and monitored contact
expansion, suitable for up to Safety Category 4. expansion, suitable for up to Safety Category 4.
Emergency
K4
stop L L
K2 ext.
K3
Reset
06/01/02
L
K1ext.
A1 A2 14 24 32
K3
K2 ext. 24V AC/DC
24V UC
GND GND K4
K1 ext.
N N
1)
PSR-...-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2 with reset button monitoring
PSR-...-24UC/ESA4/2X1/1X2 without reset button monitoring
PHOENIX CONTACT page 4 of 4
Extract from the online
catalog
EM-DUO 120/15
Order No.: 5600461
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=5600461
Rail-mountable double socket, for mounting on 35 mm mounting rail in
acc. with EN EN 60715, housing color: white, with screw connection,
national version: USA
http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Commercial data Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
EAN 4017918929930 online catalog. For comprehensive
Pack 1 Pcs. information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
Customs tariff 85366990 General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.
Weight/Piece 0.2548 KG
Catalog page information Page 513 (IF-2007)
Technical data
General data
Nominal voltage UN 120 V AC
Nominal current IN 15 A
For country-specific use in USA
Color white
Insulating material PVC 94 V0
Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 70 °C
Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 70 °C
Standards/regulations UL 508
Length 134 mm
Width 83 mm
Height 49 mm
Connection data
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm
2
Certificates / Approvals
Address
0WFSWPMUBHF1SPUFDUJPO'PS&OFSHZ
%JTUSJCVUJPO4ZTUFNT
77
B/C/D arrestors Warning signal over distance
Detachable modules, installation facilities Codification of the voltage modules
Easy visual inspection of modules service ability Mounts on all TS 35
Order No. Type Qty. Rated Monit. Lightening Rated Leakage Width
Voltage Contact Test Current Current Max.
8381890000 PU 3B 1 230 Vac no (10/350µs) 20 kA (8/20µs) 100 kA 54
Accessories
Pluggable spare arrester PU 0B Order No. : 8381880000
Order No. Type Qty. Rated Rated Leakage Current Monit. Width. Pluggable Spare Arrester
Voltage Nom. Max. Contact Type Order No.
8102610000 PU 1C 1 230 Vac 20 kA (8/20µs) 40 kA no * PU 0 B 8339510000
C.17
Small, compact Thermostat KTO 011 / KTS 011
Small size
Simple to mount
High switching performance
KTO 011: Thermostat (normally closed); contact breaker for regulating heaters.
KTS 011: Thermostat (normally open); contact maker for regulating of filter fans and heat
exchangers or for switching signal devised when temperature limit has been exceeded.
|
Technical Data
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Errors and omissions excepted. Suitability of this product for its intended use and any associated risks must be determined by the end customer/
24.04.2006
e.g. Signal
Thermostat Heater Thermostat e.g. Fan Thermostat
device
KTO 011 (NC) KTS 011 (NO) KTS 011 (NO)
Setting range Art. No. Contact Breaker (NC) Art. No. Contact Maker (NO) Approvals
buyer in its final application.
++ STEGO UK Ltd. + Unit 12, First Quarter Business Park + Blenheim Road + Epsom, Surrey KT19 9QN + England + info@stego.co.uk + www.stego.co.uk ++
LOW-THICKNESS FILTER FANS: 2000-2300-2310-2324-2348-2400-2410
GRUPPI DI VENTILAZIONE A BASSO PROFILO: 2000-2300-2310-2324-2348-2400-2410
234 250
∆Pf (Pa)
225
100
90
234
225
80 250
70
60
Al
Al
50
fa
fa
O
24
23
00
40
00
30
20 121*
2000
10 Alfa
Modello Descrizione Dimensioni Alimentazione Portata aria Potenza Corrente Rumorosità Portata aria
assorbita con filtro
mm' V$Hz m/h W A dB (A) in uscita * m/h
Model Description Dimensions Feeding Flow rate Power Absorbed Noise level Flow rate
current with exit
mm' V$Hz m/h W A dB (A) filter ** m/h
Alfa Griglia con filtro xx $$$$ $$$$ $$$$ $$$$ $$$$ $$$$
Bp
Filter
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx $/& / )/ '/' &/ /)
Bp
Filter fan
Alfa Griglia con filtro xx $/& / )/ '/') &/ /)
Bp
Filter
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx V DC ' (
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx V DC ' (
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx $/& / / '&/' (/ )/
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx $/& / / '&/' (/ )/
Bp
Filter fan
180
234
225
160 250
140
120 Alfa
260
0B
O
100 Al p
fa
25
80 00
Bp
60
* mm. 218
40
Bp
172* ** mm. 104
2000 per Alfa
20 Alfa
2600/10/40 Bp
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380
Modello Descrizione Dimensioni Alimentazione Portata aria Potenza Corrente Rumorosità Portata aria
assorbita con filtro
mm' V%Hz m(/h W A dB (A) in uscita * m(/h
Model Description Dimensions Feeding Flow rate Power Absorbed Noise level Flow rate
current with exit
mm' V%Hz m(/h W A dB (A) filter ** m(/h
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia xx $ (%/ (/ /( '(/') / /
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx $ %/ (/ /( '/' / /
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx $ V DC ( '(
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx (%/ ()/ )/$ '/'( / /)
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx %/ ()/ )/$ '/') / /)
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx %/ ()/ )/$ ' /' / /)
Bp
Filter fan
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 1 di 7
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
INDEX
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 2 di 7
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Description of Local Control Panel (LCP) for the local control and monitoring of the turbo
compression unit.
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 3 di 7
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
4. POWER SUPPLY
The Local Control Panel is powered by Unit Control Panel:
a) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac from UCP (LCP-UPS1 terminal board) to be supplied at the following
device:
b) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac from UCP (LCP-EP terminal board) to be supplied at LCP-HRT
terminal board for the following devices:
c) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac from UCP (LCP-UPS1 terminal board) to be supplied at the following
device:
Panel PC
d) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac from UCP (LCP-MCC terminal board) to be supplied at the following
device:
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 4 di 7
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
5. EARTH CIRCUITS
Inside the panel there are two earthing circuits:
• [PE] PROTECTION EARTH
Earth bar for the connection of the chassis of the instruments and of the armouring of the cables in
input;
Low level 4-20 mA Analog Signals, RTD Analog Signals, Speed and Vibration transmitters
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 5 di 7
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
7. OPERATING CONDITIONS
The local control panel has been designed to be operated in out-door under shelter in a hazardous
area, Class 1 Zone 2 Group IIC Temp.T3 (acc. to IEC).
Operative temperature range -58 °F and +104 °F
8. STOCK REQUIREMENT
The LCP can be stocked at temperature between -58 °F and +104 °F and relative humidity between
5% and 95%.
9. HANDLING
For the lifting of the LCP, use the two provided holes on the top of LCP.
10. MAINTENANCE
LCP maintenance consists of the following actions:
• Check that lamp is properly working;
11. INTERCONNETCTION
For entry of the cables in the box use cable gland Eex-e certified.
For the Panel PC connection refer to installation manual of the panel PC DRAWING MDRW00245
For the connection of the horn refer to installation instructions for vibratone
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 6 di 7
SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
1) Energize 11FU1 in the Unit Control Panel, verify that external horn proper working;
2) Energize 11QF3 in the Unit Control Panel, verify that Panel PC proper working;
3) Energize 15FU1 in the Unit Control Panel, verify presence of 120Vac at LCP-HTR terminal board and
verify that internal heater proper working;
4) Energize 22FU1 in the Unit Control Panel, verify that external light proper working;
De-energize breakers and fuses in the unit control panel in the reverse order of power-up sequence
and verify that respective devices are disconnected.
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 7 di 7
EQUIPMENT LIST
Supplier part Assembly Material Manufacturer
Item Description Item on ass.y drw Qt.y
number drawing part number
FEDERAL
1 350WB HORN 120VAC SOS9972008 6HA1 350WBX-120 1
SIGNAL
2 INTERTEC ANTICONDENSING HEATER SOS9972008 8EH1 CPA-300-T3-80-1 1
AC-Exacta INCANDESCENT LAMP FOR CEILING
3 NRL SOS9972008 9EL1 ACEH15I1GCGC2 1
MOUNTING
4 NRL LAMP 120VAC 100W SOS9972008 9EL1 INX3543 1
CROUSE
5 SWITCH 2P SOS9972008 9SA1 EDSC218 1
HINDS
PRECISION
6 PANELMETER (FOR HAZARDOUS AREA) SOS9972008 FI 3290B;PDI 3461B;PI 3095B;PI 3096B;PI 3403B;PI 3471B;SI 3049B;UZI 3293B PD688-0K0 8
DIGITAL
HS 3084;HS 3113;HS 3114;HS 3118;HS 3111;SHS 3111;SHS 3112;XHS 3085;XHSC 3030;XHSC
7 BARTEC PUSH BUTTON SOS9972008 05-0003-000700BN 13
3031;XHSO 3030;XHSO 3031;XHSO 3315
HS 3084;HS 3113;HS 3114;HS 3115;HS 3117;HS 3118;HS 3126;HS 3111;NCR 3741;SHS 3111;SHS
8 BARTEC SWITCH MODULE 2NO SOS9972008 3112;SHS 3116;XHS 3085;XHS 3120;XHS 3316;XHSC 3030;XHSC 3031;XHSO 3030;XHSO 07-3323-1200 20
3031;XHSO 3315
9 BARTEC POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH 2 POSITION SOS9972008 HS 3115;HS 3117;HS 3126;NCR 3741;SHS 3116 05-0003-000900BN 5
PHOENIX
10 USLKG5 EARTH TERMINAL BLOCK SOS9972008 LCP-HTR 441504 1
CONTACT
PHOENIX
11 UK 3N FEED THROUGH TERMINAL BLOCK SOS9972008 LCP-HTR;TBLCP_A;TBLCP_B;TBLCP_L;TBSPR_D 3001501 200
CONTACT
ENDRESS
12 RTD TH15 PT100 SOS9972008 RTD PT100 TH15-F2A5AA2KA1 1
HAUSER
13 BARTEC EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON SOS9972008 XHS 3120 05-0003-000800BN 1
19 BARTEC INDICATOR GREEN LIGHT SOS9972008 XL 3313;XL 3314;XZLO 3030;XZLO 3031 05-0003-001400BN 4
20 BARTEC GREEN LAMP MODULE SOS9972008 XL 3313;XL 3314;XZLO 3030;XZLO 3031 07-3353-1120 4
Pagina 1 di 1
MIL-W-16878E TYPE B: 105°C, 600 VOLT
UL 1429, CSA: 80°C, 150 VOLT
MIL-W-16878E TYPE C: 105°C, 1000 VOLT
HOOK-UP WIRE
UL 1430, CSA: 105°C, 300 VOLT IRRADIATED PVC INSULATION
RoHS COMPLIANT
VOLTAGE RATING:
■ 600 Volt (MIL), 150 Volt (UL, CSA)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
■ Conductor: Stranded Tinned Copper
AVAILABILITY
■ 100 ft (30,5m), 1000 ft (305m) put-ups
Web Site: www.alphawire.com Toll Free: 1-800-52 ALPHA • Telephone: 908-925-8000 • Fax: 908-925-6923
Email: info@alphawire.com Europe/UK Telephone: +44 (0) 1932 772422 • Europe/UK Fax: +44 (0) 1932 772433
Detailed Specifications & Technical Data
ENGLISH MEASUREMENT VERSION
1-800-Belden1
Description:
23 AWG Bonded-Pairs solid bare copper conductors, FEP insulation, sunlight- oil- and gas-resistant FEP
jacket. Sequential marking at two foot intervals.
Usage (Overall)
Suitable Applications: Industrial Ethernet Cable, Harsh Environments, 350MHz Enhanced Category 6,
Gigabit Ethernet, 100BaseTX, 100BaseVG ANYLAN, 155ATM, 622ATM,
NTSC/PAL Component or Composite Video, AES/EBU Digital Audio, AES51,
RS-422, RJ-45 Compatible, High and Low Temperature, Oil and Gasoline
Exposure, Limited Combustible FHC 25/50
Insulation
Insulation Material:
Insulation Material
FEP - Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene
Outer Shield
Outer Shield Material:
Outer Shield Material
Unshielded
Outer Jacket
Outer Jacket Material:
Outer Jacket Material
FEP - Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene
Overall Cabling
Overall Cabling Fillers: Rod Center Member
Pair
Pair Color Code Chart:
Number Color
1 White/Blue Stripe & Blue
2 White/Orange Stripe & Orange
3 White/Green Stripe & Green
4 White/Brown Stripe & Brown
Page 1 of 4 03-16-2009
Detailed Specifications & Technical Data
ENGLISH MEASUREMENT VERSION
Flame Test
UL Flame Test: UL723 (NFPA 255), NFPA 262
Suitability
Oil Resistance: Yes
Plenum/Non-Plenum
Plenum (Y/N): Yes
Page 2 of 4 03-16-2009
Detailed Specifications & Technical Data
ENGLISH MEASUREMENT VERSION
Notes (Overall)
Notes: US Patents 5, 606, 151& 5, 573, 126. Operating temperatures subject to length de-rating.
All sales of Belden products are subject to Belden's standard terms and conditions of sale.
Belden believes this product to be in compliance with EU RoHS (Directive 2002/95/EC, 27-Jan-2003). Material manufactured prior to the
compliance date may be in stock at Belden facilities and in our Distributor’s inventory. The information provided in this Product Disclosure, and
the identification of materials listed as reportable or restricted within the Product Disclosure, is correct to the best of Belden’s knowledge,
information, and belief at the date of its publication. The information provided in this Product Disclosure is designed only as a general guide
for the safe handling, storage, and any other operation of the product itself or the one that it becomes a part of. This Product Disclosure is not
to be considered a warranty or quality specification. Regulatory information is for guidance purposes only. Product users are responsible for
determining the applicability of legislation and regulations based on their individual usage of the product.
Page 3 of 4 03-16-2009
Detailed Specifications & Technical Data
ENGLISH MEASUREMENT VERSION
Page 4 of 4 03-16-2009
5 digit Loop-powered Panel meters
with Loop-powered Backlight
• 4-20 mA Input
• 5 Digit LCD, 0.6” (15.2 mm) High
• FM Type 4X, IP65 Front
• Shallow Depth Case 3.2” Behind Panel
• 2 V Drop (5.7 V with Backlight)
• Loop-Powered Backlight Standard
• Custom Engineering Units & Bargraph
• Linear, Square Root, or Programmable Exponent
• Maximum & Minimum Display
• Operating Temperature Range -30 to 65°C
• Intrinsically Safe & Non-Incendive
• HART Protocol Transparent
• Trend Arrow
• 5 Digits, 0.6” High
• Bargraph
• Engineering Notation
• Custom Engineering Units
• Backlight is Standard
4-20 mA
Power Transmitter
Supply
4-20 mA output
Wiring without Backlight
S+ S- B+ B-
4-20 mA
Power Transmitter
Supply
2
Model PD683 & PD688 loop-powered panel meters
f unc t +
I.S. GROUND
Press Enter/Ack to Access -
contr Menu or to Accept Setting
<1 ohm to Ground
Transmitter
Press Up to Scroll Menu and
to Increment Digit Value
f l t er
Press Right to Select Next Digit
Optional enclosures
bypas Press Menu to Exit at any Time
NEMA 4X enclosures
(45mm)
0.59"
(15mm)
3.2"
(81mm)
4.68"
(119mm)
Go to
www.predig.com
Notes: for complete details
1. Panel cutout required: 3.622 x 1.772 (92 x 45)
2 Panel thickness: 0.040 – 0.250 (1.0 – 6.4)
3. Mounting brackets lock in place for easy mounting
3
Model PD683 & PD688 loop-powered panel meters
SPECIFICATIONS Input
Except where noted all specifications apply to operation at +25°C. Input Range: 4-20 mA
Accuracy: ±0.03% of span ±1 count, square root and
General programmable exponent: 10-100% FS.
Display: 5 digit LCD (-99999 to 99999), 0.60" (15.2 mm) high, Calibration: Scale without signal or calibrate with signal source
7-segment, automatic lead zero blanking. Calibration Range: User programmable over entire range of meter
Engineering Units: 0.25" (6.4 mm) high, 14-segment Minimum Span: 0.40 mA between input 1 and input 2
Bargraph: 20-segment, 0-100% indication Note: An Error message will appear if input 1 and input 2 signals are too close together.
Trend Arrows: Up and down trend indication Input Overload: Over current protection to 2 A maximum
Backlight: Bright orange LED (intensity varies with signal) Decimal Point: Up to 4 places (d.dddd, dd.ddd, ddd.dd, dddd.d, or ddddd)
Front Panel: FM Type 4X, IP65; panel gasket provided Function: Linear, square root, or programmable exponent
Display Update Rate: 2.5/second Low-Flow Cutoff: -99999 to 99999 (-99999 disables cutoff function)
Overrange: Display flashes 99999 Temperature Drift: 50 PPM/°C from -40 to 65°C ambient
Underrange: Display flashes -99999
Programming Method: Four front panel buttons PD688 Approvals for Hazardous Locations
Noise Filter: Programmable from 1 to 199 FM Approved & CSA Certified as intrinsically safe with entity for
Recalibration: Recommended at least every 12 months use in Class I, Div 1, Groups ABCD; Class II, Div 1, Groups EFG;
Max/Min Display: Max/min readings reached by the process are Class III, Div 1; Class I, Zone 0, Group IIC; T-code = T4.
stored until reset by the user or until power to the meter is turned off. Non-incendive: Suitable for use in Class I, Div 2, Groups ABCD;
Password: Programmable password restricts modification of Class II, Div 2, Groups FG; Class III, Div 2.
programmed settings. Entity Parameters: Ui: 30 V; Ii: 175 mA; Ci: 0; Li: 0; Pi: 1.0 W
Non-Volatile Memory: All programmed settings are stored in non-
Note: Installation must be performed in accordance with Control Drawing LIM688-2
volatile memory for a minimum of ten years if power is lost.
Voltage Drop: 2.0 V max w/o backlight, 5.7 V max with backlight
Equivalent Resistance: 125 Ω @ 20 mA without backlight, +
315 Ω @ 20 mA with backlight. Loop Leader TM
LDS688_D 11/06
1.8 Mounting screw torque shall not exceed 8 lb-in (0.9 Nm)
+
I.S. GROUND
Panel Mounting Gasket Removable -
Panel Connector <1 ohm to Ground
A FM Entity Approved transmitter installed per transmitter
3.622" (92mm) manufacturer's Hazardous Location Installation Drawing
Square Corners to 0.060" PD688 & PD689 Entity Parameters:
(1.5mm) Max Radius
1.772" U : 30 V; Ii : 175 mA; Ci : 0; L i : 0; Pi : 1.0 W
B Panel Cutout
(45mm)
to DIN 43700 Open Collector Output
Tolerances: HAZARDOUS AREA NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
A: +0.032 (+0.8mm)
-0.000 (-0.0mm)
Class I, Div 1, 2, Groups ABCD FM Entity Approved positive
B: +0.024 (+0.6mm) Mounting Mounting
Class II, Div 1, Groups EFG polarity single or dual-channel
-0.000 (-0.0mm) Bracket Screw
Class II, Div 2, Groups FG intrinsic safety barrier used in an
approved configuration.
Class III, Div 1, 2
2.0 FM Installation Wiring Diagram Using single
Class I, Zone 0, Group IIC
or dual channel intrinsic safety barrier
Application Notes: O+ O-
Output
2.1 Ui > Uo of single channel barrier or Vt of dual channel barrier
2.2 Ii > Io of single channel barrier or It of dual channel barrier
2.3 Pi > Po of single channel barrier or Pt of dual channel barrier
2.4 Li plus interconnecting wiring < Lo of single or dual channel barrier
+
I.S. GROUND
-
2.5 Ci plus interconnecting wiring < Co of single or dual channel barrier <1 ohm to Ground
2.6 It is not necessary to use intrinsic safety barriers when installing FM Entity Approved device installed per
the PD688/PD689 in Class I, II, III, Division 2, Groups manufacturer's Hazardous Location Installation Drawing.
ABCDFG, maximum input voltage = 30 VDC. Division 2 wiring PD688 & PD689 Entity Parameters:
Ui : 30 V; Ii : 175 mA; Ci : 0; Li : 0; Pi : 1.0 W
methods must be used when not powering from a barrier.
With Backlight
HAZARDOUS AREA NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
Class I, Div 1, 2, Groups ABCD CSA Entity Certified positive
Class II, Div 1, Groups EFG polarity single or dual-channel
Class II, Div 2, Groups FG intrinsic safety barrier used in an
approved configuration.
Class III, Div 1, 2
Class I, Zone 0, Group IIC
S+ S- B+ B-
Loop
Input
+
I.S. GROUND
-
<1 ohm to Ground
Without Backlight
HAZARDOUS AREA NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
Class I, Div 1, 2, Groups ABCD CSA Entity Certified positive
Class II, Div 1, Groups EFG polarity single or dual-channel
Class II, Div 2, Groups FG intrinsic safety barrier used in an
approved configuration.
Class III, Div 1, 2
Class I, Zone 0, Group IIC
S+ S- B+ B-
Loop
Input
+
I.S. GROUND
-
<1 ohm to Ground
+
I.S. GROUND
-
<1 ohm to Ground
BPG Range
2
SX
BPGA Range
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
3
ZAG Range
4
High Voltage
5
Fire Rated
6
ZP Range
7
Others
steel. 11 sizes are available in depths of 140 or which can be connected to the terminal
1 200mm and 8 sizes are available in depths of
140, 200 or 300mm. The majority of the range
mounting rail or component mounting plate.
Optionally, earth studs can be fitted to
can be fitted with removable gland plates on the door and gland plates. Rail mounted
any or all of the four sides. The mild steel earth terminals or proprietary earth bars can
version (MSX) is available with a number of be fitted inside the enclosure and ABTECH
paint options (most RAL colours are available) Sales staff will be happy to advise on this.
and anti-corrosion finishes. Further advice on When fitted with a standard neoprene
surface finishes can be sought from the gasket, the enclosure is suitable for ambient
ABTECH sales office. temperatures of - 40°C to + 80°C (-40°F to
+176°F). Alternatively, when fitted with an
optional silicone gasket the temperature range
is increased to - 70°C to + 130°C (-94°F to
+266°F).
8
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
SX Range
and is capable of achieving IP66 and IP67. It
has also undergone and passed the Shell/ERA
deluge test which was devised to adequately 1
test enclosures and electrical equipment which
is routinely subjected to ships deck conditions
or fire deluge systems.
BPG Range
IP68 enclosures are also available for depths
up to 120 ft to special order. Further 2
information on submersible enclosures is
available in Section 8 of this catalogue.
BPGA Range
Other applications include junction boxes, both
3
industrial and hazardous area, OEM
applications, fire protection systems, tunnel
wiring, IP68 applications, etc.
ZAG Range
A video demonstrating the main features of the
SX range is available on our website, please
4
visit www.ab-tech.co.uk/sx.htm
High Voltage
SX Range Features
5
• Wide Operating Temperature
(- 70°C to + 175°C) (-94°F to +347°F)
Fire Rated
• Ingress Protection up to IP68 6
• Fire Resistant to IEC331
The SX range has many features which lend • Impact Resistant > 10 Nm
ZP Range
rating. 8
• UL, CSA, IECEx, ATEX, FM, InMetro
The SX range is also suitable for fire resistance and GOST Approvals
applications and when fitted with ceramic
terminals meets the requirements of IEC 331 • Ideal for Petrochemical and Marine
Technical
9
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
The following table is a list of the available accessories suitable for particular standard sizes of SX
1 enclosures. Care should be taken when ordering accessories for use with enclosures intended for
hazardous areas to ensure that compliance with certification is retained.
EP – Electro-polished external
RF – RFI Protection
BD - Breather Drain
and Gland Plates
140mm Depth
200mm Depth
300mm Depth
Gland Plates
(see note 3)
(see note 4)
(see note 5)
Screws
Door
SX45 114 114 51
SX64 102 152 63
SX66 152 152 102
SX0 152 229 -
SX0.5 184 274 -
SX1 234 324 -
SX1.5 306 306 -
SX2 372 324 -
SX3 372 448 -
SX4 372 510 -
SX5 510 510 -
SX6 510 780 -
SX7 650 950 -
SX8 800 1250 -
Ordering Example;
SX1.5 300 4GP LB EB
(Stainless Steel SX1.5 300mm deep, 4 gland plates, label bracket on door and internal earthing bar)
1. The range is available either in stainless steel 316 (SX variants) or mild steel (MSX variants).
2. Manufacturing tolerances are +/- 3mm on overall dimensions and +/-0.5mm on fixing hole centres.
3. Silicone gasket increases temperature rating (-70º to +175º C) (-94°F to +347°F) and may increase working life in some applications.
4. Breather drain available in IP66 stainless steel or plastic.
5. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) gasket may reduce IP rating.
10
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
SX Range
1
BPG Range
2
BPGA Range
Full width, full height Gland Plates
(can be fitted to any or all sides)
Earth Stud fitted to door and gland plates 3
ZAG Range
4
High Voltage
5
Fire Rated
Label Bracket
(welded to door)
Electro-polished
(external surfaces on SX range only) 6
ZP Range
7
Others
8
Technical
11
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
12
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 45 / SSX 45 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
Width 114mm Maximum Number of Rows 1 Entry Size Side A-C Side B-D
Weidmuller Wago M16 4 4
Length 114mm
SAK 2.5 7 280-992 8 M20 2 2
Depth 51mm
M25 2 2
SAK 4 7 280-999 0
Mild steel M32 0 0
Material SAK 6 5 281-691 7
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 0 0
SAK 10 * 4 281-992 7
Weight 1200g SAK 16 * 3 281-993 0 Drilling Envelope
Side A-C 114 x 51mm
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 0 282-691 0
Side B-D 114 x 51mm
SAK 70 0 284-691 0
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) WDU 2.5 0 283-691 0
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 0 285-691 0
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 0 280-998 8
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
13
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
14
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 64 / SSX 64 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
Maximum Number of Rows 1 Entry Size Side A-C Side B-D
Width 102mm
Weidmuller Wago M16 6 8
Length 152mm
SAK 2.5 15 280-992 18 M20 3 4
Depth 63mm
M25 2 3
SAK 4 15 280-999 0
Mild steel M32 1 2
Material SAK 6 11 281-691 15
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 0 0
SAK 10 * 9 281-992 15
Weight 1500g SAK 16 * 0 281-993 0 Drilling Envelope
Side A-C 102 x 63mm
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 0 282-691 0
Side B-D 152 x 63mm
SAK 70 0 284-691 0
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) WDU 2.5 0 283-691 0
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 0 285-691 0
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 0 280-998 18
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
15
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
16
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 66 / SSX 66 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
Maximum Number of Rows 1 Entry Size Side A-C Side B-D
Width 152mm
Weidmuller Wago M16 14 14
Length 152mm
SAK 2.5 15 280-992 18 M20 8 8
Depth 102mm
M25 6 6
SAK 4 15 280-999 18
Mild steel M32 3 3
Material SAK 6 11 281-691 15
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 2 2
SAK 10 * 9 281-992 15
Weight 2200g SAK 16 * 7 281-993 15 Drilling Envelope
Side A-C 152 x 102mm
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 * 6 282-691 11
Side B-D 152 x 102mm
SAK 70 0 284-691 10
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) WDU 2.5 17 283-691 7
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 15 285-691 0
(silicone gasket) .
WDU 6 11 280-998 18
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
17
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
18
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 0 / SSX 0 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
(using standard gland clearances)
Width 152mm Maximum Number of Rows 1
Side A-C Side B-D
Weidmuller Wago Size
140 200 140 200
Length 229mm
SAK 2.5 21 280-992 24 M16 4 9 8 16
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 2 6 6 9
SAK 4 19 280-999 24 M25 1 4 3 6
Mild steel M32 1 2 2 4
Material SAK 6 16 281-691 20
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 1 1 2 2
SAK 10 * 12 281-992 20
140mm deep 200mm deep Drilling Envelope Size
Weight 3200g 4000g SAK 16 * 10 281-993 20 (with glandplate fitted)
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 * 7 282-691 * 15
140 200 140 200
SAK 70 * 5 284-691 * 12 Width 87 87 144 144
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) Height 75 135 75 135
WDU 2.5 25 283-691 0
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 21 285-691 0
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 16 280-998 24
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
19
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
20
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 0.5 / SSX 0.5 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
(using standard gland clearances)
Width 184mm Maximum Number of Rows 2
Side A-C Side B-D
Weidmuller Wago Size
140 200 140 200
Length 274mm
SAK 2.5 56 280-992 31 M16 6 12 10 20
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 4 9 8 12
SAK 4 52 280-999 31 M25 2 6 4 9
Mild steel M32 2 4 3 6
Material SAK 6 42 281-691 27
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 1 2 2 4
SAK 10 * 34 281-992 27
140mm deep 200mm deep Drilling Envelope Size
Weight 5000g 6000g SAK 16 * 14 281-993 27 (with glandplate fitted)
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 * 10 282-691 * 21
140 200 140 200
SAK 70 * 7 284-691 * 16 Width 119 119 189 189
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) Height 75 135 75 135
WDU 2.5 67 283-691 28
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 56 285-691 0
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 42 280-998 31
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
21
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
22
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 1 / SSX 1 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
(using standard gland clearances)
Width 234mm Maximum Number of Rows 2
Side A-C Side B-D
Weidmuller Wago Size
140 200 140 200
Length 324mm
SAK 2.5 72 280-992 41 M16 10 20 14 28
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 6 12 10 18
SAK 4 66 280-999 41 M25 3 9 5 12
Mild steel M32 2 4 4 8
Material SAK 6 54 281-691 34
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 2 2 3 6
SAK 10 * 44 281-992 34
140mm deep 200mm deep Drilling Envelope Size
Weight 6300g 7200g SAK 16 * 18 281-993 34 (with glandplate fitted)
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 * 14 282-691 27
140 200 140 200
SAK 70 * 10 284-691 * 21 Width 169 169 239 239
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) Height 75 135 75 135
WDU 2.5 86 283-691 * 18
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 72 285-691 * 12
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 54 280-998 41
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
23
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
24
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 1.5 / SSX 1.5 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
(using standard gland clearances)
Width 306mm Maximum Number of Rows 3
Side A-C Side B-D
Weidmuller Wago Size
140 200 140 200
Length 306mm
SAK 2.5 99 280-992 74 M16 14 28 12 25
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 10 18 10 16
SAK 4 93 280-999 74 M25 5 12 4 12
Mild steel M32 4 8 3 6
Material SAK 6 75 281-691 64
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 3 6 3 4
SAK 10 * 60 281-992 64
140mm 200mm 300mm Drilling Envelope Size
Weight 7.3Kg 8.8Kg 11.3Kg SAK 16 * 34 281-993 64 (with glandplate fitted)
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 * 24 282-691 48
140 200 140 200
SAK 70 * 20 284-691 * 38 Width 241 241 221 221
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) Height 75 135 75 135
WDU 2.5 118 283-691 * 32
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 99 285-691 * 11
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 75 280-998 74
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
25
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
26
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 2 / SSX 2 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
(using standard gland clearances)
Width 372mm Maximum Number of Rows 3 Side A-C Side B-D
Size
Weidmuller Wago 140 200 140 200
Length 324mm
M16 18 36 14 28
SAK 2.5 132 280-992 150
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 14 24 10 18
SAK 4 123 280-999 150 M25 6 18 6 12
Mild steel M32 5 10 4 8
Material SAK 6 99 281-691 126
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 4 8 3 6
SAK 10 78 281-992 126 Drilling Envelope Size
140mm 200mm 300mm
Weight 9.5Kg 11.3Kg 14.3Kg (with glandplate fitted)
SAK 16 66 281-993 84
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 42 282-691 99 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 24 284-691 * 78 Width 307 307 239 239
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) Height 75 135 75 135
WDU 2.5 158 283-691 * 44
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 132 285-691 * 30
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 99 280-998 150
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
27
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
28
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 3 / SSX 3 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
(using standard gland clearances)
Width 372mm Maximum Number of Rows 3 Side A-C Side B-D
Size
Weidmuller Wago 140 200 140 200
Length 448mm
M16 16 36 20 45
SAK 2.5 168 280-992 189
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 12 24 16 28
SAK 4 156 280-999 189 M25 7 15 8 21
Mild steel M32 5 10 6 12
Material SAK 6 126 281-691 162
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 4 8 5 8
SAK 10 * 102 281-992 162 Drilling Envelope Size
140mm 200mm 300mm
Weight 11.3Kg 13.3Kg 16.6Kg (with glandplate fitted)
SAK 16 * 84 281-993 108
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 * 63 282-691 126 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 * 45 284-691 * 99 Width 307 307 363 363
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) Height 75 135 75 135
Temperature WDU 2.5 201 283-691 * 56
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 168 285-691 * 38
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 126 280-998 189
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
29
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
30
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 4 / SSX 4 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
(using standard gland clearances)
Width 372mm Maximum Number of Rows 3 Side A-C Side B-D
Size
Weidmuller Wago 140 200 140 200
Length 510mm
M16 18 36 26 52
SAK 2.5 198 280-992 222
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 14 24 20 36
SAK 4 183 280-999 222 M25 6 18 10 24
Mild steel M32 5 10 7 14
Material SAK 6 150 281-691 189
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 4 8 6 10
SAK 10 120 281-992 189 Drilling Envelope Size
140mm 200mm 300mm
Weight 12.7Kg 14.8Kg 18.3Kg (with glandplate fitted)
SAK 16 99 281-993 126
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 75 282-691 147 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 54 284-691 117 Width 307 307 425 425
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) Height 75 135 75 135
WDU 2.5 237 283-691 66
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 198 285-691 44
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 150 280-998 222
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
31
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
32
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 5 / SSX 5 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
(using standard gland clearances)
Width 510mm Maximum Number of Rows 4 Side A-C Side B-D
Size
Weidmuller Wago 140 200 140 200
Length 510mm
M16 26 55 26 52
SAK 2.5 264 280-992 296
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 20 36 20 36
SAK 4 244 280-999 296 M25 10 27 10 24
Mild steel M32 7 14 7 14
Material SAK 6 200 281-691 252
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 6 12 6 10
SAK 10 160 281-992 252 Drilling Envelope Size
140mm 200mm 300mm
Weight 17.0Kg 20.0Kg 25.0Kg (with glandplate fitted)
SAK 16 132 281-993 189
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 100 282-691 196 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 72 284-691 156 Width 445 445 425 425
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) Height 75 135 75 135
WDU 2.5 316 283-691 99
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 264 285-691 66
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 200 280-998 296
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
33
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
34
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 6 / SSX 6 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
(using standard gland clearances)
Width 510mm Maximum Number of Rows 4 Side A-C Side B-D
Size
Weidmuller Wago 140 200 140 200
Length 780mm
M16 26 55 42 85
SAK 2.5 440 280-992 496
Depth 140mm or 200mm or 300mm M20 20 36 34 60
SAK 4 404 280-999 496 M25 10 27 18 42
Mild steel M32 7 14 11 22
Material SAK 6 332 281-691 424
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 6 12 10 18
SAK 10 264 281-992 424 Drilling Envelope Size
140mm 200mm 300mm
Weight 24.0Kg 27.0Kg 32.0Kg (with glandplate fitted)
SAK 16 220 281-993 318
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 168 282-691 328 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 120 284-691 264 Width 445 445 695 695
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) Height 75 135 75 135
WDU 2.5 528 283-691 165
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 440 285-691 114
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 332 280-998 496
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
35
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
36
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 7 / SSX 7 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
(using standard gland clearances)
Width 650mm Maximum Number of Rows 5 Side A-C Side B-D
Size
Weidmuller Wago 140 200 140 200
Length 950mm
M16 36 72 54 110
SAK 2.5 685 280-992 775
Depth 140mm or 200mm or 300mm M20 28 48 42 72
SAK 4 635 280-999 775 M25 14 36 22 54
Mild steel M32 10 20 14 28
Material SAK 6 520 281-691 660
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 8 16 12 24
SAK 10 415 281-992 660 Drilling Envelope Size
140mm 200mm 300mm
Weight 35.0Kg 39.0Kg 45.0Kg (with glandplate fitted)
SAK 16 345 281-993 528
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 260 282-691 510 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 150 284-691 410 Width 585 585 865 865
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) Height 75 135 75 135
WDU 2.5 822 283-691 272
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 685 285-691 188
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 520 280-998 775
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
37
1
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
38
SX Range
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 8 / SSX 8 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
(using standard gland clearances)
Width 800mm Maximum Number of Rows 5 Side A-C Side B-D
Size
Weidmuller Wago 140 200 140 200
Length 1250mm
M16 45 90 72 150
SAK 2.5 1295 280-992 775
Depth 140mm or 200mm or 300mm M20 36 60 58 100
SAK 4 635 280-999 775 M25 18 45 30 72
Mild steel M32 12 24 20 40
Material SAK 6 520 281-691 660
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 10 20 17 32
SAK 10 415 281-992 660 Drilling Envelope Size
140mm 200mm 300mm
Weight 40.0Kg 52.0Kg 72.0Kg (with glandplate fitted)
SAK 16 345 281-993 528
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 260 282-691 510 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 150 284-691 410 Width 735 735 1165 1165
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) Height 75 135 75 135
WDU 2.5 1554 283-691 272
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 1295 285-691 188
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 520 280-998 775
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
39
1
SX
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
SX Range
40
www.intertec.info
I N T E RT E C I n s t r u m e n t a t i o n - S a r n i a , O n t a r i o - H o u s t o n , Te x a s - P h o n e : 1 - 8 8 8 - 8 7 5 - 8 7 5 6
www.intertec.info
min. 1”/
30 mm
7.2 vertical
The brackets and mounting bolts illustrated above are
included with the heater.
TS
min.1”/
30 mm
8 Electric Wiring
L1
N
PE
Ex
Junction
Box
bu bu bn bu ye/gn
TS ϑ> PA
ϑ>
The MB or MW mounting brackets can be ordered
VARITHERM as options.
bu=blue bn=brown ye/gn=yellow/green bk=black gy=grey
I N T E RT E C I n s t r u m e n t a t i o n - S a r n i a , O n t a r i o - H o u s t o n , Te x a s - P h o n e : 1 - 8 8 8 - 8 7 5 - 8 7 5 6
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Vibratone ® Horns
Model 350WB
Operating Decibels @
Model Voltage Current 10' 1m
350WB 120VAC 50/60Hz 0.18 amps 100 110
350WB 240VAC 50/60Hz 0.09 amps 100 110
Gross Automation, 1725 South Johnson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53146, 262-446-0000, www.federalsignalsales.com
VIBRATONE ® HORN (350WB)
3
/4” Conduit Entrance
1
/2” Conduit Entrance
3
/4” Conduit Entrance
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S HOW TO ORDER
Operating Temperature: -65°F to 150°F -54°C to 66°C • Specify model and voltage
Net Weight: 2.7 lbs. 1.2 kg • Please refer to Model Number Index
Shipping Weight: 2.8 lbs. 1.2 kg 350WB beginning on page 378
Height: 5.3" 115 mm
Width: 5.3" 115 mm
Depth: 3.66" 92.9 mm
R E P L A C E M E N T PA RT S
Description Part Number
Coil (120VAC only) KFC1516C
Volume Control Kit K8435663B
2645 Federal Signal Dr., University Park, IL 60466 Tel: 708.534.4756 Fax: 708.534.4852 www.federalsignal-indust.com 117
Gross Automation, 1725 South Johnson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53146, 262-446-0000, www.federalsignalsales.com
n CSA - Class I Div. 2 - Groups A, B, C, & D
n CSA - Class I Zone 2 - Groups IIA, IIB & IIC
n CSA - Class II Div. 2 - Groups F & G
n CSA - Class III
n CSA - Type 4
n Enclosed & Gasketed
AC-Exacta
Incandescent, HPS & Compact Fluorescent
Fixtures
Features:
n Heavy duty cast aluminum, polyester powder coated housing.
n Two models to choose from, enclosed & gasketed or hazardous area watertight.
n Three light sources - incandescent (150 watt max.), compact fluorescent (32 watt max.) or
high pressure sodium (35 or 50 watt).
n Standard models with glass or polycarbonate globe (prismatic and colored globes available).
n Three mounting styles: pendant, ceiling and wall (½” npt. hubs standard).
n Optional cast aluminum guard or polymeric guard for use with glass globes.
n Optional stainless steel wire guard for use with polycarbonate globes.
n Optional polycarbonate prismatic reflector for architectural applications.
n Silicone gasket for high temperature and corrosive areas.
Applications:
n Chemical plants n Oil drilling rigs
n Mining applications n Walk-in coolers
n Marine facilities n Security lighting
n Tunnels & walkways n Architectural lighting applications
Page 91
AC-Exacta
Catalog Number Logic
ACE H - 15I - 1 GC G CI - X
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Page 92
AC-Exacta
Ordering Guide
Lamp Lamp Hazardous Vapor Shipping Shipping
Mounting
Type Watts Location * Proof * Weight Volume
3
Incandescent 150 ACE H-15I-1GC G P1 ACE V-15I-1GC G P1 3.7 lbs.(1.65kg.) 0.5ft
Notes: * All fixtures shown are with ½” npt. hubs. If ¾” npt. hubs are required, change suffix “1” to “2”.
1. All fixtures shown are 120 Volt, 60 Hz. For other voltages see Catalog Number Logic.
2. All fixtures shown have standard glass globes. If polycarbonate globe is required, replace “GC” with “PC”.
See Catalog Number Logic for standard or colored globes.
3. Wall mounted fixtures are shown with outlet box. If outlet box is not required, replace the suffix “W1” with “WB”.
4. If stainless steel wire guard is required, change “G” to “GW” and add .5 lbs. (0.23 kg.) to shipping weight.
5. If polymeric guard is required, change “G” to “GP” and deduct .78 lbs. (0.36 kg.) from shipping weight.
Page 93
AC-Exacta
Dimensions
PENDANT MOUNT CEILING MOUNT WALL MOUNT
C C C
C C D
C D
D
B
A
AB
MOUNT BA
B A B
BA A
* For colored globes change the suffix “C” to the color required; ie “R” for red.
** Reflectors cannot be used with wall mount models.
Page 94
Moxa Industrial Media Converter
IMC-101 Hardware Installation Guide
P/N: 18020010104
Overview
Moxa Industrial Media Converter, which is specially designed for reliable and
stable operation in harsh industrial environments, provides industrial grade
media conversion between 10/100BaseT(X) and 100BaseFX. IMC-101’s
reliable industrial design is excellent for keeping your industrial automation
applications running continuously, and comes with a relay output warning
alarm to help prevent damages and losses.
This product has a wide operating temperature range, from -40 to 75°C, and is
designed to withstand a high degree of vibration and shock. The rugged
hardware design makes IMC-101 perfect for ensuring that your Ethernet
equipment can withstand critical industrial applications, such as in hazardous
locations (Class 1 Division 2/Zone 2), and complies with FCC, TÜV, UL, and
CE Standards
Package Checklist
Moxa Industrial Media Converter is shipped with the following items. If any of
these items is missing or damaged, please contact your customer service
representative for assistance.
y Moxa Industrial Media Converter
y Hardware Installation Guide
y Moxa Product Warranty booklet
Features
y Supports 10/100Base-TX auto-negotiation and auto-MDI/MDI-X
y Multi mode, single mode with SC or ST fiber connector available
y Supports Link Fault Pass-Through
y Relay Output alarm when a port breaks or the power fails
y Redundant 12 to 48 VDC power inputs, DIN-Rail or panel mountable
y Operating temperature range from 0 to 60°C, or extended operating
temperature from –40 to 75°C for (-T) models
2
Panel Layout of IMC-101 Series
Top Panel View
1. Grounding screw
1 V2+
PWR2
2. Terminal block for power
V2-
2 V1+
FAULT
PWR1
input PWR1/PWR2 and relay
V1-
V1 V2 INPUTS: 24 VDC
3 output
3. Heat dissipation orifices
PORT ALARM
4 4. Dip switch
ON
1
2
DIP
3
5. Power input PWR1 LED
Front Panel View (IMC-101-M-ST) 6. Power input PWR2 LED
2 7. Fault LED
5 8. 100BaseFX (ST connector)
6
7 Port
9. FX port’s 100 Mbps LED
8 10. FX port’s Full
9
10 FDX /CO L
Duplex/Collision LED
11. TP port’s 100 Mbps LED
12. 10/100BaseT(X)
11
12 13. TP port’s 10 Mbps LED
14 13 14. Model Name
15. 100BaseFX (SC connector)
Front Panel View (IMC-101-M-SC)
Port
2
5 16. Screw hole for wall mounting kit
6 17. DIN-Rail mounting kit
7
15
9
10 FDX /CO L
11
12
14 13
16
17
16
3
Mounting Dimensions
(Unit = mm)
15.10
30.00
13.10 25.40
9.50 54.00
135.00 135.00
46.77
+ +
+ +
+ + + +
23.15 +
+ +
+
30.50
10.65 10.65
4
DIN-Rail Mounting
The aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate should be fixed to the back panel of
IMC when you take it out of the box. If you need to reattach the DIN-Rail
attachment plate to IMC, make sure the stiff metal spring is situated towards
the top, as shown in the figures below.
STEP 1: STEP 2:
Insert the top of the DIN-Rail into the The DIN-Rail attachment unit will
slot just below the stiff metal spring. snap into place as shown below.
metal
metal
spring
spring
DIN-Rail DIN-Rail
STEP 1:
Remove the aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate from Moxa Industrial Media
Converter, and then attach the wall mount plates, as shown in the diagrams
below.
Top
plate
Bottom
plate
5
STEP 2:
Mounting Moxa Industrial Media Converter on the wall
requires 4 screws. Use the IMC, with wall mount plates
attached, as a guide to mark the correct locations of the 4
screws. The heads of the screws should be less than 6.0
mm in diameter, and the shafts should be less than 3.5 6.0 mm
mm in diameter, as shown in the figure at the right.
NOTE Test the screw head and shank size by inserting
the screw into one of the keyhole shaped
apertures of the Wall Mounting Plates, before it 3.5 mm
is screwed into the wall.
STEP 3:
Once the screws are fixed in the wall, insert the four screw heads through the
large parts of the keyhole-shaped apertures, and then slide Moxa Industrial
Media Converter downwards, as indicated below. Tighten the four screws for
added stability.
Wiring Requirements
WARNING Do not disconnect modules or wires unless power has been
switched off or the area is known to be non hazardous.
The devices may only be connected to the supply voltage shown
on the type plate.
The devices are designed for operation with a safety extra-low
voltage. Thus, they may only be connected to the supply voltage
connections and to the signal contact with the safety extra-low
voltages (SELV) in compliance with IEC950/ EN60950/
VDE0805.
6
WARNING This equipment has been evaluated as EEx nC IIC T4
equipment under DEMKO Certificate No. 03 ATEX
0324537U. Each module is marked with II 3G and is
suitable for use in Zone 2 Explosive Atmospheres. Devices
must be installed in a minimum IP 54 enclosure as defined in
IEC 60529 and EN 60529.
7
ATTENTION This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded
mounting surface such as a metal panel.
ATTENTION
Before connecting IMC to the DC power inputs, make sure the DC
power source voltage is stable.
8
Communication Connections
IMC-101 models have one 10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet port, and one 100BaseFX
(SC or ST type connector) fiber port.
RJ45 (8-pin, MDI) Port Pinouts RJ45 (8-pin, MDI-X) Port Pinouts
Straight-Through Cable
Switch Port NIC Port
RJ45 Plug Pin 1
RJ45 RJ45
Connector Cable Wiring Connector
Tx+ 3 3 Rx+
Tx- 6 6 Rx-
Rx+ 1 1 Tx+
Rx- 2 2 Tx-
9
SC-Port Pinouts SC-Port to SC-Port Cable Wiring
A A
Tx
B B
Cable Wiring
Rx A A
B B
Tx
B B
Cable Wiring
A A
Rx
B B
ATTENTION
This is a Class 1 Laser/LED product. Do not stare into the Laser
Beam.
Alarm Contact
Moxa Industrial Media Converter has one Alarm Contact located on the top panel.
For detailed instructions on how to connect the Alarm Contact power wires to the
two middle contacts of the 6-contact terminal block connector, see the “Wiring the
Alarm Contact” section above. A typical scenario would be to connect the Fault
circuit to a warning light located in the control room. The light can be set up to
switch on when a fault is detected.
The Alarm Contact has two terminals that form a Fault circuit for connecting to an
alarm system. The two wires attached to the Fault contacts form an open circuit
when (1) IMC has lost power from one of the DC power inputs, or (2) one of the
ports for which the corresponding PORT ALARM Dip Switch is set to ON is not
properly connected.
If neither of these two conditions occurs, the Fault circuit will be closed.
10
Dip Switch Setting
IMC-101 series DIP switch
Dip Switch 1 (Default: Off )
ON: Enables the PORT Alarm. If the port’s link fails, the
relay will form an open circuit and the fault LED will
light up.
ON DIP Off: Disables the corresponding PORT Alarm. The relay will
form a closed circuit and the Fault LED will never light
up.
1 2 3 Dip Switch 2 (Default: ON )
ON: Enables full duplex for 100BaseFX
Off: Disables full duplex for 100BaseFX
Dip Switch 3
Reserved for future use
To activate the updated DIP switch setting, power off and then power on the
IMC.
LED Indicators
The front panel of Moxa Industrial Media Converter contains several LED
indicators. The function of each LED is described in the table below.
LED Color State Description
Power is being supplied to power
On
input PWR1
PWR1 AMBER
Power is not being supplied to
Off power input PWR1
11
On FX port’s 100 Mbps is active
100M Data is being transmitted at 100
GREEN Blinking
(FX) Mbps
Off 100BaseFX port is inactive
12
Specifications
Technology
Standards IEEE802.3, 802.3u, Link Fault Pass-Through
Interface
RJ45 ports 10/100BaseT(X)
Fiber ports 100BaseFX (SC, ST connectors available)
LED Indicators Power, Fault, 10/100M, Full Duplex/Collision,
Dip Switch Port break alarm mask, 100BaseFx Full/Half duplex
selection
Alarm Contact One relay output with current carrying capacity of
1A @ 24 VDC
Optical Fiber
Multi Single Single Single
mode mode, 15 mode, 40 mode, 80
Distance, km 5 15 40 80
Wavelength, nm 1310 1310 1310 1550
Min. TX Output, dBm -20 -15 -5 -5
Max. TX Output, dBm -14 -6 0 0
Sensitivity, dBm -34 to -30 -36 to -32 -36 to -32 -36 to -32
Recommended Diameter 62.5/125 9/125 9/125 9/125
(Core/Cladding) μm (1 dB/km,
800 MHz × km)
Power
Input Voltage 12 to 48 VDC; Redundant inputs
Input Current (@24V) 0.16 A
Connection Removable Terminal Block
Overload Current Protection 1.1 A
Reverse Polarity Protection Present
Mechanical
Casing IP30 protection, aluminum case
Dimensions (W x H x D) 53.6 x 135 x 105 mm
Weight 0.63 kg
Installation DIN-Rail, Wall Mounting
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0 to 60℃ (32 to 140 oF),
-40 to 75oC (-40 to 167oF) for – T models
Storage Temperature -40 to 85℃ (-40 to 185 oF)
Ambient Relative Humidity 5 to 90% (non-condensing)
Regulatory Approvals
Safety UL60950, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 60950, EN60950
Hazardous Location UL/cUL Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D
ATEX Class I, Zone 2, EEx nC IIC
EMI FCC Part 15, CISPR (EN55022) class A
EMS EN61000-4-2 (ESD), level 3
EN61000-4-3 (RS), level 3
EN61000-4-4 (EFT), level 3
EN61000-4-5 (Surge), level 3
EN61000-4-2 (CS), level 3
Shock IEC 60068-2-27
Free Fall IEC 60068-2-32
Vibration IEC 60068-2-6
WARRANTY 5 years
13
Revision History
Document Edition Revision Date Revision Details
2nd June 15, 2004 1. Updated the edition of this
manual on the title page.
2. Changed the Moxa logo on the
title page.
3. Added several “Attention”
messages
4. Added one product feature:
Operating temperature ranges
from 0 to 60°C, or extended
operting temperature from –40 to
75°C for (-T) models.
3rd July 1, 2004 1. Revise 100BaseFX for fiber optic
port of ST connector.
4th Nov. 15, 2004 1. Modify Optical Fiber specs.
2. Improve resolution of figures.
14
Extract from the online
catalog
USLKG 5
Order No.: 0441504
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=0441504
Ground terminal block with screw connection, cross section: 0.2 - 4
mm², AWG: 24 - 10, width: 6.2 mm, color: Green-yellow
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
Commercial data 01/15/2005
EAN 4017918002190
Pack 50 Pcs.
Customs tariff 85369010
Weight/Piece 0.02081 KG
Catalog page information Page 281 (CL-2007) http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data
General
Note When aligning with a feed-through terminal block with the same
shape, an end cover must be interposed with insulation voltages
of > 690 V
Number of levels 1
Number of connections 2
Color green-yellow
Insulating material PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 V0
Dimensions
Width 6.2 mm
Length 42.5 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 47 mm
Height NS 35/15 54.5 mm
Height NS 32 52 mm
Technical data
Rated surge voltage 8 kV
Pollution degree 3
Surge voltage category III
Insulating material group I
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-2
Open side panel nein
Connection data
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm
2
min.
max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 0.5 mm
2
Certificates / Approvals
Certification ABS, BV, CCA, CSA, CUL, DNV, GOST, KEMA, KR, LR, PRS,
RS, UL
CSA
AWG/kcmil 28-10
CUL
AWG/kcmil 26-10
UL
AWG/kcmil 26-10
Address
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3001501
Universal terminal block with screw connection, cross section: 0,2- 2.5
mm², AWG: 24- 12, width: 5.2 mm, color: Gray
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
Commercial data 01/01/2003
EAN 4017918089955
Pack 50 Pcs.
Customs tariff 85369010
Weight/Piece 0.00772 KG
Catalog page information Page 277 (CL-2007) http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data
General
Number of levels 1
Number of connections 2
Color gray
Insulating material PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 V2
Dimensions
Width 5.2 mm
Length 42.5 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 47 mm
Height NS 35/15 54.5 mm
Height NS 32 52 mm
Technical data
Maximum load current 2
32 A (with 4 mm conductor cross section)
Rated surge voltage 8 kV
Pollution degree 3
Surge voltage category III
Insulating material group I
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-1
Nominal current IN 32 A
Nominal voltage UN 800 V
Open side panel ja
Connection data
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm
2
min.
max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 0.5 mm
2
Certificates / Approvals
Certification ABS, BV, CCA, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, GOST, KEMA, KR, LR, NK,
PRS, RS, UL
CSA
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 20 A
AWG/kcmil 28-12
CUL
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 20 A
AWG/kcmil 28-12
UL
Nominal voltage UN 600 V
Nominal current IN 20 A
AWG/kcmil 28-12
Address
DATA SHEET
Type: USLKG 3
Part-No.: 0441083
Please note the "General usage regulations for technical data sheets".
Description
Ground terminal block with screw connection. Foot part for contact on rail (busbar) NS 32 acc. to
EN 50035:1978 or NS 35 acc. to EN 50022:1977 (except NS 35/15-2,3).
Rated data
Technical data
- AWG: 24 up to 12
Multi-wire connection
(2 conductors of the same cross-section)
- rigid (solid or stranded): 0,2 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2
- flexible: 0,2 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2
- flexible with ferrule: 0,25 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2
(without plastic sleeve)
Stripping length: 8 mm
* When mounting next to an opened housing of a feed through modular terminal block of the same type and size it must
be closed with an end cover, if the insulation voltage is expected to exceed >690 V.
Technical data
(with UK 3)
Basic requirements
- rated impulse withstand voltage: 8 kV
- pollution degree: 3
- installation category: III
- insulating material group: I/CTI 600
- supply system: unearthed
Minimum clearance: 8 mm
(case A, inhomogeneous field)
Shortest clearance
- versus neighboured terminal block: 10,3 mm with end cover
8,5 mm without end cover
Technical data
Technical data
Voltage drop
(I = 2,4 A/A = 2,5 mm2)
- terminal/terminal (£3,2 mV): 1,2 mV
- terminal block/mounting surface (£6,4 mV): 2 mV
Additional tests
(with UK 3)
Material specifications
Metal parts
- live parts: copper alloy
- surface plating: nickel plated
Material specifications
Insulating material
Colour: green/yellow
- Burning behaviour
UL 94: V0
Enclosure: Portrait
PHOENIX CONTACT
DEN-Laboratory
Portrait
Dimensions
D A T A S H E E T
Type: UK 3 N
Part-No.: 3001501
Please note the "General usage regulations for technical data sheets".
Description
Rated data
Rated current: 24 A
Technical data
- AWG: 24 up to 12
Multi-wire connection
(2 conductors of the same cross-section)
- rigid (solid or stranded): 0,2 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2
- flexible: 0,2 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2
- flexible with ferrule: 0,25 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2
(without plastic sleeve)
Stripping length: 8 mm
Technical data
Basic requirements
- rated impulse withstand voltage: 8 kV
- pollution degree: 3
- installation category: III
- insulating material group: I
- supply system: unearthed
Minimum clearance: 8 mm
(case A, inhomogeneous field)
Shortest clearance
- between adjacent terminal blocks: 12,5 mm
- between terminal block and rail NS 32: 15,7 mm
- between terminal block and rail NS 35: 12,5 mm
Technical data
Additional tests
Material specifications
Metal parts
- live parts: copper alloy
- surface plating: tin plated
Material specifications
Insulating material
Colour: grey
blue
- Resistance to tracking (DIN IEC 60112/VDE 0303 part 1): CTI 600
- Burning behaviour
UL 94: V2
Enclosure: Portrait
PHOENIX CONTACT
EV-FEA
Portrait
Dimensions
Industrial Computers
WOLVERINE
Industrial Computer
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages,
currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this
equipment or may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to
equipment, a Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein,
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no
obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
Related Publications
MAN00055 Rev. E v
Contents
DRW00245 .......................................................................................................................................B-4
The Wolverine industrial computers are high performance workstations designed primarily for use
in Hazardous Location and Harsh Environment running on Windows 2000® or XP® operating
systems.
Each member of the Wolverine industrial computer family is a fully self-contained PC-compatible
computer with a built-in flat screen display and resistive touch screen. The unit is housed in a
rugged metal case to protect the system against dust, water, and damage.
Wolverine industrial computers are available as either 24VDC units that accept a range of 18–30
VDC, or as 120/220VAC units that accept a range of 100-240 VAC.
Wolverine computers can be ordered with a heater option for extended temperature operation and a
front keypad overlay.
The unit is supplied completely assembled and requires only mounting and connecting.
Figure 1.1
Standard Wolverine
Figure 1.2
1-2 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
1
Feature Summary
When you purchase a Wolverine, you receive:
• Industrial computer with the operating system software installed.
• Installation hardware
• Microsoft Windows documentation, software distribution, Certificate of Authenticity and
license agreement
Standard Features
Feature Description
Operating Systems: Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Embedded XP
CPU Pentium-M processor 1.6GHz
Cache 1MB L2
Two PCMCIA Slots 16 bit PC Cards
Hard disk 40GB (minimum)
RAM 512MB, DDR266 installed by factory.
Display 15.0” Color Active Matrix TFT –XGA 1024 x 768 resolution
Touch Screen Resistive
Parallel port LPT1
Serial ports Com1 (RS232), Com2 (RS232/485)
USB ports Two USB 2.0,
Communications 10/100 Ethernet (RJ-45)
Keyboard port PS/2
Mouse port PS/2
PC/104 connector Populated by PCMCIA PC/104 adapter
Panel dimming I/O Plate Dimming knob (Standard Wolverine only)
Front Keypad Dimming buttons (Wolverine with heater option
only)
ATX Switch Momentary push button
VGA Port External VGA Port (Wolverine with heater option only)
Optional Features
The following features are optional. Contact your GE Fanuc sales representative for details.
• Additional DDR (DIMMs) (Maximum upgrade to: 2GB)
• Higher/Lower speed CPU
• Enhanced option for Transflective Daylight readable TFT.
• Compact Flash Drive (Note: Refer to Appendix B for important Shock and Vibration
specifications)
• RS 422/485 (Bios selectable - Com2 only)
• Two Additional RS232 Ports (Com3, Com4)
• Remote Dimmer cable (Standard Wolverine only)
• Battery backup – 20 minutes (Only available on DC units without heater option)
• Mounting – VESA, Panel Mount, Yoke
• NEMA4 external connections (Gland Plate used to achieve NEMA 4 & Hazardous Location
approvals)
• Wireless Ethernet - 802.11b
• 4-20mA Data Input (Standard Wolverine only)
• Horn Output
• 2nd 10/100 Ethernet Port (RJ-45)
• Heater Option (not available on Standard Wolverine)
The back I/O plate on the Standard Wolverine units provide access to three serial ports, one printer
port, one PS/2 keyboard, one PS/2 mouse, two USB 2.0 ports, two Ethernet RJ45 ports, Dimming
POT, Remote POT connector, ATX power button, input power terminal block, fuse, and horn
output terminal block.
The back I/O plate on the Wolverine units with heater option provide access to four serial ports,
one printer port, one PS/2 keyboard, one PS/2 mouse, two USB 2.0 ports, two Ethernet RJ45 ports,
input power terminal block, fuse, horn output terminal block, and VGA port. Figures 1.2 and 1.3
indicate I/O Plates used on Wolverine units.
1-4 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
1
Gland Plate
Figures 1.5 and 1.6 indicate Gland Plates used on Wolverine units.
All cabling will access the back I/O plate through a gland plate.
Note
Modification of Gland Plate invalidates the Type 4/4X enclosure rating.
Two NEMA4 keyboard and mouse connectors, the ATX switch, and 4 glands are available on the
standard gland plate shown in Figure 1.5.
Figure 1.5
1-6 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
1
Two NEMA4 keyboard and mouse connectors, the ATX switch, one gland, one NEMA4 USB
connector, and one Data Input connector are available on the optional gland plate shown in Figure
1.6.
Figure 1.6
Power Input
The input power consists of a three terminal power block. For DC-powered Wolverines, the
terminal denoted by the (+) sign is for the +24V, the (-) terminal is for the return of the power
supply, and the ground symbol denotes case ground. For AC-powered Wolverines, the terminal
denoted by the character “L” is for line voltage, the “N” terminal is for the neutral AC return, and
“G” denotes case ground.
The “ATX” switch near the terminal block powers on the unit when depressed. This switch tells
the motherboard to turn on the main power supply. Depressing the switch for 4 seconds shuts
down the unit. The “ATX” switch on the gland plate provides the same functions. Best practice is
for the operating system to power down the unit. Note: The “ATX” switch for Wolverine units
with heater option is located on the front keypad overlay.
Standard I/O
The Wolverine industrial computer provides the following I/O interface channels:
• 4 RS-232 serial ports. The user may request for the optional 422/485 port in place of RS232
for COM2. COM ports are accessible from the back I/O plate. Resources for COM3 and
COM4 are used by PC/104 boards such as the wireless Ethernet and A/D cards used in
Wolverines having wireless Ethernet or 4-20mA Data Input option; so, COM3 and COM4 are
not available to the user when the wireless Ethernet or 4-20mA Data Input option is ordered.
Com 4 consumes the cutout normally reserved for Remote pot/Gland ATX switch. Remote
pot/Gland ATX switch is not available when COM 4 is ordered.
• One enhanced parallel port. LPT1 is located on the back I/O plate.
• Two USB 2.0 Ports are accessible through the back I/O plate.
• VGA port is accessible through the back I/O plate. (Wolverine with heater option only)
Network Interface
The Wolverine includes an auto-sensing 10/100 Ethernet adapter that provides a RJ-45 connector
for unshielded twisted pair cable. As an option, the Wolverine also includes 802.11b wireless
Ethernet with external antenna that is capable of data transfers up to 11 mbps. Also optional is a
2nd 10/100 Ethernet port.
Optional I/O
The Wolverine industrial computer provides the following I/O interface options:
• 802.11b wireless Ethernet with external antenna that is capable of data transfers up to 11 mbps.
• 4-20mA Data Input
• Horn Output
• External USB
• 2nd 10/100 Ethernet Port (RJ-45)
1-8 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
1
Heaters
Wolverine computers can be ordered with a heater option for extended temperature operation. AC
units are equipped with AC heaters that are powered through the AC input terminal block. DC
units are equipped with DC heaters that are powered through the DC input terminal block. Battery
backup is not available on DC units with heaters installed.
This chapter describes the procedures for the safe location and securing of the Wolverine industrial
computer. The Wolverine industrial computers have been designed to ensure simple installation of
the system.
Installation Guidelines
• This unit is designed to operate in an outdoor environment.
• The computer is furnished with four ¼ -20 mounting holes two on each side and eight ¼-20
VESA mounting holes on the back of the Heat Sink. A panel mount option is also available
(see Fig. 2.3 for cutout dimensions and mounting instructions)
• When panel mounting, insert unit through front of panel and install panel mounting clips as
shown in Figure 2.3. Torque clips from 5 to 10 in-lbs.
• The mounting method must be able to support the weight of the unit under shock and vibration
conditions for the given application.
• To insure proper operation take care not to install unit in tight confined areas, during mid day
operations when the effects of solar heating are at peak radiance, surrounding walls and
surfaces can reflect additional solar energy and cause the unit to over heat and shut down until
temperatures fall back to normal operating conditions.
• The unit must have a minimum clearance of six inches per side and back.
• The unit is available with optional pass through glands for cable connections (required to
maintain enclosure protection rating). These glands are watertight and must be tightened to
two complete turns after hand tightening to keep water out. The customer must pass the
cables through the glands and wire the associated I/O connectors to the end of these cables.
See Figures 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3 for illustrations and dimensions of Standard Wolverine units.
See Figure 2.4 for illustrations and dimensions of Wolverine units with heater option.
• (AC version) Product shall be connected to no greater than a 50 Amp branch circuit.
• The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if
mistreated. Do not disassemble, heat above 100°C (212°F) or incinerate. Dispose of
used batteries promptly. Keep away from children.
Note
• The proper method for removing power from the unit is to switch off power at the
circuit breaker.
• See the control drawing located in Appendix B for non-incendive field wiring
parameters.
2-2 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
2
Figure 2.1 Standard Wolverine unit with rear exit gland plate
Figure 2.2 Standard Wolverine unit with bottom exit gland plate
2-4 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
2
Figure 2.4 Wolverine unit with heater option - bottom exit gland plate
2-6 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
2
This chapter describes the connector layout and cabling on the Wolverine industrial computers. All
power and communication connectors are described in this section.
Communication connectors are provided from the main CPU motherboard. These connectors are
located on the back I/O plate. If the gland plate is installed, the cabling to the I/O plate will be
accessed through the glands.
• PS/2 Keyboard (back I/O plate), NEMA4 connector (gland plate)
• PS/2 Mouse port (back I/O plate), NEMA4 connector (gland plate)
• Three serial ports, COM1, COM2, COM3 (back I/O plate).
• Parallel port (back I/O plate)
• Two USB 2.0 ports (back I/O plate), one USB NEMA4 connector (optional gland plate)
• Two Ethernet 10/100 base T ports (RJ-45) (back I/O plate)
• Remote POT/PWR (back I/O plate)
• 4-20mA Data Input (back I/O plate), military connector (optional gland plate)
• Horn Output (back I/O plate)
• VGA port (back I/O plate)
Power Input
Wolverine industrial computers are available as DC-powered or AC-powered. DC-powered
Wolverines are powered by 24VDC, and will operate from 18-30VDC. AC-powered Wolverines
are powered by 120/220VAC, and will operate from 100-240VAC. The unit is powered on
through the ATX button.
The power supply input to the industrial computer uses a terminal block that shall be connected to
no greater than a 50 AMP branch circuit. Connect earth ground to the ground terminal on the
terminal block. The terminal block is rated for wire size 12-22 AWG and has a torque rating of 7
in-lb. max. To remove power from the unit, the proper method is to switch off power at the circuit
breaker.
For power supply details, refer to specifications in Appendix A. There is one user-serviceable fuse
on the back I/O plate. DC-powered Wolverines without heaters come equipped with a 5A 250V
5x20mm fuse. Suggested replacement fuse – Littelfuse 217-005. AC-powered Wolverines without
heaters come equipped with a 2A 250V 5x20mm fuse. Suggested replacement fuse – Littelfuse
215002AC-powered Wolverines with heaters come equipped with an 8A 250V 5x20mm fuse.
Suggested replacement fuse – Littelfuse 215008. DC-powered Wolverines with heaters come
equipped with a 25A 32V 3AG fuse. Suggested replacement fuse – Littelfuse 312025P.
3-2 Wolverine Industrial Computer Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
3
Battery Backup
DC-powered Wolverines may be ordered with an optional internal 24V battery to act as a battery
backup when power is interrupted to the unit. The battery backup will automatically switch to
battery power when the external DC power is removed. Battery backup will support the unit for at
least 20 minutes at full load. To prevent loss of data, it is recommended to shut the unit down if
external DC power has been removed.
The battery charging board charges the battery when the unit is powered on. A completely
discharged battery will take approximately 4-5 hours to reach its peak charge. The battery charging
board will terminate the charge after the battery has reached its peak charge.
Battery backup is not available on Wolverine DC units with heaters installed.
Figure 3.1
Battery Backup System:
Connector Layout
Caution
External devices should not be powered up when connecting to
communication ports.
3-4 Wolverine Industrial Computer Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
3
RS485 Option:
Only COM2 can be selected for RS485 through SW1 located near the bios chip. To select
RS485 set SW1 to the following:
(1) On
(2) On
(3) Off
(4) On
Pin Assignment
1 RS485 TX-
2 RS485 TX+
5 GND
3-6 Wolverine Industrial Computer Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
3
RS422 Option:
Only COM2 can be selected for RS422 through SW1 located near the bios chip. To select
RS422 set SW1 to the following:
(1) On
(2) On
(3) On
(4) On
Shielding
In order to provide higher EMC immunity and maintain CE Mark compliance, the serial cables
must be shielded.
USB Ports
The two USB ports are 2.0 compliant and are located on the back I/O plate. In order to provide
higher EMC immunity and maintain CE Mark compliance, the USB cables must be shielded.
Network Interface
An RJ-45 Ethernet connector is available on the back I/O plate for connecting standard, unshielded
twisted pair cable. In order to meet EMC Directive, EN61000-4-6 test, the included ferrite (P/N
7COI0-0102-1500) must be installed on the Ethernet cable. The cable should be wrapped 2 times
through the ferrite with location as close as possible to the Wolverine RJ-45 connector. The
Wolverine also offers 802.11b, 2.4GHz wireless with an external antenna attached to the top of the
unit. A 2nd RJ-45 Ethernet connector is also offered as an option.
3-8 Wolverine Industrial Computer Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
3
Shielding
In order to provide higher EMC immunity and maintain CE Mark compliance, the Data Input cable
must be shielded.
Horn Output
The Horn Output is available on the back I/O plate through a terminal block. The terminal block is
rated for wire size 12-22 AWG and has a torque rating of 7 in-lb. max. For DC-powered
Wolverines, the terminal denoted by the (+) sign is +VDC switched through an internal relay, the (-
) terminal is DC return. For AC-powered Wolverines, the terminal denoted by the (+) sign is AC
Line voltage switched through an internal relay; the (-) terminal is AC return. Maximum cable
length is limited to less than 3 meters.
Figure 3.6
VGA Port
The VGA port is available on the back I/O plate. The standard 15-pin D-sub connector pin out is
shown below.
Figure 3.7
3-10 Wolverine Industrial Computer Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
3
Pin Signal
1 KB Data
2 NC
3 GND
4 +5V
5 KB Clock
6 NC
NEMA4 Mouse connector:
Pin Signal
1 Mouse Data
2 NC
3 GND
4 +5V
5 Mouse Clock
6 NC
This chapter provides details of system operation. The following topics are covered:
• Setup
• System Peripherals
• External Keyboard and Mouse
• Graphic System
• Operator Interfaces
• Communications
• Heater Option
• Shutdown
Setup
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D or nonhazardous
locations only. Before you attempt to power up the system for the first time, inspect the unit for
loose or damaged components.
Before you power up your system, you may want to attach a standard PS/2-type keyboard and
mouse to the external ports on the industrial computer. Most configuration activities that you
perform on the unit can be more easily completed using a keyboard and mouse.
Explosion Hazard
Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area
is known to be nonhazardous. To ensure power has been switched off to the
unit, the main power should be removed at the circuit breaker, followed by
removal of the power cables at Wolverine’s power terminal block.
System Peripherals
Caution
Do not connect or disconnect external devices, such as a printer, keyboard,
mouse, USB, Ethernet, or 4-20mA Data Input while the unit is powered on
and the area is considered hazardous.
Do not install or remove Hard Disk Drive or PCMCIA cards while circuit is
alive. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the
equipment.
4-2 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
4
4-4 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
4
PCMCIA Slots
Wolverine industrial computers include two PCMCIA slots. These are accessible from the side
access plate (Standard Wolverine) or from the bottom access plate (Wolverine with heater option).
The Wireless Ethernet card occupies one slot. The customer can use the other slot. NOTE: The
lower slot is not available when the optional 2nd Ethernet port is selected.
Figure 4.3
Figure 4.4
Compact Flash Socket
Graphic System
The Wolverine industrial computers include a 15-inch color TFT (XGA resolution) screen. The
flat screen display has the following features:
• High Luminance (equal to or greater than 500cd/m2)
• Wide angle viewing
• A built-in back light with a long life back light tube (equal to or greater than 50,000 hrs)
• Optional Transflective technology – allows for sunlight readable viewing
Touch Screen
The Wolverine includes a Resistive touch screen on the flat panel display.
The touch screen has a resolution of 1024 x 1024 touch points (independent of screen size) and
provides an efficient and reliable method of entering information. The screen responds to the touch
of your finger with or without a glove.
The touch screen is connected internally to a USB port.
4-6 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
4
Communications
Your industrial computer has been configured with networking components that enable you to
establish new networks or connect to existing networks easily. If you intend to use Microsoft
NetBEUI, TCP/IP, or Direct Cable Connection, some minimal setup changes are required before
you can use the system for network applications. In Windows 2000 or XP systems, these settings
are changed using the Network application in the Control Panel program group.
Heater Operation
Wolverine computers may be ordered with heaters to extend the operating temperature range.
Ambient temperatures below or near 0°c will require a warm-up period before power will be
applied to the internal ATX power supply. Once power is applied to the ATX power supply the
unit will power on automatically*. The heaters will continue to operate following power-up as
needed to maintain internal temperatures above the turn-off threshold.
The HTR LED on the front keypad overlay will illuminate steady when heat is being applied. If
the HTR LED flashes then an error has been detected within the heater control system. In this case
disconnect external power. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect power. If the problem persists contact
the GE Fanuc Hotline.
*NOTE: If the BIOS power setting for ‘Power on after Power Fail’ has been changed then
pressing the ATX switch will be required to power the unit on after the warm-up period. Under
most conditions the LCD should power on in less than 30 minutes. DC units will require a longer
warm-up time if the voltage is below 24VDC.
LED Operation:
4-8 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
4
To shut down Windows 2000 or XP software, select Shut Down from the
Start menu.
It is normally not necessary to change the hardware configuration settings in the CMOS memory. If
settings become corrupted, follow the procedures here to reload the factory configuration.
1. Power down the computer, connect a keyboard and turn on the power. Enter the Setup mode
by pressing the DEL key when prompted during the computer power-up sequence. The main
BIOS setup utility screen will appear offering several options for changing settings.
2. Once in the Bios load optimized defaults – this will restore all defaults.
3. Save bios and exit.
Self-Test Diagnostics
The computer automatically performs self-test diagnostics each time it is powered up. The self-test
consists of a series of checks that verify correct performance of the computer hardware. When the
self-test is being performed, you will see the message XXXX M OK displayed on the screen, where
XXXX is a number that increases until it matches the amount of usable memory.
Write down the message and press the F1 key to continue the bootup sequence.
Troubleshooting
Power up
Symptom Possible Causes Solution
Computer does not power up. 1. Power not on. 1. Make sure that computer
2. Improper shutdown – is plugged in. Make sure
loss of power that power source is
functioning properly.
3. Unit in ‘warm-up’ mode
(Wolverine with heaters 2. Depress “ATX” button
only) HTR LED will be for 4 seconds. Depress
on Steady the button again to
power on.
4. Error within heater
control system 3. Wait for unit to finish
(Wolverine with heaters heating. LCD should
only) HTR LED will be power on after warm-up
flashing is complete. Press the
ATX switch if LCD
does not power on
automatically after
warm-up period. See
Chapter 4 – Heater
Operation for more
details.
4. Disconnect external
power. Wait 10 seconds
and reconnect power. If
the problem persists
contact the GE Fanuc
Hotline.
Display is blank. See “Display” topic in this See “Display” topic in this
Chapter Chapter
Safe Recovery Error Occurs on initial power up if the The computer will power up
message displayed. unit is accidentally turned off normally.
without first shutting down the
Windows software.
CMOS checksum error — CMOS battery failure. This battery has a lifetime of up to
Defaults loaded 10 years under normal operating
CMOS battery failed conditions. For more information,
see “CMOS Checksum Error”
message displayed.
topic in this chapter.
A screen appears just after The DEL key has been Cycle power again. The computer
powerup, or just after reset, which accidentally pressed. will power up normally.
has the title “CMOS Setup
Utility.”
The computer has reset even The CTRL-ALT-DEL keys were This should never be done, unless
though the power was not pressed twice at the same time. you are attempting to reset the
interrupted. computer.
6-2 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
6
Display
Symptom Possible Causes Solution
Characters are dim. Computer screen is in direct light. Change lighting or adjust contrast.
Dimming is turned down Adjust dimming knob to increase
brightness
Display is blank. System temperature is outside Keep unit in 0C to 50C
operating range. temperature range.
Computer is set up for invalid Reboot. Select VGA Mode
video mode.
Screen saver is active. Touch the screen.
Memory
Symptom Possible Causes Solution
Out of Memory message is System ran out of memory for the Check the memory requirements
displayed or insufficient memory application. for the application. (Refer to the
error occurs during operation. application documentation.)
Too many terminate and stay Modify the startup folder to use
resident (TSR) programs running. only those TSR applications that
are really needed.
Keyboard
Symptom Possible Causes Solution
External keyboard locks up The type of keyboard is not Use PS/2 compatible keyboard
supported.
Keyboard not plugged into Plug keyboard in. (Power down
keyboard port on the computer. computer first.)
System is busy. Press CTRL-ALT-DELETE to
view task list.
Communications
Network Communications
Symptom Possible Causes Solution
Conflicts on network. IP Address not unique. Change the IP address to a unique
address. (Contact your system
administrator if this or other
settings need to be changed.)
Identical computer name. Change computer name.
Computers cannot share computer
name on network.
6-4 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
6
Printing
Symptom Possible Causes Solution
Printer will not turn on. Cables not connected properly. Ensure that the cables are properly
Printer power cord not plugged in. connected and that the power cord
is connected to the electrical
outlet.
Printer will not print. Printer is not turned on. Turn on the printer
Printer is not online. Set the printer to online.
The device drivers for your Install the correct printer drivers
application are not installed. for your application in Windows.
Printer that is set up for a network Connect the printer to the network.
is not connected to the network.
Printer cable is too long, Replace the cable.
unshielded, or defective.
Printer is offline. Paper tray is empty. Fill the paper tray with paper. Set
printer to online.
Printer prints garbled information. Correct printer drivers not Install the correct printer driver.
installed.
Cable is not connected properly. Ensure that the printer cable is
connected properly to the
computer.
Problem specific to printer. Run a printer self-test. Refer to the
documentation provided with your
printer for instructions. If the self-
test fails, the problem is printer-
specific. The printing section of
the software documentation and in
Windows online Help may also be
helpful.
Corrective Actions
This battery has a lifetime of up to 10 years under normal operating conditions. If the battery
failed, contact the GE Fanuc Hotline.
6-6 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
Appendix Technical Data
Mechanical Specifications
Front Assembly
The Model Wolverine industrial computer provides a display screen and touch screen.
Main Chassis
The main chassis is manufactured from aluminum and houses the motherboard, which is mounted
securely in a vertical plane. The PC/104, PCMCIA add-on board plugs directly onto the
motherboard. Two access panels for the hard drive and PC cards are also located on the main
chassis.
Gland Plate
The gland plate is fixed to the main chassis so that yoke and pedestal mounting configurations have
necessary hardware to wire the unit in accordance with the National Electrical Code for Hazardous
Locations, and also to maintain the enclosure protection rating.
Note
Modification of Gland Plate invalidates the Type 4/4X enclosure rating.
Functional Specifications
CPU and Memory
Microprocessor Pentium-M processor 1.6GHz∗
User Memory 512MB, DDR266 minimum installed by factory.*
Operating System Windows 2K or XP
Hard Disk 40Gbyte minimum*, IDE standard 2.5 inch mounting
Two PCMCIA Slots 16 bit PC Cards
Compact Flash Optional
PC/104 connector Populated by PCMCIA PC/104 adapter
Display
Display Variants 15 inch Color TFT – XGA
Active Display Area 15 inch - 246 x 184.5 mm
∗
Contact your local distributor for upgrades.
A-2 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
A
Ports
Parallel Port LPT1 (back I/O plate)
Serial Ports COM1 external RS232 port (back I/O plate)
COM2 external RS232 port (back I/O plate), Optional
RS485/422
COM3 optional (no wireless Ethernet available)
COM4 optional (no wireless Ethernet available)
Keyboard Port PS/2 (back I/O plate), NEMA4 connector (optional)
Mouse Port PS/2 (back I/O plate), NEMA4 connector (optional)
USB Ports USB1 external USB port (back I/O plate)
USB2 external USB port (back I/O plate)
NEMA4 USB (gland plate) (optional)
Panel dimming Back I/O plate; Remote POT – (optional)
Front Overlay Keypad (Wolverine with heater option
only)
Data Input 4-20mA Data Input (optional)
Communication 10/100 Ethernet (RJ-45) (back I/O plate)
2nd 10/100 Ethernet (RJ-45) (back I/O plate) (optional)
VGA Port VGA port (back I/O plate) (Wolverine with heater
option only)
Agency Approvals
Description Agency Comments
Standard or
Marking
N.A. Safety for Industrial Control Certification by Underwriter's
Equipment Laboratories to UL508 standard and
equivalent CSA C22.2 No 142 -
M1987standard
N.A. Safety for Hazardous Locations Certification by Underwriter's
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Laboratories to UL1604 standard and
equivalent CSA C22.2 No 213-M1987
standard
Low Voltage Directive Self-Declaration in accordance with
European Safety for Industrial Control European Directive
Equipment
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive Certification by Competent Body in
European EMC for Industrial Control accordance with European Directive
Equipment
Note: The agency approvals listed above and on the Declaration of Conformities are believed to be accurate,
however, a product’s agency approvals should be verified by the marking on the unit itself
MAN00055 Rev. E Appendix B Product Agency Approvals, Standards, and General Specifications B-1
B
Government Regulations
U.S., Canadian, Australian and European regulations are intended to prevent equipment from
interfering with approved transmissions or with the operation of other equipment through the AC
power source.
The Wolverine has been tested and found to meet or exceed the requirements of U.S. (47 CFR 15),
Canadian (ICES-003), Australian (AS/NZS 3548), and European (EN55022) regulations for Class
A digital devices when installed in accordance with the guidelines noted in the appropriate product
section. These various regulations share commonality in content and test levels with that of CISPR
22 and based on this commonality testing to the each individual standard was deemed
inappropriate.
The FCC requires the following to be published according to FCC guidelines:
Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
his own expense.
Note
Any changes or modifications to the product or installation that are not expressly
approved by GE Fanuc Automation could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment under FCC rules
Note
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
B-2 Wolverine Industrial Computer – Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
B
General Specifications
Environmental Conditions
MAN00055 Rev. E Appendix B Product Agency Approvals, Standards, and General Specifications B-3
B
DRW00245
Hazardous (Classified) Location Non-Hazardous Location
Class I, Division 2 Groups A, B, C and D
Keyboard Port
Associated
Wolverine: Mouse port Nonincendive Field
Wiring Apparatus
Ethernet
USB*
2. Selected Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus shall satisfy the following:
Associated Non-Incendive
Wolverine Field Wiring Apparatus
Voc ≤ Vmax
Isc ≤ Imax
Ca ≥ Ci + C cable
La ≥ Li + L cable
3. If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown, the following values may be
used: Capacitance – 60 pF/ft
Inductive – 0.20 uH/ft
4. Nonincendive Field Wiring must be installed in accordance with Article 501.4(B)(3) of the
National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
B-4 Wolverine Industrial Computer – Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
B
PROTECTIVE
GND
Associated Non-Incendive
Wolverine Field Wiring Apparatus
Voc ≤ Vmax
Isc ≤ Imax
Ca ≥ Ci + C cable
La ≥ Li + L cable
3. If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown, the following values may be
used: Capacitance – 60 pF/ft
Inductive – 0.20 uH/ft
MAN00055 Rev. E Appendix B Product Agency Approvals, Standards, and General Specifications B-5
Index
H
A Hard disk drive, 4-3
Audible warning, 4-2 Heaters, 1-9
B I
Battery Backup, 3-3 Initial startup, 4-1
Installation
C panel mounting, 2-1
Installed network components, 4-7
CD-ROM drive, 4-5
CMOS
battery, 6-6
K
failed battery, 6-2 Keyboard
settings, 6-1 troubleshooting, 6-4
CMOS checksum error, 6-6 Keypad, 1-9
COM ports
location, 3-4
pinout, 3-6 L
Communications, 4-7
troubleshooting, 6-4 LPT1
pinout, 3-5
Connectors, 3-1
layout, 3-4
Corrective Actions, 6-6 M
Memory
D troubleshooting, 6-3
Mounting
Diagnostics
guidelines, 2-1
bootup sequence, 6-1
self-test, 6-1
system configuration verification, 6-1
system test and initialization, 6-1
N
Display Network communications
troubleshooting, 6-3 troubleshooting, 6-4
Network components, 4-7
E Network interface, 1-8
Error messages
AUTOCONFIG/DEFAULT I/O, 6-4
O
CMOS checksum error, 6-2, 6-6 Optional features, 1-4
CMOS Setup Utility, 6-2 Optional I/O, 1-8
Insufficient memory, 6-3
non-fatal, 6-1
Out of Memory, 6-3 P
Safe Recovery, 6-2
External keyboard and mouse, 4-6 Parallel port
pinout, 3-5
Peripherals, 4-2
F PLC/CPU connection
troubleshooting, 6-4
FCC notice, B-2 Power input, 1-8, 3-1
Front access panel, 1-4, 1-6 Powering up, 4-2
troubleshooting, 6-2
G Printer port, 3-5
Printing
Graphic system, 4-6 troubleshooting, 6-5
R
Reset
accidental, 6-2
RFI standards, B-2
S
Self-test diagnostics, 6-1
Serial communication ports, 3-6
Serial Mouse
troubleshooting, 6-3
Shutting down the computer, 4-9
Specifications
functional, A-2
general, B-3
mechanical, A-1
Standard features, 1-3
System Configuration Verification, 6-1
System Test and Initialization, 6-1
T
Temperature
effect on contrast setting, 6-3
Touch Screen, 4-6
driver for Windows, 4-6
Troubleshooting, 6-2
communications, 6-4
display, 6-3
keyboard, 6-4
memory, 6-3
network communications, 6-4
PLC/CPU connection, 6-4
powerup, 6-2
printing, 6-5
serial mouse, 6-3
TSRs, 6-3
W
Warning, audible, 4-2
Index-2 WOLVERINE Industrial Computer Hardware User’s Manual–April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
Technical Information
RTD TH13, TH14 and TH15
RTD assemblies in Thermowells with spring loaded insert and
enclosure for process industry
Areas of application
The TH13, TH14 and TH15 temperature sensors are RTD
assemblies installed in Thermowells and designed for use in
all types of process industries, including harsh environments,
due to their rugged design.
The sensor is made up of a measurement probe with an
insulated RTD element, sheath and a thermowell made of
bar-stock material.
The sensor assemblies can be used in process industries such
as:
• Chemicals
• Petrochemical
• Power plants
• Refineries
• Offshore Platforms
Head transmitters
Instead of directly wiring your temperature sensors to your
control system, use transmitters to reduce wiring and
maintenance costs while increasing measurement accuracy.
Field transmitters
Temperature field transmitters with HART® or
FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ protocol for highest reliability in
harsh industrial environments. Blue backlit display with large
measured value, bargraph and fault condition indication for
ease of reading.
Your benefits
• One source shopping for temperature measurement
solutions. World class transmitter with integrated sensor
offering for heavy process industry applications.
• Remove and install straight out of the box!
• Improved galvanic isolation on most devices (2 kV)
• Simplified model structure: Competitively priced, offers
great value. Easy to order and reorder. A single model
number includes sensor, thermowell and transmitter
assembly for a complete point solution
• All iTEMP® transmitters provide long term
stability ≤ 0.05 % per year
TI110R/24/ae
TH13, TH14, TH15
Measuring system
2 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Equipment architecture The single and duplex element RTDs are designed to measure temperature in a variety of processes and
laboratory applications. These RTDs are specifically designed for use in two different process temperature
ranges and they will provide accurate and repeatable temperature measurement through a broad temperature
range of -328 to 1112 °F (-200 to 600 °C). Low range thin film RTDs -58 to 392 °F (-50 to 200 °C) are
constructed using silver plated and copper internal leads, PTFE wire insulations with potting compounds to
resist moisture penetration. High range RTDs -328 to 1112 °F (-200 to 600 °C) are constructed with nickel
internal leads inside swaged MgO insulated cables to allow higher temperature measurements at the RTD
element and to provide higher temperature lead protection along the sheath.
Measurement range Construction Model code (class and type of sensor) max. range
TH13-_ _ _ _ _ (A/C/E/G/J/L) _ _ _ _ _
Low temperature range TH14-_ _ _ _ _ (A/C/E/G/J/L) _ _ _ _ _ -58 to 392 °F (-50 to 200 °C)
TH15-_ _ _ (A/C/E/G/J/L) _ _ _ _ _
TH13-_ _ _ _ _ (B/D/F/H/K/M) _ _ _ _ _
High temperature range TH14-_ _ _ _ _(B/D/F/H/K/M) _ _ _ _ _ -328 to 1112 °F (-200 to 600 °C)
TH15-_ _ _ (B/D/F/H/K/M) _ _ _ _ _ _
! Note!
Options J, K, L, M are duplex platinum elements of two sensors inside the same sheath.
! Note!
Use option code ’B’ (Block: Test; calibration) for RTD calibration, the three temperature points need to be
specified in 5 °C (9 °F) increments.
The manufacturer provides comparison temperature calibrations from -40 to +215 °C (-40 to +420 °F) on the
international temperature scale of 1990. Calibrations are traceable to standards maintained by the national
institute of standards and technology (NIST). Calibration services are in conformance with ASTM E220, IEC
17025 and ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994. The report of calibration is referenced to the serial number of the RTD
assembly.
Three point calibrations are provided, given that the specified temperatures are within the recommended range
and the minimum length requirements are met as specified. The minimum length is based on overall length ’x’
of the spring loaded insert.
Endress+Hauser 3
TH13, TH14, TH15
Electronics
Family of temperature Measurement assemblies with iTEMP® transmitters are an installation ready solution to improve the
transmitters functionality of temperature measurement by increasing accuracy and reliability when compared to direct
wired sensors. Overall installation costs are lower than with direct wired sensors, since an inexpensive pair of
signal (4 to 20 mA) wires can be run over long distances.
PC programmable devices PC programmable head transmitters offer you extreme flexibility and help control costs with the ability to stock
TMT180 and TMT181 one device and program it for your needs. Regardless of your choice of output, all iTEMP® transmitters can be
configured quickly and easily with a PC. To help you with this task, Endress+Hauser offers free software
ReadWin® 2000 which can be downloaded from our website. Go to www.readwin2000.com to download
ReadWin® 2000 today. For details see Technical Information.
HART® TMT182 head HART® communication is all about easy, reliable data access and getting better information more
transmitter inexpensively. iTEMP® transmitters integrate seamlessly into your existing control system and provide painless
access to preventative diagnostic information.
Configuration with a DXR275 or 375 hand-held or a PC with configuration program (FieldCare, ReadWin®
2000) or configure with AMS or PDM. For details, see Technical Information.
Field transmitter TMT162 - Field transmitter with HART® communication, FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ protocol and blue backlit display.
Dual compartment housing Can be read easily from a distance, in sunlight and at night. Large measurement value, bargraph and fault
indication display. Benefits are: dual sensor input, highest reliability in harsh industrial environments,
mathematic functions, thermometer drift monitoring, sensor back-up functionality, corrosion detection and
sensor transmitter matching by accepting Callendar Van Dusen constants. For details, see Technical
Information.
Field transmitter TMT142 - Field transmitter with HART® communication. The one channel TMT142 allows for cost effective replacement
Single compartment housing of smaller transmitters with tiny display and old style analog transmitters. Large and brilliant blue backlit
display. Regardless of whether you install the transmitter in a dark location or in direct sunlight, you still get a
clear temperature reading. Reliable temperature measurement through advanced diagnostics. For details, see
Technical Information.
PROFIBUS® PA TMT184 head Universally programmable head transmitter with PROFIBUS®-PA fieldbus communication. Converting various
transmitter input signals into a digital output signal. High accuracy in the total ambient temperature range. Swift and easy
operation, visualisation and maintenance using a PC direct from the control panel, e. g. using operating
software such as FieldCare, Simatic PDM or AMS. DIP switch for address setting, makes start up and
maintenance save and reliable. For details, see Technical Information.
Performance characteristics
Response time 63% response time per ASTM E644
! Note!
Response time for the sensor assembly without transmitter.
4 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Response time examples for RTD assemblies with thermowell TH13 and TH14
Construction Stepped thermowell Tapered thermowell ¾" straight thermowell
! Note!
Response times for RTD assemblies with thermowell are provided for general design guidance without
transmitter
When the temperature of a process media changes, the output signal of a RTD assembly follows this change
after a certain time delay. The physical cause is the time related to heat transfer from the process media through
the thermowell and the insert to the sensor element (RTD). The manner in which the reading follows the
change in temperature of the assembly over time is referred to as the response time. Variables that influence
or impact the response time are:
• Wall thickness of thermowell
• Spacing between RTD insert and thermowell
• Sensor packaging
• Process parameters such as media, flow velocity, etc.
! Note!
For measurement errors in °F, calculate using equation above in °C, then multiply the outcome by 1.8.
Measurement accuracy
transmitter
TMT180 TMT181 multi- TMT182 TMT184 TMT162 FF TMT142 and TMT162
Pt100 PCP functional PCP HART® PROFIBUS®- Field trans- HART® Field transmitter
PA mitter
Accuracy
Digital D/A2
0.36 °F (0.2 °C) 0.36 °F (0.2 °C) 0.36 °F (0.2 °C) 0.27 °F 0.18 °F 0.18 °F 0.02%
or 0.08%1 or 0.08%2 or 0.08%2 (0.15 °C) (0.1 °C) (0.1 °C)
Insulation resistance Insulation resistance between terminals and probe sheath, test voltage 250 V.
• ≥100 MΩ at 77 °F (25 °C)
• ≥10 MΩ at 572 °F (300 °C)
Endress+Hauser 5
TH13, TH14, TH15
Self heating RTD elements are not self-powered and require a small current be passed through the device to provide a
voltage that can be measured. Self-heating is the rise of temperature within the element itself, caused by the
current flowing through the element. This self-heating appears as a measurement error and is affected by the
thermal conductivity and velocity of the process being measured; it is negligible when an Endress+Hauser
iTEMP® temperature transmitter is connected.
TMT182 HART®
TMT184 PROFIBUS®-PA
U = 2 kV AC
TMT162 HART®, FF Field transmitter
6 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Wiring
Wiring diagrams Type of sensor connection
T09-TH1112xx-04-xx-XX-ae-000 T09-TH131415-04-xx-xx-ae-000
T09-TH1112xx-04-xx-XX-ae-001
! Note!
The blocks and transmitters are shown as they sit inside the heads in reference to the conduit opening.
Endress+Hauser 7
TH13, TH14, TH15
Wire specifications 24AWG, 19 strand silver plated copper with 0.010” PTFE extruded outer.
Electrical connection
Flying leads, standard 3" for wiring in connection head, head mounted transmitter or terminal block mounted
Design of leads
Installation conditions
Installation instructions
T09-TH1314x15-11-xx-xx-ae-000
Examples for pipe installation - In pipes with a small cross section the sensor tip should reach or extend slightly past the
center line of the pipe (=U).
A: TH13 assembly socket weld installation
B: Threaded, tilted installation of TH13 assembly
C: Flange installation of TH14 assembly
8 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Immersion
Minimum immersion per ASTM E644, ∆T ≤ 0.09 °F (0.05 °C)
Immersion RTD assembly TH15 without thermowell
For temperature assemblies with themowell (TH13 and TH14) the minimum immersion is the depth to which
the thermowell is immersed in the medium, measured from the tip. To minimize errors from ambient
temperature the following minimum immersion lengths are recommended:
Environmental conditions
Process conditions
Thermowells are used in measuring the temperature of a moving fluid in a conduit, where the stream exerts
an appreciable force. The limiting value for the thermowells is governed by the temperature, the pressure and
the speed of the medium, the immersion length, the materials of the thermowells and the medium, etc.
Calculations for stress and vibration of thermowells can be done according to ASME PTC 19.3-1974 standard,
please consult Endress+Hauser.
Endress+Hauser 9
TH13, TH14, TH15
Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions All dimensions in inches. For the values related to this graphic please refer to the tables and equations below.
T09-TH131415-06-xx-xx-ae-000
*For TH13 thermowells with ½"NPT - 1" Process thread length and ¾" Hex length dimensions are reversed.
Pos. P: Pipe size
Pos. Q: Thermowell diameter
Pos. T: Lag dimension (see product structure)
Pos. U: Thermowell immersion length
Pos. XA, A: Immersion length RTD sensor; Thermowell drilled length
Pos. X: Insert overall length
10 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Dimensions of TH13
2½", 4½", 7½", Hex nipple = 1" 3" or ½" NPT Stepped (Standard duty) 5/8"
11
10½" or specified length Tapered (Heavy duty) /16"
specified length Nipple Union 1" to 6" in
¾" NPT Stepped (Standard duty) ¾"
2" to 18" in Nipple ½" increments
Tapered (Heavy duty) 7/8"
½" increments (NUN) = 4" or 7"
Material: 1" NPT Stepped (Standard duty) 7/8"
Steel or 316SS Tapered (Heavy duty) 1 1/16"
P = Pipe size
• Nom. ¾"; Dia. = 1.050"
• Nom. 1"; Dia. = 1.315"
Dimensions of TH14
Flange rating: ASME B16.5
2", 4", 7", 10" Hex nipple = 1" specified length 1" 7/8"
specified length or 1" to 10" in
2" to 18" Nipple Union ½" increments 1½" 11/16"
in ½" increments Nipple 2" 11/16"
(NUN) = 4" or 7"
Material:
Steel or 316SS
Endress+Hauser 11
TH13, TH14, TH15
System components
Housing
T09-TH11xxxx-06-xx-xx-ae-001
T09-TH11xxxx-06-xx-xx-ae-000
Temperature field transmitter iTEMP® TMT162 • Material: Die-cast aluminum housing AlSi10Mg with powder coating on
polyester base
• Separate electronics compartment and connection compartment
• Display rotatable in 90° increments
• Cable entry: 2 x ½" NPT
• Degree of protection NEMA 4X (IP 67)
• Brilliant blue backlit display with ease of visibility in bright sunshine or pitch
darkness
• Gold plated terminals to avoid corrosion and additional measurement errors
Details see Technical Information (see 'Documentation')
T09-TMT162ZZ-06-00-xx-ae-001
12 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
T09-TMT142ZZ-06-00-06-ae-001
Connection head deep drawn stainless steel, TA20J style • Material: Deep drawn stainless steel AISI 316L SS (hygienic design)
• Optional with display and/or head transmitter
• Sensor connection: ½" NPT female
• Cable entry: ½" NPT female
• Degree of protection NEMA 4X (IP 66)
Display:
• 4 digits 7-segments LC display (loop powered)
• Maximum error: 0.1% of programmed range
• Loop drop: 2.5 V at 22 mA
• Max. ambient temperature: -4 to 160 °F (-20 to 70 °C)
The programming is executed through 3 keys mounted on the bottom of the
display.
a0005938
Head transmitter
R09-TMT182ZZ-06-06-xx-ae-001
iTEMP® PA TMT184
T09-TMT184ZZ-06-06-xx-ae-001
Endress+Hauser 13
TH13, TH14, TH15
Fieldbus connector to PROFIBUS® -PA or • Ambient temperature: -40 to 300 °F (-40 to 150 °C)
FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ • Degree of protection IP 67
Wiring diagram:
T09-FFCONNEC-06-xx-xx-ae-000 a0006023
UL Temperature transmitters are recognized components to UL 3111-1 (iTEMP® Series) except for TMT184
PROFIBUS®-PA.
CSA GP The installed and assembled transmitters (iTEMP® Series) are CSA GP approved, except TMT184 PROFIBUS®
PA
14 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Ordering information
Product structure, RTD TH13- RTD assembly in thermowell, TH13
assembly in thermowell TH13
TW Immersion length U:
1 2½ inch
2 4½ inch
3 7½ inch
4 10½ inch
8 .... inch (0.5" increments)
Y special
Shape of TW:
2 Stepped, Standard Duty
3 Tapered, Heavy Duty
9 Special
Lag of TW T:
A None
E 3 inch
X ... inch (0.5" increments)
Y Special
Extension:
1 Hex nipple 316SS, E=1"
2 Nipple Union Nipple 316SS, E=4"
3 Hex nipple steel, E=1"
4 Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=4"
5 Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=7"
6 Nipple Union Nipple, 316SS, E=7"
9 Special
Endress+Hauser 15
TH13, TH14, TH15
Enclosure; communication:
A None
B E+H blue Al + cover, ½" NPT cable entry
C E+H blue Al + cover, ¾" NPT cable entry
D Plastic PP white ½" NPT cable entry
E Plastic PP white ¾" NPT cable entry
F SS316L (TA20J), ½" NPT
G SS316L (TA20J), LCD, ½" NPT
H AL Field Housing, 1 Input, ½" NPT, HART
I AL Field Housing, 1 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT
J AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, HART
K AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT
L AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, FF
M AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, FF, ½" NPT
Y Special
Electrical connection:
A Programmable RTD TMT180
C Programmable TMT181 NON Ex
D Programmable TMT181 FM IS
E Programmable TMT181 CSA IS
F Profibus PA TMT184, non Ex
G Profibus PA TMT184, FM IS
H Profibus PA TMT184, CSA IS
I TMT162, non Ex, Dual Compartment
J TMT162, FM IS, Dual Compartment
K TMT162, CSA IS, Dual Compartment
L HART TMT142 non Ex, Single Compartment
M HART TMT142, FM IS, Single Compartment
N HART TMT142, CSA IS, Single Compartment
O HART TMT182, FM IS Advanced Diagnostic
P HART TMT182 NON Ex
R HART TMT182 FM IS
T HART TMT182 CSA IS
Y Special
2 Flying Leads
3 Terminal block
Additional option:
1 None
2 Profibus PA Plug M12
3 Foundation Fieldbus Plug 7/8"
9 special version
Test; Calibration:
A None
B Sensor calibration certificate
Y Special version
Model:
K Standard model, North American region
Y Special version
16 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Rating; Type:
1 150 psi; RF
2 300 psi; RF
3 600 psi; RF
9 Special
Lag of TW, T:
A None
X .... inch (0.5" increments)
Y Special
Extension:
1 Hex nipple 316SS, E=1"
2 Nipple Union Nipple 316SS, E=4"
3 Hex nipple steel, E=1"
4 Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=4"
5 Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=7"
6 Nipple Union Nipple, 316SS, E=7"
9 Special
Endress+Hauser 17
TH13, TH14, TH15
Enclosure; communication:
A None
B E+H blue Al + cover, ½" NPT cable entry
C E+H blue Al + cover, ¾" NPT cable entry
D Plastic PP white ½" NPT cable entry
E Plastic PP white ¾" NPT cable entry
F SS316L (TA20J), ½" NPT
G SS316L (TA20J), LCD, ½" NPT
H AL Field Housing, 1 Input, ½" NPT, HART
I AL Field Housing, 1 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT
J AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, HART
K AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT
L AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, FF
M AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, FF, ½" NPT
Y Special
Electrical connection:
A Programmable RTD TMT180
C Programmable TMT181 NON Ex
D Programmable TMT181 FM IS
E Programmable TMT181 CSA IS
F Profibus PA TMT184, non Ex
G Profibus PA TMT184, FM IS
H Profibus PA TMT184, CSA IS
I TMT162, non Ex, Dual Compartment
J TMT162, FM IS, Dual Compartment
K TMT162, CSA IS, Dual Compartment
L HART TMT142 non Ex, Single Compartment
M HART TMT142, FM IS, Single Compartment
N HART TMT142, CSA IS, Single Compartment
O HART TMT182, FM IS Advanced Diagnostic
P HART TMT182 NON Ex
R HART TMT182 FM IS
T HART TMT182 CSA IS
Y Special
2 Flying Leads
3 Terminal block
Additional option:
1 None
2 Profibus PA Plug M12
3 Foundation Fieldbus Plug 7/8"
9 special version
Test; Calibration:
A None
B Sensor calibration certificate
Y Special version
Model:
K Standard model, North American region
Y Special version
18 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Extension:
1 Hex nipple 316SS, E=1"
2 Nipple Union Nipple 316SS, E=4"
3 Hex nipple steel, E=1"
4 Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=4"
5 Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=7"
6 Nipple Union Nipple, 316SS, E=7"
9 Special
Enclosure; communication:
A None
B E+H blue Al + cover, ½" NPT cable entry
C E+H blue Al + cover, ¾" NPT cable entry
D Plastic PP white ½" NPT cable entry
E Plastic PP white ¾" NPT cable entry
F SS316L (TA20J), ½" NPT
G SS316L (TA20J), LCD, ½" NPT
H AL Field Housing, 1 Input, ½" NPT, HART
I AL Field Housing, 1 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT
J AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, HART
K AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT
L AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, FF
M AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, FF, ½" NPT
Y Special
Endress+Hauser 19
TH13, TH14, TH15
Electrical connection:
A Programmable RTD TMT180
C Programmable TMT181 NON Ex
D Programmable TMT181 FM IS
E Programmable TMT181 CSA IS
F Profibus PA TMT184, non Ex
G Profibus PA TMT184, FM IS
H Profibus PA TMT184, CSA IS
I TMT162, non Ex, Dual Compartment
J TMT162, FM IS, Dual Compartment
K TMT162, CSA IS, Dual Compartment
L HART TMT142 non Ex, Single Compartment
M HART TMT142, FM IS, Single Compartment
N HART TMT142, CSA IS, Single Compartment
O HART TMT182, FM IS Advanced Diagnostic
P HART TMT182 NON Ex
R HART TMT182 FM IS
T HART TMT182 CSA IS
Y Special
2 Flying Leads
3 Terminal block
Documentation Requirement:
1 Standard
9 Other
Test; Calibration:
A None
B Sensor calibration certificate
Y Other
Model:
K Standard model, North American region
Y Other
Additional option:
1 None
2 Profibus PA Plug M12
3 Foundation Fieldbus Plug 7/8"
9 special version
20 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Documentation
• Compact instructions TH13 RTD assembly in thermowell (KA190r/24/ae)
• Compact instructions TH14 RTD assembly in flanged thermowell (KA192r/24/ae)
• Compact instructions TH15 RTD assembly - spring loaded (KA195r/24/ae)
• Technical information Temperature field transmitter iTEMP® TMT162 (TI086r/24/ae)
• Technical information Temperature field transmitter iTEMP® HART® TMT142 (TI107r/24/ae)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® Pt TMT180 (TI088r/24/ae)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® PCP TMT181 (TI070r/24/ae)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® HART® TMT182 (TI078r/24/ae)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® PA® TMT184 (TI079r/24/ae)
Application example:
• Technical information Energy manager RMS621 (TI092r/24/ae)
• Technical information Cerabar S (TI383r/24/ae)
• Technical information Deltabar S (TI384r/24/ae)
Endress+Hauser 21
TH13, TH14, TH15
TH13, TH14, TH15
TH13, TH14, TH15
TI110R/24/ae/06.06
FM+SGML 6.0 ProMoDo
Actuating elements available also for Zone 21 and 22
Actuating elements
10
Actuating elements available also for Zone 21 and 22
Selection chart
1-6
for Control unit ComEx 316L Double push button actuator 05-0003-007400
20 39 for control units
20 with rubber membrane,
supplied with five loose coloured centre discs:
red, green, yellow, white, black
M30 x 1.5
1-6
Pushbutton 05-0003-000700
13 20 with rubber membrane,
supplied with five loose coloured centre discs:
M 30x1.5
Weight: 24 g
For offshore applications (with NBR seal) 05-0003-000700BN
1-6 6
03-0330-0191-02/06-BCS-A200865/2E
6
1-6
11
Actuating elements available also for Zone 21 and Zone 22
M30 x 1.5
ø 40
ø 38
20 Weight: 70 g
ø 38
Lock (DOM)
26 lockable in both positions, 05-0003-001200
13 20
key retractable in both positions, *05-0003-001200BN
lock 4 A 185
M 30x1.5
ø 38
Weight: 69 g
31 Lock (RONIS)
20
Lock: 455 05-0003-006100
Lockable in both positions
M30 x 1.5
ø 38
6
I - latching, II - latching; for control unit 05-0003-001002BS
90° turned for ComEx 05-0003-001102BS
M 30x1.5
ø 45
12
Actuating elements available also for Zone 21 and Zone 22
M 30x1.5
ø 38
*05-0003-001100BN
I + II momentary-contact; for control unit 05-0003-001001
6 *05-0003-001001BN
1-6 90° turned for ComEx 05-0003-001101
*05-0003-001101BN
I - latching, II - momentary-contact; for control box, 05-0003-001002
*05-0003-001002BN
turned 90° for ComEx 05-0003-001102
*05-0003-001102BN
I - momentary-contact; II - latching; for control box, 05-0003-001003
*05-0003-001003BN
turned 90° for ComEx 05-0003-001103
*05-0003-001103BN
Weight: 33 g
*For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
28 90°
Position selector switch
13 20 2 positions 0 - I, black 05-0003-000900
for control unit *05-0003-000900BN
M 30x1.5
*05-0003-000901BN
Weight: 33 g
6
1-6 *For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
Lamp Weight: 19 g
red 05-0003-001300
*05-0003-001300BN
22 20 green 05-0003-001400
*05-0003-001400BN
M 30x1.5
yellow 05-0003-001500
ø 38
*05-0003-001500BN
with 05-0003-001600
1-6 *05-0003-001600BN
blue 05-0003-001700
*05-0003-001700BN
*For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
yellow 05-0003-006700
ø 38
*05-0003-006700BN
white 05-0003-006800
1-6 *05-0003-006800BN
blue 05-0003-006900
*05-0003-006900BN
*For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
Weight: 28 g
1-6
Weight: 20 g
ø 38
13
Actuating elements accessories
Selection chart
Illustration Description Order no.
Spanner 05-1191-0001
Label 03-3600-0021
unmarked, for device information
28
Actuating elements accessories
Selection chart
Illustration Description Order no.
UL adapter
tested adapter for ComEx enclosure
with NPT internal thread
Thread 1/2'' NPT 05-0004-0009
Thread 3/4'' NPT 05-0004-0010
03-0330-0191-11/05-BCS-A200865/6E
29
Switch module for local control stations
Switch module
for panel-mounted installation
with terminals
57
terminals IP 20 (IEC 60529)
46
Certification
Rated insulation voltage PTB 99 ATEX 1043 U
690 V UL E184198
33.5 65
Rated voltage Ambient temperature
400 V 400 V 110 V 24 V 230 V -55 °C to +60 °C
Utilization category
AC-12 AC-15 DC-13 DC-13
Rated operating currents Selection chart
16 A 10 A 0.5 A 1A 10 A Code Code
Type of contact Actuating element no.
no.
Nominal currents Ithe 2 NC Pushbutton 0700
16 A/+40 °C, 11 A/+60 °C
Double push button actuator 7400
Contact options 1
contacts with positive break operation Emergency stop Not-Aus 0800
(self cleaning) Selector switch 0 + I latching, 2 positions 0900
1 NC and 1 NO or
2 NC or 2 NO 2 NO Selector switch I + II latching, 3 positions 1000
Switch module
without actuating element 07-3323-1 00
Actuating element
Standard 05-0003-00
for Offshore 05-0003-00 BN
Please enter code number.
36
Switch module for installation on panel
(front installation with connection cable)
Description
As completely certified equipment, BARTEC
modules with connection cable can be directly
installed in industrial control cabinets in hazardous
Features areas. A high IP degree of protection can be
maintained due to easy installation of the actuating
■ self-cleaning contacts
elements in the control cabinet. The respective
■ positive break contacts modules can be single-handedly installed to the
■ single-handed installation actuating elements.
46
Ui = 690 V, only with corresponding core PTB 00 ATEX 1092 X
(e. g.: 750 V) UL E184198
Ui = 400 V, If standard type corresponds Ambient temperature 104.5
with oelflex 100 -40 °C to +60 °C (-55 °C on request)
Rated voltage
250 V 250 V 110 V 24 V 230 V Selection chart
Utilization category Code Code
Type of contact Actuating element no.
no.
AC-12 AC-15 DC-13 DC-13
2 NC Pushbutton 0700
Rated operating currents
16 A 10 A 0.5 A 1A 10 A 1 7400
Double push button actuator
Cable length
3 m, indicate greater lengths in
Complete order no.
plain text Switch module without actuating element 07-3323-3 03*)
Shock resistance Actuating element
DIN IEC 68 part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms Standard 05-0003-00
for Offshore 05-0003-00 BN
*)
Please enter code number. Standard length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text.
6
Lamp module for local control stations
Lamp module
for panel-mounted installation
with terminals
57
Terminals IP 20 (IEC 60529)
ø 19
46
Certification
Rated insulation voltage PTB 97 ATEX 1064 U
300 V UL E184198 33.5 97
Electrical life
>105 running hours Complete order no.
Storage-/transport temperature
Lamp module
-55 °C to +70 °C
without actuating element 07-3353-11 0
Weight
Actuating element
approx. 90 g
Standard 05-0003-0001 00
Mounting
by bayonet lock for Offshore 05-0003-0001 00BN
Please enter code number.
Shock resistance
DIN IEC 68 part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms
03-0330-0192-11/05-BCS-A200866/5E
37
Lamp module for installation on panel
(front installation with connection cable)
Description
As completely certified equipment, BARTEC
modules with connection cable can be directly
installed in industrial control cabinets in
Features hazardous areas. A high IP degree of protection
can be maintained due to easy installation of the
■ long service life
actuating elements in the control cabinet. The
■ illumination 180° respective modules can be single-handedly
■ brilliant colours installed to the actuating elements.
ø 19
Rated insulation voltage
46
Certification
300 V PTB 97 ATEX 1065 X
UL E184198
Rated operating voltage
AC 12 V to 250 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) Ambient temperature 136.5
DC 12 V to 60 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) -40 °C to +50 °C (-55 °C on request)
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (-55 °C to +60 °C)
Power consumption
<1W Selection chart
Lamp
LED Wiring diagram Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no.
red, green, yellow, white, blue
red 1 red 3
Illumination
very bright, over a visible angle of 180° green 2 green 4
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic yellow 3 yellow 5
Note
The connection cable for lamp modules must
03-0330-0192-11/05-BCS-A200866/6E
7
Illuminated button for local control stations
Illuminated button
for panel-mounted installation
with terminals
57
Rated insulation voltage
ø 19
PTB 97 ATEX 1064 U
46
300 V UL E184198
Rated operating voltage
AC 12 V to 250 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) Ambient temperature 33.5 90
DC 12 V to 60 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) -55 °C to +50 °C
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (-55 °C to +60 °C) +60 °C (AC/DC 12 to 24 V)
Power consumption
<1W
Lamp Selection chart
LED: red, green, yellow, white, blue
Illumination Type of contact Code no. Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no.
very bright, over a visible angle of 180°
1 NC
■ Contact element X1 red 1 red 5
Nominal voltage
AC 250 V 7
green 2 green 6
Nominal current
AC 5 A
X2
Contacts yellow 3 yellow 7
1 NC or 1 NO as snap switch element 1 NO
Switching capacity X1
AC-15 1 A/230 V white 4 white 8
DC-13 0.25 A/24 V 8
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic blue 5 blue 9
Connection X2
Terminals 2.5 mm2, fine stranded
Electrical life Complete order no.
>105 running hours
Illuminated button
Mechanical life without actuating element 07-3363-1 0
>105 switching cycles
Storage/transport temperature
Actuating element
03-0330-0295-11/05-BCS-A217100E
-55 °C to +70 °C
Standard 05-0003-006 00
Weight
approx. 130 g for Offshore 05-0003-006 00BN
Please enter code number.
Mounting
by bayonet lock
Shock resistance
DIN IEC 68 Part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms
38
Illuminated button for installation on panel
(front installation with connection cable)
Description
As completely certified equipment, BARTEC
modules with connection cable can be directly
installed in industrial control cabinets in hazardous
Features areas. A high IP degree of protection can be
maintained due to easy installation of the actuating
■ high service life
elements in the control cabinet. The respective
■ brilliant colours modules can be single-handedly installed to the
■ single-handed installation actuating elements.
46
300 V PTB 97 ATEX 1065 X
UL E184198
Rated operating voltage
AC 12 V to 250 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) Ambient temperature
131
DC 12 V to 60 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) -40 °C to +50 °C
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (-55 °C to +60 °C) +60 °C (AC/DC 12 to 24 V)
-55 °C on request
Power consumption
<1W
Lamp
LED: red, green, yellow, white, blue
Selection chart
Illumination Type of contact Code no. Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no.
very bright, over a visible angle of 180°
1 NC
■ Contact element red 1 red 5
Nominal voltage
AC 250 V 7
green 2 green 6
Nominal current
AC 5 A GY
Contacts yellow 3 yellow 7
1 NC or 1 NO as snap switch element 1 NO
Connection
flexible cable 4 x 0.75 mm2 (ø 7.2 mm) Complete order no.
Electrical life
Illuminated button 07-3363-3 3*)
>105 running hours
without actuating element
Mechanical life
Actuating element
>105 switching cycles
Standard 05-0003-006 00
Storage and transport temperature
-55 °C to +70 °C for Offshore 05-0003-006 00BN
Weight
03-0330-0296-11/05-BCS-A217101E
Description
As completely certified equipment, BARTEC
modules with connection cable can be directly
installed in industrial control cabinets in hazardous
Features areas. A high IP degree of protection can be
maintained due to easy installation of the actuating
■ high end stop torque
elements in the control cabinet. The respective
■ high IP degree of protection modules can be single-handedly installed to the
■ single-handed installation actuating elements.
46
Ui = 400 V, corresponds to standard version PTB 05 ATEX 1065 X
with oilflex 100 Ambient temperature
Max. rated operating voltage -40 °C to +60 °C 104.5
AC/DC 320 V (-55 °C on request)
Resistance
1 kΩ to 10 kΩ
Characteristic curve
linear Selection chart
Resistance tolerance
Wiring diagram Resistance value Code no.
± 20 %
Power consumption 1 kΩ 4
max. 1 W
2.2 kΩ 5
Resistance material
carbon layer on ceramics
4.7 kΩ 6
Rotation range
mech. 285° -5° 10 kΩ 7
electr. effective approx. 250°
Other resistances on request.
Torque (beginning)
0.5 to 1.5 Ncm Complete order no.
Torque (end stop) Potentiometer without actuating element 07-3373-3D 3*)
> 100 Ncm Please enter code number.
*)
Standard length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text.
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic
Actuating element Order no.
Connection Standard (Scale 1-10) 05-0003-007600
flexible cable 3 x 0.75 mm²
for Offshore (Scale 1-10) 05-0003-007600BN
Mechanical life
25000 sinusoidal cycles
Storage/transport temperature
-55 °C to +70 °C
Weight
approx. 240 g with 1 m cable
Cable length
03-0330-0426-02/06-BCS-A240844E
Potentiometer
for panel-mounted installation
with terminals
57
46
Rated insulation voltage
Ambient temperature
500 V
-55 °C to +60 °C
Max. rated voltage 33.5 65
AC/DC 320 V
Resistance
1 kΩ to 10 kΩ
Curve shape
linear Selection chart
Resistance tolerance
Wiring diagram Resistance Code no.
± 20 %
Rated output 1 kΩ 4
max. 1 W
2.2 kΩ 5
Resistor material
carbon film on ceramics
4.7 kΩ 6
Rotation
mech. 285° -5° 10 kΩ 7
electr. about 250°
Other resistances on request.
Torgue (beginning)
0.5 to 1.5 Ncm Complete order no.
Torgue (end stop) Potentiometer
> 100 Ncm without actuating element 07-3373-1D 0
Please enter code number.
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic Actuating element
Connection Standard (scale 1-10) Order no. 05-0003-007600
Double terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2, fine stranded For Offshore (scale 1-10) Order no. 05-0003-007600BN
Mechanical life
25000 sinusoidal cycles
Storage/transport temperature
03-0330-0427-02/06-BCS-A240845E
-55 °C to +70 °C
Weight Notes for installation and inspection:
approx. 88 g At rated voltage: < AC 40 V/< DC 120 V
(protection low voltage in accordance with VDE 0100 T. 410)
potentiometer drive shaft can be operated without actuating element.
At rated voltage: > AC 40 V to max. AC/DC 320 V
potentiometer drive shaft can only be operated with actuating element
or has to be deenergized.
39
2: 5: 50: 95: 98: 100:
SYS19: BASE2 JOB: CRMAIN06-0428-6 Name: 5C-428 DATE: JAN 19 2006 Time: 5:25:03 PM Operator: GK COLOR: CMYK TCP: 15001 Typedriver Name: TS name csm no.: 100 Zoom: 100
5C EFS and EDS Factory Sealed Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*,C,D Explosionproof
Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G Dust-Ignitionproof
Control Devices and Manual Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Raintight
Motor Starting Switches Cl. III Wet Locations
NEMA 3,7B*CD,9EFG
Dimensions Pg. 430
STIBOINFO((CRH:66008com:5C:428))
PDFINFO CH0 0 5 C- 0
2: 5: 50: 95: 98: 100:
SYS19: BASE2 JOB: CRMAIN06-0439-3 Name: 5C-439 DATE: JAN 19 2006 Time: 5:25:16 PM Operator: RB COLOR: CMYK TCP: 15001 Typedriver Name: TS name csm no.: 100 Zoom: 100
EDS Factory Sealed General Use Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*,C,D Explosionproof 5C
Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G Dust-Ignitionproof
Snap Switches Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Raintight
Dimensions Pg. 430 Cl. III Wet Locations
NEMA 3,7B*CD,9EFG
EDSC2129 EDS2229
STIBOINFO((CRH:66008com:5C:439))
PDFINFO CH0 0 5 C- 9
2: 5: 50: 95: 98: 100:
SYS19: BASE2 JOB: CRMAIN06-0556-1 Name: 2A-556 DATE: JAN 19 2006 Time: 5:35:18 PM Operator: RB COLOR: CMYK TCP: 15001 Typedriver Name: TS name csm no.: 100 Zoom: 100
2A EDS and EFD Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*C,D Explosionproof
Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G Dust-Ignitionproof
with General Use Snap Switches Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Raintight
Front Operated Cl. III Wet Locations
NEMA 3,7B*CD,9EFG,12
1 1 15⁄16
STIBOINFO((CRH:66008com:2A:556))
PDFINFO CH0 0 2 A - 4
2: 5: 50: 95: 98: 100:
SYS19: BASE2 JOB: CRMAIN06-0557-6 Name: 2A-557 DATE: JAN 19 2006 Time: 5:35:22 PM Operator: RB COLOR: CMYK TCP: 15001 Typedriver Name: TS name csm no.: 100 Zoom: 100
EDS and EFD Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*,C,D Explosionproof 2A
Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G Dust-Ignitionproof
with General Use Snap Switches Front Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Raintight
Operated Single Gang and Two Gang Cl. III Wet Locations
NEMA 3,7B*CD,9EFG,12
*Class I, Group B:
All units listed on this page can be modified
for Class I, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to
the Cat. No.. Example: EDS2129-GB. Seals
must be installed within 11⁄2⍯ of each conduit
opening for Group B usage.
STIBOINFO((CRH:66008com:2A:557))
PDFINFO CH0 0 2 A - 5
078 9
54
43 6!74"96"23"8##$ !% 4"
"4842$"&'
()*+)4 ,
-
.4"
' 1/ !&4"2##2 !0(1)%2)" 43
453678 9 :; "<+=42##
ijklmnopqrslktnutvlwtxtrnulyzt
¡¢
¡©ª«
¬®ª¬ª«
gh
kxn{lk|}po~tz ¢ ¯°ª¬®±¬
²³¬´µ°¬ª
£¡¤¥¦§ ¨¡¢
º969»7¼3½¾93567¿35ÀÁÂÃÄ3Å3Æ»Ç6Â3È ¿9»7Â9É
5Á6ʼ93º76Ê 4ÀÇ3º76ÊË
4Ä»ÇÍÊÄ 4Ä»ÇÍÊÄ
ÌÍÎ 8 ¿9»9¾ ·97É3¶6É Æ99É ·97É3¶6É Æ99É
5ÁÏ9 5Âм9Ñ ¹¸Ò Ó ¸ÔÔÒ Ó 7ÂÕ3Ö 7ÂÕ3Ö 7ÂÕ3Ö 7ÂÕ3Ö
×Ø
P KLXWÙa VU VU ÚÛIVKVÜ ÚÛIRVKVÜÝ ÚÛIVVVÜ ÚÛIRVVVÜÝ
×Ø
P VLXWÙa VU VU ÚÛIVKM ÚÛIRVKMÝ ÚÛIRVVMÝ
×Ø
P ×LÞßY VU VU ÚÛIVK×U ÚÛIRVK×U ÚÛIVV×U ÚÛIRVV×U
×Ø
P PLÞßY VU VU ÚÛIVKPU ÚÛIRVKPU ÚÛIRVVPU
K KLXWÙa VU VU ÚÛI×KVÜ ÚÛIR×KVÜÝ ÚÛI×VVÜ ÚÛIR×VVÜÝ
K VLXWÙa VU VU ÚÛI×KM ÚÛIR×KMÝ ÚÛI×VM ÚÛIR×VMÝ
K ×LÞßY VU VU ÚÛI×K×U ÚÛIR×K×U ÚÛI×V×U ÚÛIR×V×U
K PLÞßY VU VU ÚÛI×KPU ÚÛIR×KPU ÚÛI×VPU ÚÛIR×VPU
ÝàTLàáá`c^ßefßZf`â ßZã[e\`äWZ`KLXWÙa`ßef`VLXWÙa`be[^cå
æRWâ ç[eß^[Wec`Wä`cÞ[^è]ac`èße`ça`äbZe[c]afå
ÓSR`Zß^af`cÞ[^è]ac`ßZa`^ac^af`äWZ`Zac[c^[éaê`[efbè^[éa`ßef`^be\c^ae`ä[Ùßâ ae^`ÙWßfc`bX`^W`^]a
äbÙÙ`èbZZae^`Zß^[e\`ßef`äWZ`â W^WZ`ÙWßfc`bX`^W`MUë `Wä`^]a`ßâ XaZa`Zß^[e\å
ì¼7¾¾3í3º»ÇÍ¿3,î3SÙÙ`be[^c`We`^][c`Xß\a`èße`ça`â Wf[ä[af`äWZ`RÙßcc`ïê`ðZWbX`ñ`bcß\aå`Sff
cbää[ò`ðñ`^W`^]a`Rß^å`TWå`IaßÙc`â bc^`ça`[ec^ßÙÙaf`Þ[^][e`KKØVóWä`aßè]`èWefb[^`WXae[e\`[e
Û[é[c[We`Kå`ïe`Rßeßfßê`äWZ`ðZWbX`ñ`ßXXÙ[èß^[Wec`èWecbÙ^`äßè^WZYå
0!?5
?@
AA.B4$$##C:+ 443DD
EVEN MORE
THAN YOU EXPECT.
Cold environments pose a tough challenge for electrical products — and the people who
maintain them. Regardless of where you operate, you can’t afford to sacrifice perform-
ance or dependability. That’s why Cooper Crouse-Hinds® brings you a wide selection of
cold-environment solutions you can count on.
You may already be familiar with many of the products you’ll see here. It’s likely they’re
in your facility now, working hard to maximize uptime and minimize maintenance.
But what you may not expect is the breadth of our line. We’re your source for cold-
tolerant lighting, power distribution and control equipment plus fittings and connectors for
all types of conduit and cable systems. We also bring you electric heaters for personnel
comfort, equipment protection or process control, and cold-tolerant products for haz-
ardous areas.
Because this broad selection is from Cooper Crouse-Hinds, you can specify with complete
confidence. And you’ll save time, because you won’t have to track down the products you
need from multiple sources.
C O O P E R C R O U S E - H I N D S | 2
COLD ENVIRONMENT COOPER CROUSE-HINDS
PROBLEM SOLUTION
COMPROMISED ENVIRONMENTAL SEALING WEATHER-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION
Cold outdoor environments bring snow, sleet, and Choose from our rugged, cold-weather-resistant NEMA 4 and 4X
freezing rain—causing potentially damaging ice watertight products designed to withstand the elements … small-
formation. And without proper enclosure design, the surface-area gasket designs for superior performance in areas
performance of enclosed electrical components may be where ice build-up is likely … and silicone gaskets for moving
adversely affected. parts that stay resilient at temperatures as low as -57°C (-70°F),
3 | W W W . C R O U S E - H I N D S . C O M
COLD ENVIRONMENT COOPER CROUSE-HINDS
PROBLEM SOLUTION
STUCK OPERATORS AND SHAFTS TEMPERATURE-RESISTANT LUBRICANT AND
When cold temperatures are extreme, lubricants on shafts LUBRICANT-FREE DESIGN
and bushings can stiffen to the point that it becomes diffi- Choose from Cooper Crouse-Hinds products that are designed lubri-
cult to actuate switches or other rotating equipment. cant-free to provide trouble-free operation in cold environments. And,
C O O P E R C R O U S E - H I N D S | 4
COLD ENVIRONMENT COOPER CROUSE-HINDS
PROBLEM SOLUTION
LUMINAIRES THAT WON’T START BUILT-IN LOW-TEMPERATURE START CAPABILITY
When it’s cold, luminaires may have a difficult time start- Lamp starting and ballast striking temperatures determine how
ing and maintaining their lumen output. well a luminaire starts in cold temperatures. We offer a full range
5 | W W W . C R O U S E - H I N D S . C O M
COLD ENVIRONMENT COOPER CROUSE-HINDS
PROBLEM SOLUTION
CONDENSATION DUE TO TEMPERATURE CYCLING BREATHERS AND DRAINS
Even at very low temperatures, temperature cycles over Install our breathers and drains in enclosures or conduit systems
the course of a day can cause moisture build-up—which for proper ventilation to minimize condensation—and allow any
can cause ice problems. accumulated condensate to drain. Many Cooper Crouse-Hinds
and drains.
CGB Cable
Fittings
Catalog Section 5F
• Fully compatible
with cold-weather-
tested cables and cords.
• Rugged construction protects cables
and cords from damage.
• Tightening a single nut provides a
watertight seal.
• Operating temperature range: -50°
to 60°C (-58° to 140°F).
TECK Connectors
Catalog Section 5F
• Fully compatible
with cold-weather-
tested cables and
cords.
• Rugged construc-
tion protects cables and cords from
damage.
• Operating temperature range: -50°
to 60°C (-58° to 140°F).
C O O P E R C R O U S E - H I N D S | 6
COLD ENVIRONMENT COOPER CROUSE-HINDS
PROBLEM SOLUTION
TOO COLD FOR PERSONNEL OR PROCESSES EXPLOSIONPROOF HEATERS OR PANELBOARDS
TO WORK EFFECTIVELY FOR HEAT TRACE APPLICATIONS
You may need to prevent process heat loss … maintain Our explosionproof heaters can provide heat just where it’s needed—
constant temperatures … or keep personnel comfortable safely and conveniently. And we offer a number of panelboard
during maintenance or repair operations. choices that are ideal for heat trace installations to keep your
process flowing.
XC and EXH
Explosionproof Heaters
Catalog Section 4A
• Suitable for hazardous locations.
• Extra-rugged construction withstands
harsh environments.
• Compact designs for easy handling and
installation.
• Operating temperature range: -45° to
40°C (-49° to 104°F).
7 | W W W . C R O U S E - H I N D S . C O M
COLD ENVIRONMENT COOPER CROUSE-HINDS
PROBLEM SOLUTION
INCREASED EXPLOSION PRESSURE IN COLD EXPLOSIONPROOF CONDUIT SEALS—
TEMPERATURES OR FACTORY-SEALED DEVICES
As ambient temperatures drop, the potential for increased Use our explosionproof conduit seals to prevent an explosion from
explosion pressures exists, which can result in increased traveling throughout the conduit system—and minimize the passage of
pressure piling effects. gas or vapors through the conduit. Or you may be able to eliminate the
factory-sealed equipment.
N2SU Factory-Sealed
Control Stations
Catalog Section N
• Pushbutton stations,
pilot lights, and selector
switch are factory sealed.
• Fiberglass-reinforced
polyester enclosures
provide excellent corro-
sion resistance.
• Operating temperature range: -50° to 50°C
(-58° to 122°F).
SpecOne™ GHG 43 Factory- SpecOne™ GHG 26
Sealed Control Stations Explosion-Protected SpecOne™ D2Z Nonmetallic
Catalog Section N Disconnect Switches Factory-Sealed Panelboards
• NEMA 4X, IP 66 Catalog Section 2A Catalog Section 1A
enclosure with • Factory-sealed motor • Unique design allows
formed-in-place circuit switches. for panels with more
gasket. • Innovative break-line than 42 circuits.
• Available with all in cover allows full • UL, cUL and PTB certi-
operators: indica- access for fast, easy fied for Class I, Division
tor lights, potentiometers, control wiring. 2 and Zone 1 hazardous
switches, terminal blocks and meters. • High-impact design with excellent areas.
• Easy change-out components snap in corrosion resistance. • NEMA 4X, IP66 construction.
place on DIN rail. • Operating temperature range: -55° to • Operating temperature range: -55° to 55°C
• Operating temperature range: -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F). (-67° to 131°F).
55°C (-67° to 131°F).
C O O P E R C R O U S E - H I N D S | 8
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGES FOR
LIGHTING
LIGHTING OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
AB12 Fluorescent Luminaire -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F)
AEV Luminaires—IEC Certified -45° to 45°C (-49° to 113°F). Test report for -45°C available.
Consult factory.
AEVBH Luminaires—IEC Certified -45° to 45°C (-49° to 113°F). Test report for -45°C available.
Consult factory.
Champ® HID Luminaires HID Minimum Starting Temperature:
CPMV Wall Pack Luminaire HPS/MH Pulse Start: -40°C (-40°F)
MH/MV: -30°C (-22°F)
Operating Temperature: -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
Fluorescent Minimum Starting Temperature: -18°C (0°F)
Operating Temperature: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
Induction Minimum Starting Temperature: -40°C (-40°F)
Operating Temperature: -40° to 40°C (-40° to 104°F)
Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55° and 65°C—consult
factory for temperature performance data.
Champ® HID Luminaires Minimum Starting Temperature:
DMV HPS/MH Pulse Start: -40°C (-40°F)
LMV MH/MV: -30°C (-22°F)
VMV Operating Temperature: -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
VMV High-Wattage Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55° and 65°C—see
temperature performance data in catalog for details.
DMVF & DMVFB Fluorescent 26 & 39 W: 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)
DMVF 52 & 64 W: -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
DMVFB 52 & 64 W: 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)
eLLK 92 Light Fitting -20° to 50/55°C (-4° to 122/131°F)
eLLK Fluorescent NEC/CEC: -25° to 55°C (-13° to 131°F)
IEC: -25° to 50°C (-13° to 122°F)
Lumen output is reduced at low temperatures.
EV Incandescent -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
EVF Fluorescent 32 W T8: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
60 & 110 W: -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
EVFDR Fluorescent 32 W T8: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
60 & 110 W: -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
EVFT IlluminatorTM Fluorescent 10° to 40°C (50° to 104°F)
EVLP Fluorescent and Fluorescent EVLPF: -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
with Emergency Ballast EVLPFB: 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)
EVLP HID Series Minimum Starting Temperature:
HPS/MH Pulse Start: -40°C (-40°F)
MH/MV: -30°C (-22°F)
Fluorescent: -18°C (0°F)
Operating Temperature: -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55° and 65°C—see temperature
performance data in catalog for details.
EVM Luminaires—IEC Certified -45° to 50°C (-49° to 122°F). Test report for -45°C available. Consult factory.
EVP EVM Floodlight -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F)
F2MV HID Compact Floodlight Minimum Starting Temperature:
FMV HID Champ® Floodlight HPS/MH Pulse Start: -40°C (-40°F)
FMV1000 Series Floodlight MH/MV: -30°C (-22°F)
Operating Temperature: -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55° and 65°C.
9 | W W W . C R O U S E - H I N D S . C O M
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGES FOR
LIGHTING
LIGHTING OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
FVN Fluorescent 32 W: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
40 W with suffix BY: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
60 & 110 W: -29° to 40°C (-20° to 104°F)
FVS Compact Fluorescent -18° to 55°C (0° to 131°F)
Hazard-Gard® HID Floodlight Minimum Starting Temperature:
HPS/MH Pulse Start: -40°C (-40°F)
MH/MV: -30°C (-22°F)
Operating Temperature: -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55°, 65° and 75°C—see temperature
performance data in catalog for details.
Hazard-Gard® HID Luminaire Minimum Starting Temperature:
HPS/MH Pulse Start: -40°C (-40°F)
MH/MV: -30°C (-22°F)
Operating Temperature: -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55°, 65° and 75°C—see temperature
performance data in catalog for details.
HE 5 EN Torch -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
HE 8... Handlamp -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
HF, HFL Stabex -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
HLE 7 L EN Inspection Cap Lamp -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
M0 Stabex -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
N2MV HID Champs Minimum Starting and Operating Temperatures:
HPS/MH Pulse Start: -40° to 40°C (-40° to 104°F)
MH/MV: -30° to 40°C (-22° to 104°F)
Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55°C—see temperature
performance data in catalog for details.
N2MVF & N2MVFB Fluorescent N2MVF: -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
N2MVFB: 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)
NFL Fluorescent (2) lamp 32 W 4': -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
All others: 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)
NFMV Luminaires—IEC Certified -20° to 50°C max (-4° to 122°F). Test report for -45°C available. Consult factory.
nLL. 98. Zone 2 Light Fitting -20° to 50°C (-4° to 122°F)
nLL. 98058/58 Zone 2 Light Fitting -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
nLLK Fluorescent NEC/CEC: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
IEC: -20° to 40°C max (-4° to 104°F)
NVMV Large Body Luminaires— -20° to 55°C max (-4° to 131°F). Test report for -45°C available. Consult factory.
IEC Certified
NVMV Small Body Luminaires— -20° to 55°C max (-4° to 131°F). Test report for -45°C available. Consult factory.
IEC Certified
RCDE-6 and RCDE-10 -40° and below to 40°C (-40° to 104°F)
Incandescent Floodlight
SEB 8, SEB 8 L Searchlight -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
Stabex Mini -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
V2PC Photocell -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F). Suitable for higher temperatures with selected lamps/wattages.
VF VaporgardTM Fluorescent 5,7 W: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
9 W: -4° to 40°C (25° to 104°F)
C O O P E R C R O U S E - H I N D S | 10
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGES FOR
POWER DISTRIBUTION
POWER DISTRIBUTION OPERATING TEMP. RANGE POWER DISTRIBUTION OPERATING TEMP. RANGE
CESD Arktite® Receptacle -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 514 Plugs and Sockets -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
D2D Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 542 5 Flange Socket -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
D2DU Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 591 Plugs and Sockets -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F)
D2L Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 591/511 Plugs and Sockets -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F)
D2LU Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 60.0 Terminal Box -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
D2PB Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 619 Distribution Board -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
D2Z Panelboards -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F) GHG 72 Terminal Box -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
EBBR Interlocked Arktite -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 73 Terminal Box -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
Receptacle with Circuit Breaker GHG 74 Terminal Box -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
ENR Interlocked Circuit -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 758 Bus Bar System -55° to 40°C (-67° to 104°F)
Breaking Receptacle
GHG 981 Socket Distribution -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
EPL Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
IEC 309 Plugs and Receptacles -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
EPLU Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
LP1 Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
EXD Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
LP2 Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
EXDU Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
NBR/NSR Interlocked Receptacle -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
GHG 26 Disconnect Switches -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
NPJ Plugs -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
GHG 5 Zone 2 Plugs and Sockets -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
NPR Connectors -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
GHG 511 8 Flange Socket -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
NRE Receptacles -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
GHG 511 Plugs and Sockets -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
NRS Disconnect Switches -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
GHG 511/512 Socket Distribution -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
WSRD Interlocked Receptacle -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
GHG 512 8 Flange Socket -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
GHG 512 Receptacle -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
CONTROL EQUIPMENT
CONTROL EQUIPMENT OPERATING TEMP. RANGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT OPERATING TEMP. RANGE
dLS 92 Built-in Switch -55° to 70°C (-67° to 158°F) GHG 292/293 Control Switch -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
EDS/EFS/DSD Control Stations -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 41 Built-in Switch -55° to 50°C (-67° to 122°F)
EXH Electric Heaters -45° to 40°C (-49° to 104°F) GHG 41/43 Control Station -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
(not available in Canada) GHG 418 Signal Light -55° to 40°C (-67° to 104°F)
FB Intrinsically Safe Remote I/O -20° to 40°C (T6) (-4° to 104°F) GHG 44 Control Station -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
-20° to 55°C (T4) (-4° to 131°F)
GHG 61. MCB -55° to 110°C (-67° to 230°F)
GHG 2 Control Switch 20 A -55° to 45°C (-67° to 113°F)
GHG 610 Actuating Flap -55° to 60°C (-67° to 140°F)
GHG 23 Main Switch -55° to 40°C (-67° to 104°F)
GHG 635 Motor Starter -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F)
GHG 261 Switch -55° to 52°C (-67° to 125°F)
Intrinsically Safe Barriers -40° to 60°C (-40° to 140°F)
GHG 262/263 Control Switch -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
Intrinsically Safe DIN Rail Devices -20° to 60°C (-4° to 140°F)
20 A/40 A
LB Local Bus Intrinsically Safe -20° to 60°C (-4° to 140°F)
GHG 263 Main Switch 40 A -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
.M45/.M72 Measuring Instrument -55° to 58°C (-67° to 136°F)
GHG 264 Main Switch -36° to 55°C (-32° to 131°F)
N2SU Control Stations -50° to 50°C (-58° to 122°F)
GHG 265/266 Main Switch 125 A -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
Signal Light Components for -55° to 50°C (-67° to 122°F)
GHG 270 Installations Switch -55° to 40°C (-67° to 104°F)
Switch Board
GHG 29 Control Switch -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
XC Electric Heaters -45° to 40°C (-49° to 104°F)
11 | W W W . C R O U S E - H I N D S . C O M
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGES FOR
WIRING METHODS
WIRING & INSTALLATION OPERATING TEMPERATURE WIRING & INSTALLATION OPERATING TEMPERATURE
METHODS RANGE METHODS RANGE
Blanking Plug GHG 960 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F) EZS Seals -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)*
Bus Bar System GHG 758 -55° to 40°C (-67° to 104°F) Flameproof Cable Bushing -20° to 100°C (-4° to 212°F)
Cable Entry GHG 960 -55° to 70°C (-67° to 158°F) Flameproof Enclosure GHG 6 -45° to 40°C (-49° to 104°F)
CD Drain -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F) Form 7, Form 8, Mark 9 -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
CGB Cable Fittings -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F) Conduit Outlet Bodies
CHICO® A and Chico® CHICO A installation must be FS/FD Device Boxes -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
SpeedSeal™ Sealing performed at or above 2°C GHG 960 Cable Entry -55° to 70°C (-67° to 158°F)
Compound (35°F) for Groups C & D, at or above GHG 960 Drainage Plug -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
4.4°C (40°F) for Group B, and must cure GUA/EAB/EAJ Conduit -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
according to instructions enclosed with Outlet Boxes
product. The temperature of Chico
GUB Junction Boxes -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
SpeedSeal compound must be between
10° and 29°C (50° and 85°F) before mix- HTL Lubricant -56° to 982°C (-70° to 1800°F)
ing. The sealing fitting must be kept at or NCG Nonmetallic Cable Glands -30° to 60°C (-22° to 140°F)
above 4°C (40°F) during the 4 to 10 NH Fuse GHG 611 -55° to 100°C (-67° to 212°F)
minute expansion/gel time of the com- PLG Plugs -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
pound. Remove all ice crystals from inside
RE/REC Reducers -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
the conduit seal before dispensing Chico
SpeedSeal compound. After curing, the STL Lubricant -28° to 148°C (-20° to 300°F)
operating temperature is determined by TECK Connectors -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
the fitting with which it is installed. Terminal Box GHG 60.0 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
Distribution Board GHG 619 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F) Terminal Box GHG 72 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
ECD Breathers, Drains and -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F) Terminal Box GHG 73 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
Universal Drain/Breathers Terminal Box GHG 74 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
EJB Junction Boxes -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F) Terminal Box GHG 79 -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
ES Seals -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* Terminal GHG 240 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
EYD Seal and Drain -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* TMC Fittings -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
EYDX Expanded Fill Sealing -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* TMCX Fittings -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F).
Fittings and Drain Epoxy installation must be performed at
EYS Seals -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* or above 4.4°C (40°F) and must cure
EYS29 Elbow Seals -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* according to instructions enclosed with
EYSR Retrofit Seal/Drain Seal -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* product.
EYSX Expanded Fill Sealing -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* Trumpet-Shaped Cable Entry -50° to 80°C (-58° to 176°F)
Fitting GHG 960
EZD Inspection Seal -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* UNY/UNF Unions -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
and Drains W-Series Junction Boxes -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
*CHICO A installation must be performed at or above 2°C (35°F) for Groups C & D, at or above 4.4°C (40°F) for Group B, and must cure according to instructions enclosed
with product. The temperature of Chico SpeedSeal compound must be between 10° and 29°C (50° and 85°F) before mixing. The sealing fitting must be kept at or above 4°C
(40°F) during the 4 to 10 minute expansion/gel time of the compound. Remove all ice crystals from inside the conduit seal before dispensing Chico SpeedSeal compound.
Solutions.Worldwide. TM